Home

Type Q80BD-J61BT11N/Q81BD-J61BT11 CC-Link System

1. After system switchin s E 9 system System interface board Standby Control system lt system Station No 1 N Tracking cable Station No 0 Station No 2 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor App 47 App 47 APPENDIX MELSEC Create a program to monitor which system in the redundant CPU system is accessed from the CC Link Ver 2 board Control system judgment flag Control Standby At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Error code Standby system system 6120 occurrence System not determined system swtsts SM1516 OFF ON OFF ag e Indicates the CPU module operation status e Remains ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant system is running 3 Retry processing for error that will occur during system switching processing Any of the following errors will occur when the MELSEC data link library is used to access the Redundant CPU during system switching processing Examples of errors that will occur in redundant CPU e Asystem switching error Error code 4248H e CPU starting error Error code 40044 e Other system CPU module error Error code 4245n e Access destinatio
2. 81 CC Link 1 slot Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display Screen Ad Network No 0 Station No 255 DEC 16bit Display the current device status 1 Device Information To change the data format refer to Section 8 3 8 Display the status of the network that is currently set 2 Network Status To set up the network refer to Section 8 3 4 Show the data format and the type of the device being displayed word device double word device and bit device To change the device type refer to Section 8 3 5 To change the data format refer to Section 8 3 8 3 Data Format 1 The number of displayed columns will differ depending on the settings of a connection target CPU and display format 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 4 Setting the monitoring destination This section describes how to set up the network to be used when performing device monitoring The destination should be specified when starting the Device Monitor Utility 1 Menu selection Select Setting Network setting on the menu bar 2 Dialog box Network Setting Channel 84 CC Link 1 slot Network Setting C Own Sta 1 Channel Set the channel to be used 2 Network Setting Set the own and other stations as well as the network number and station number 1 To access a multiple CPU system selec
3. 14 4 14 4 Creating a Programmes oc tom te eh atte repe a eae eme tette 14 5 1474 Initial Setting son on esas ead een age ag 14 5 14 4 2 Zero poinitireturm eontrol a emet etm e pe D Ure RD dme m e HUE 14 7 14 4 9 Positioning Control aa altes age enda ltesa e 14 9 14 4 4 JOG operation 14 11 14 5 Executing the Data 14 13 14 5 1 Checking the data link status 14 13 14 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sesseseeeemeee 14 15 15 ERROR CODE 15 1to 15 6 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 1 to 16 32 16 1 Verification of Problem Occurrence ssssssssssssssssseeeeener nennen nnne trennen nnns 16 2 16 2 Troubleshooting for Installation and Uninstallation sn 16 4 16 21 ristallati n falled onore 16 4 16 2 2 Uninstallation failed nennen nennen nnne nnn tnnt 16 4 16 2 3 When the instruction displayed on the screen is not effective at installation 16 6 16 2 4 When the driver is not installed sssssssssssssses eene 16 10 16 3 Troubleshooting When Personal Computer cannot be Startup or System Down Occurred 16 12 16 3 1 Chec
4. A 20 Standby master function 1 7 4 25 Standby master station number SW0073 uoc MADE oe TS EC tef App 25 Station number duplicate check 4 42 Station number setting 5 14 Station information setting checklist App 62 Switching a bit device on off 8 28 Switch setting status SWOO06A App 25 System 2 1 System down prevention 1 6 T T branch connection 5 12 Terminal block for data link 5 2 Test screen 8 15 The remote device station is not operating normally eese 16 25 Total number of stations SW0070 App 25 Transient transmission A 20 4 54 Transient Transmission Processing Time 44 Transient transmission status SB0094 C App 21 Transient transmission status SW0094 Led best RE e der Re DT lee eee fs App 27 Transmission 3 2 Troubleshooting esee 16 1 Index 3 Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defe
5. _ a a 11 3 11 3 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 11 1 3 Setting up the remote device station 11 4 The following shows the remote device station s switch settings AJ65VBTCU 68DAV CON C H 4 N 2 B L con o c m g 500 BN Jd E L1 CJ CD DJ DJ CJ CD C3 4 e Lo v USME Mode select switch 0 Nomal mode CON P C D MITSUBISHI CCuink Station number setting switch Transmission speed setting switch 10 place Station number 1 STATION NO 1 place 156kbps MELSEC 11 4 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 11 1 4 Creating a Program MELSEC Create the digital value setting program for performing the initial setting and outputting analog values for remote device stations The following illustrates the relation between the remote device station s I O operations and the user program when controlling the remote device station and how the digital value settin
6. App 56 Appendix 7 1 Operation procedure sssssssssssssssssseseseenee nennen ennt nnne nnne App 56 Appendix 7 1 1 Starting and exiting the tool ssssssssssssssssseeseeeeee eene App 56 Appendix 7 1 2 Backing up parameters sssssssssssssssseseseeeeneenne enne nnns App 57 Appendix 7 1 3 Restoring parameters sessi enmt nennen App 58 Appendix 7 1 4 How to check the version App 60 Appendix 7 2 Precautions when using Parameter backup restoration App 61 Appendix 8 Setting Checklists ssssssssssssssssssssseseeeeeeene nennen entrent App 62 Appendix 8 1 Parameter setting checklist cccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeaeeeeaceeeaaeeseaeeeeaeesseeeseaeeesanesaees App 62 Appendix 8 2 Station information setting checklist App 63 Appendix 8 3 Device assignment checklist cceecceeecceeeceeeeceeeeneeeeaeeecaneeteneeseaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeetsaeesaees App 65 Appendix 9 Combinations with Existing Software cccccccsceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseneeeeneeecaeeeeeeeeseneeseneeneieeess App 67 Appendix 10 Checking Serial Number and Function Version App 68 Appendix 11 CC Link Version icti ete i ea Le e dd tein e o e delve ede a
7. 11 13 11 13 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 2 4 Creating a program Create the digital value setting program for performing the initial setting and outputting analog values for remote device stations of station No 4 The programming procedure for station No 4 is the same as the one used in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 11 1 4 1 For the remote device station of station No 4 device Nos of the remote input RX and remote output RY and addresses of the remote register RWr RWw are changed Master station station No 0 IBM PC AT compatible PC Remote device station station No 1 Remote device station station No 4 Remote inputs RX X18 initial data processing request flag X19 initial data setting completion flag mdReceive h I 1 remote station ready ul Remote outputs i RY Y00 CH analog output enable signal flag mdSend 5 9 18 initial data processing completion flag 19 initial data setting request flag 1 i Remote resisters i RWw mdSend RWw0 CH 1 digital value setting area RWw8 analog output enable disable setting area 11 14 11 14 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 2 5 Execut
8. Local station station No 1 Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Occupies 2 stations Local station station No 5 Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor 12 9 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 2 2 Setting the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section 73 2 3 g e e 89 Channel No setting switch 1 OFF 2 OFF 2 gt 5 5 ET E SE BS as Se 06 12 10 12 10 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board settina Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Other settings z 1 Channel No Channel No 81 21 z
9. Program CC Link Ver 2 board Remote device station Remote input Link scan mdReceive Input Remote input RX RX Remote output Link scan Remote output mdSend RY RY Write Remote Link scan Remote mdSend register gt register RWw RWw 7 Read Remote Link scan Remote mdReceive register register RWr RWr 1 OVERVIEW 3 Local station communication The communication between the master station and the local station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission Personal computer Program Receive mdSend mdSend mdReceive Personal computer a Cyclic transmission Data communication between stations can be performed in N N mode using bit data remote input RX and remote output RY and word data remote registers RWw and RWr Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Remote input RX Remote output RY Link scan Link scan Local station PLC CPU Remote output RY Remote input Remote register RWw Link scan MELSEC Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Link scan Automatic refresh Remote register Transient transmission RWw Automatic refresh D Read and write operations can be performed for the local station buffer memory and CPU device at an arbi
10. oO O P OP POP P Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 3 Double Word device Display format Batch monitor DEC decimal signed 32 bits DEC decimal unsigned 32 bits HEX hexadecimal 32 bits OCT octal 32 bits BIN binary 32 bits 4 Bit device Display format Vertical Indication Horizon Indication F 0 decimal Horizon Indication F 0 hexadecimal Horizon Indication 0 F decimal Horizon Indication 0 F hexadecimal 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 9 Numerical pad The Numerical Pad can be used to set device values and other numeric values To display the Numerical Pad select Option Numerical Pad on the menu bar 1 Click the numeric value input field Data Changing Device Vw 0000 C HEX cpec 0 n 2 The Numerical Pad is displayed Enter a desired value by pressing the corresponding buttons and then click the button Numerical Pad sper d gonan 3 The value is entered in the system Data Changing Device Vw 0000 C HEX pec 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 10 Other operations By double clicking a device number on the Device Monitor Utility window the word device double word device data can be changed or the bit device can be switched between on and off 1 Word device Double Word device The followi
11. Reserve invalid station select Sees Sees eee a ee eee E ee ee sen eee en m uM a ee ae ee Intelligent buffer select word Setting not required 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 3 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 2 Mode This section explains the parameter settings using the CC Link Ver 2 utility 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 Local station Remote I O QJ61BT11N Remote I O station occupies station occupies 4 stations occupies 1 station 1 station Master station Q80BD J61BT11N Ver 2 compatible remote device station occupies 1 station Stano o 0 Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Operational settings 250 x 8 ms lLinkrefreshoycle settings Station information setting items evice station station device station station Remote station points 128 points 32 points 224 points 32 points Reserve invalid station select No setting No setting No setting No setting soa see eor automatic EI Setting not required 6 7 6 7 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 3 2 Local station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are
12. 19 0 75 CY C CCuinx tA 91 3 58 99 3 90 Unit mm inch App 92 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 19 2 Q81BD J61BT11 147 5 79 i 158 6 22 141 5 55 K e c m o O i5 Unit mm inch App 93 App 93 INDEX 0 A B C 16 point register monitor 8 23 Auto return function 1 6 4 23 Backing up parameters App 57 Batch monitoring essssss 8 22 Station based block data assurance function esi MALI ET eL mi EE 4 36 Buffer memory details App 1 Buffer memory 3 9 CC Link dedicated cable 3 6 3 7 3 8 CC Link version App 70 CC Link Ver 1 board A 20 CC Link Ver 2 board A 20 CC Link Ver 2 8 3 Channel No setting switch 5 6 Changing word device values 8 27 Combinations of Boards with Existing Software App 67 Communication with remote I O stations 4 3 Communication between the Master station and Remote I O stati
13. A 20 Index 2 Remote net 4 A 20 U Remote net additional mode A 20 Uninstalling the software package 7 16 Remote net ver 1 mode A 20 Remote net ver 2 mode A 20 V Remote station A 20 Verification of problem occurrence 16 2 Replacing the CC Link Board App 53 Ver 1 compatible slave station A 20 Reserve station function 1 8 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX App 13 Reserved station specified status SB0074 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY App 13 per TM Ld App 20 Ver 2 compatible remote registers RWw and Reserved station specified status SW0074 15 teen tee 25 Ver 2 compatible slave station 20 Restoring parameters App 58 IW S Weight ite adt n eunte 3 2 Setting Checklists App 62 Whether Sp ndine cove datas enabled Setting the input data status from a data link or not R ae rs 896 4 51 faulty Station ena 4 24 Weaning Message Appeals On Windows e DEEP 20 omnee 74 Slave station disconnect function 4 22 Standby master station
14. seeeeneneem emen 12 8 12 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional 12 9 12 2 1 Configuring the system n aiena Anea e AAA tte tnnt tnnt tern ntn 12 9 12 2 2 Setting the master station ssssssssssssssseseeeeeeneneeneen eene 12 10 1 Switch setting channel No setting 12 10 2 Parameter settings cccececsscesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaeeseceeesaeesseeseseeseeeaeseeesteeeneeseenteeties 12 11 12 2 3 Setting the local station 12 12 1 Switch setting channel No setting sse 12 12 2 Parameter settings eene 12 12 122 4 Creating program x i ete qt ee ette qe bei ite EE 12 13 12 2 5 Executing the data link 3 2 iet dette 12 14 1 Checking the data link status 12 14 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sse 12 14 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 13 1to 13 12 13 1 Configuring a System ARE RAAR EAR REAN T EAER ES EARE AA E EEA 13 1 13 2 Setting the Master Station aaaea NA AE NEEE AER a EE OA AAA E A 13 2 13 2 1 Switch setting channe
15. 1 Select the remote net Select the remote net ver 2 mode additional mode App 71 Select the remote net ver 2 mode Will a ver 2 compatible station be connected in the future Select the remote net Select the remote net ver 1 mode ver 2 mode YES App 71 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 13 New and Improved Functions Appendix 13 1 Change of hardware function There is no new and improved functions related to the hardware version Appendix 13 2 Update of software package For details of the update version software and the functions which are added or changed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative For the precautions when installing the software package refer to Section 7 1 App 72 App 72 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 14 Restrictions for Operating System From the OS which can be used as an operating environment use the SW1DNC CCBD2 B version indicated in the table for the OS shown in the following table Version of SW1DNC CCBD2 B Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Version 1 12N Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Server 2008 Version 1 16S Do not use a function added by a version newer than the support version Refer to the following for the installation method of the SW1DNC CCBD2 B support version and the support manual 1 Installation method for supported version The software Version 1 12N and 1 165 SW1DNC C
16. sssssssssseeeneeeennenee nennen nnns 11 1 111 1 Gonfiguririgia Systems a t e etie ere ie doen de ut eot debut dene dius 11 1 11 1 2 Setting the master station 11 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting nennen 11 2 2 Parameter settings sssssssssssseseeeeeneeneneen eene 11 3 11 1 3 Setting up the remote device station sssssssssseeeneeneeeeeeeneneneeeene nennen 11 4 11 1 4 Creating a Program ssssssssesesseeeeneneneeeneeenn nennen nennen nnn nnne nennen eere inneren enne 11 5 11 1 5 Executing the data link nennen nnne nennen nennen 11 7 1 Checking the data link status eese eene etre etre trennt te 11 7 2 Confirming the operation with a user program ssseeeneneemem enn 11 9 11 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional 11 10 11 2 1 Configuring the en nnne nnns 11 10 11 2 2 Setting the master station sssssssssssseseeeeenennenee 11 11 1 Switch setting channel No setting nennen 11 11 2 Parameter settings RR 11 12 11 2 3 Setting the remote device station oo ececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeesee
17. Board detail information Channel No 84 Sta No o Master station Ver 2 mode e Save SB SW Transmission rate 10Mbps Data link status In data link In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status INormal Board type Q80BDJ61BT11N Product information 140720000000000 B Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally IRQ No ROM version ym Memory FI300000F13FFFFH 1 0 port Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 2 Min 2 Current 2 Link refresh time ms Max 3 Min 1 Current 1 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally FEM m L S MT LOCAL OFF No error has occurred ERR sw M S PRM TIME LINE 14 13 14 13 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 2 LED displays of the Intelligent device station Be sure that the LED displays show the following status m c 24 V DC is being supplied AJ65BT D75P2 S3 PW e The module is normally RUN e M The data link is being executed normally SD gt BP ae RD e Sending data LERR O mde gt Receiving data No error has occurred 14 14 14 14 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3
18. sse 3 8 3 4 Buffer oA c 3 9 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to 4 54 LE Function List P Et 4 1 4 2 Basic EUFctlols er ete tete e t e e to iret fola de nbi 4 3 4 2 1 Communication with remote I O stations 4 3 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations sssssssssssssseeeeeeee 4 5 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations cccccccscceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaeeeeieeeseneenaeessaees 4 10 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device station sennnnnn 4 16 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability eerie iaeiaiai aenieiai eani AiAi E a 4 22 4 3 1 Disconnecting a data link faulty station and continuing the data link with only normal stations slave station disconnect Unctionis e AEA A R EREE 4 22 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal auto return ICIO nerit eia eret E E 4 23 4 3 3 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station setting the input data status from a data link faulty 4 24 4 3 4 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty standby master function 4 25 4 3 5 Monitoring the operation of the software operating system driver inside the hardware Driver WBT NCO aerer tint enc ED D Ro D RER
19. Local station programmable controller RX The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the local station s CPU device turns on off 23 Formula Normal value a1 LR X m LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL 1 ms 4 Maximum value a1 LR X m LS X 2X 2xn 1 1 SLX k 1 ms 4 a1 Request processing time of the personal computer LR Link refresh time LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time k LS SL However the decimal point is rounded up m LS LR However the decimal point is rounded up n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station 3 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RX RY but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWr RWw 4 When writing RY to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function 4 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt intelligent device station The transmission delay time between the master station CC Link Ver 2 board and the intelligent device station varies depending on the type of intelligent device station used Refer to the User s Manual for the intelligent device module to be used When reading RX and RWr from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the
20. TEE TM EE o i NEU MUN qoe i DER 82 a 8 point output module output module output module 92 point output module E Device area when remote I O points setting is made Device area when remote I O points setting is not made 1 Set points to even numbered 8 point setting remote I O stations consecutively If points are set to odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations select 8 points 8 points reserved in the remote station points setting of the last of the consecutive remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station 1 station Occupies 1 station reserved Station ___ number 4 8points8points reserved to Odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations cannot be set for 8 remote station points Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Cannot be set i 1 i 1 i i to 8 point output module 8 point output module i 1 1 1 0 D 1 1 17 4 c 4 Refer to Section 8 2 5 for parameter setting Setting method The setting is performed at lt lt Parameter sett
21. 11 Delay information seting 02 50 micro sec Station information settings 2 Clear 15 AN connect count 12 p Driver WDT monitoring ime 9 3 Use driver WDT functi No 5ta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta ER 1 6 1 1 1 Remote device station single Occupies 3 stations Ver 2 Remote device station v single 1 station 1 3 p Block data assurance per station 17 2 4 T Assure block data This function use link refresh function 14 a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 11 3 Parameter Setting Check List Setting range Item Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 lt Master statio Local station Standby master station 156 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps Remote net Ver 1 mode KRemote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line Setting item 1 Channel No 2 Sta No Type 3 Transmission rate 4 Mode 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err St
22. O MITSUBISHI 1196 AJe5sBTC1 32D1 X10 X1F X0 X4 X8 XC X10 X14 X18 X1C P DAT DO tea 5246 x1 X5 X9 XD X11 X15 X19 X1D com X2 X6 XA XE X12 X16 XIA XIE DB SLD FG x3 X7 XB XF X13 X17 X1B XIF Ir T gm eT el amp o o o o o c o L 24 o o o o o o 199 D 09 52 o o o o o o VM 0 10 4 10 4 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 4 Creating a Program This section explains how the created program reads data from the remote input RX and writes them to the remote output RY in communications with remote I O stations The following illustrates the relation between the remote I O stations I O operations and the user program when controlling the remote I O stations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No O Personal computer User program Russudolaecenzssidrizisdomer2emstucesiitate qitod 2 Remote inputs RX 1 RXOF to RX00 XOF to X00 mdReceiwe RX1F to RX10 X1F to X10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 Remote outputs RY RYOF to RYOO Remote I O station station
23. Parameter backup restore tool 6 The CC Link board reset request is displayed Parameter backup Parameter restore To make restored parameters effective click the Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them button i Parameter file AE E ES T The CC Link board is reset Set paramete File path Board reset is necessary to validate parameter s Do you reset board Parameter fih M CC Link End App 59 App 59 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 1 4 How to check the version The following shows how to check the version of the Parameter backup restore tool 1 Click the icon FQ on the title bar of the Parameter backup restore tool screen 2 Click Version information in the system menu Parameter backup restore tool Move PA store Minimize gard driver and back up th X Close Alt F4 Version information Click raramexer uacseu up ec ew ik parameter 3 The version of the Parameter backup restore tool is displayed Parameter backup restore tool Parameter backup restore tool Version 1 00 Copyright C 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED App 60 App 60 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 2 Precautions when using Parameter backup restoration tool The following are the precautions for using the Parameter backup restoration tool 1 Precautions when activating Parameter
24. C HEX DEC C OCT 5 4 ons Item Description Set a type of a device whose value is to be changed Enter a block number for ER 1 Device Type Enter a network number for LW and LSW Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG Set a number of a device whose value is to be changed HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal 2 Device No OCT Octal 3 Setting Data Set a value to be changed HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal 4 Points Set the number of points to perform continuous change of values HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 1 When the DEC Decimal is selected only signed decimal format can be specified N WARNING Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 7 Switching a bit device on off The designated bit device can be switched on off as follows 1 Menu selection Select Device Write Bit device setting Bit device resetting on the menu bar 2 Dialog box E 1 Device Type Device Type i xtdirect link input E Network No 1 2 DeviceNo f HEX DEC OCT
25. When the utility has been started up restart the utility after installing the driver If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert now What do you want the wizard to do 16 9 16 9 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 2 4 When the driver is not installed MELSEC The driver is installed automatically when installing the board on the personal computer after installing the software package For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the following operation is required Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller If your hardware came with an installation CD 2 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Click Next to continue Ceres Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options v SS ey Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installe 0 Search removable media floppy CD ROM v Include this location in the search DAD rivers x86 Dont search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Caes CS Come
26. en a ep ten a eaten aep Saale aia ates ail 8 28 8 3 9 Numerical pad 2 2 d nci o ci cn a Eden Le a Oo eo BL Leda 8 29 8 3 10 Other operations inne e ee dd eti Ie d dde Le d Lad d e pe ed s 8 30 9 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 9 1109 2 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS 10 1 to 10 8 10 1 Configuring a System i A a AAEE 10 1 10 2 Setting up the master Station aa aR R R R A RRR 10 2 10 2 1 Switch setting channel No 10 2 10 22 Parameter settings 5 GEB abes avene alesqi eedem 10 3 10 3 Setting up the remote I O stations nnnm nnne 10 4 10 4 Creating a Program 5 ccrte eee eee eee e ue ee s 10 5 10 5 Executing the nnda ten aeter neant nts 10 6 10 5 1 Checking the data link status aiei Naa nente tentent nnn 10 6 1 Checking the master stati n N 10 6 2 Checking remote I O stations nennen nennen 10 7 10 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program ssseeeee 10 8 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION 11 1 to 11 16 11 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode
27. 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible i compatible compatible compatible area area area area area area area area Receive station Send station Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 Master Additional compatible area station Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 Local Additional compatible area station mode Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area RJe1BT11 LJ61BT11 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11N A80BDE J61BT11 Master QJ61BT11 station A80BDE J61BT11 Local A80BDE J61BT13 station Ver 1 compatible QJ61BT11 Ver 1 compatible Ver 2 compatible Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote station Ver 1 compatible Sn 1 The additional mode is not supported 4 51 4 51 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC RJe1BT11 LJ61BT11 L26CPU BT A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 L26CPU PBT QJ61BT11 ABOBDE Je1BT13 Intelligent device Remote device Remote Q80BD J61BT11N QJ61BT11 station station I O station Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11N Local station Master station Local station Additional mode Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible i compatible area i area area i area Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatib
28. 2 Behavior when entering the fast startup function is enabled The following explains the behavior of the board when the fast startup function is enabled e The board is not reconnected even after the fast startup e After the fast startup 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link Ver 2 board from the CC Link Ver 2 utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Countermeasure When the fast startup function is enabled the setting is changed to disabled by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to Appendix 17 App 82 App 82 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 17 MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is a service application which monitors the Windows Power Options settings every 30 seconds to prevent the personal computer from entering the power save mode hibernate sleep or fast startup MELSECPowerManager is applicable for the following operating systems e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 When a personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled the following message is displayed and the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of Windows were changed as follows Invalidating the s
29. 3 3 ae a 3 mdReceive 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 2 5 Executing the data link 12 14 Turn ON the local stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status Refer to Section 12 1 5 1 a Checking the master station and local stations for how to check the operation status of the master station and local stations Ver 1 intelligent device stations Ver 2 intelligent device stations under normal data link condition Confirming the operation with a user program With a user program check whether the data link is performed correctly or not by transferring data between the master station and the local stations Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the system configuration shown on the next page For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Execute user program of the local station Sta No 1 and 5 within 10 minutes after an user program of the master station has been loaded When the remote output RY80 3 is turned ON the remote input RX80 1 and the remote output RY80 2 turns ON When the remote output RYO 4 is turned ON the remote input 5 and 6 turn ON When a value is set to the remote register RWw10 9 the value is written to the remote register RWr10 7 a
30. Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the CC Link version matching status of the parameters and slave stations 0 Normal 1 Matching error SWO0144 Example of matching error 744v Installation Parameter SW0145 CC Link ver Ver 2compatible remote Ver 1compatible remote 7450 installation device station device station Installation param Ver icompatible remote Ver 2compatible remote 5 0146 eter matching device station device station 6 7466 Status b15 b14 b13 SW0147 16 15 14 7471 32 31 30 48 47 46 Indicates in which mode the system is operating SW0148 Paramet r thode 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 7481 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode Indicates in which mode the host is operating SW0149 Host parameter 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 7491 mode 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode x5 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 6 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup App 28 App 28 APPENDIX MELSEC The update timing of the data in a link special register SW differs depending on the link register number The following table shows the update timings of the link special registers Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing SW0041 SW0071 Updated individua
31. On off information from a local station to the master station or another local station 2 The on off information of the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of a local station The remote output RY is used as the output information to be used by the local station system 3 The information in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station and the remote output RY buffer memory of another local station 4 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory The remote input RX is used as the input information to be used by the local station systems 5 The input status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Personalcomputer Masterstation Station number 1 Station number 2 CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 1 station _ occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Pw Remote inputRX i Remote output RY Remote output RY i f M Rx to Rx00 3 1 F BvoE du bye d RXOF to Rx00 9 i RYoFtoRYOO RYOF to RYOO i Program RX1D to RX10 f IIRY1D to RY10 Jm RX2F to 20 i RY2FteRY20 i RY2F to RY20 i i i i RX3F to RX30
32. Reserved station Station number 4 SE y 1 I 1 1 ee Master Local station Reserved station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Stationnumber8 Station number 10 Lo me Fe Remote station Remote station 4 stations Remote station Remote station occupies occupies 1 1 occupies occupies 2 stations 1 station 2 stations 1 station If any of the connected remote stations local stations intelligent device stations or standby master station is designated as a reserved station the data link with that station will become disabled Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 for setting details 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 2 Powering off a station in operation without detecting an error error invalid station setting function By setting network parameter this function prevents any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that is powered off in the system configuration from being treated as a data link faulty station by the master and local stations Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station problems occurring in that station can no longer be detected In addition the error invalid station settings cannot be changed while online because they are set with network parameter
33. vie paints 32 points 64 points 128 points 4 stations RWw P P Remote register RW 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 1 Maximum number of connected modules A CC Link system can be configured with the number of modules meeting the following conditions Master station 26 A Personal Local station Local station Local station Local station computer Personal ESI computer 8l i RJ61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N LJ61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N L26CPU BT A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 L26CPU PBT AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 QJ61BT11 N A80BDE J61BT13 CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor required CC Link dedicated cable Maximum 26 Maximum 42 Maximum 64 ls uf x 4 dm f is Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I O station AE 00 00 OOO 9 Remote I O module RS 232 interface module Analog digital converter AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BT R2 AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BTC1 32D Terminal resistor required Total 64 1 Remote net ver 1 mode a Number of modules occupying 1 station b Number of modules occupying 2 stations c Number of modules occupying 3 stations d Number of modules occupying 4 stations A Nu
34. Correct the parameter settings or installed system configuration Are the master station link special registers 0080 to SW0083 data link status of other stations turned on NO Master station failure station link special registers SW0098 to SWO009B duplicate station number status YES Check the master station side Check the module for which Check the module for which SW0098 to SWO009B on SW0098 to SWO009B on Check the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 side Are the station numbers i hes Is the power on set correctly YES Set the station numbers correctly Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Y Reset the master station Turn on the power NO Is the RD LED lit YES NO IS the NO Doesn t it work normally communication cable wired correctly YES Correct the communication cable wiring Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure failure h 1 2 3 x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance between stations 16 28 16 28 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the L RUN LED lit NO MELSEC 3 Is the SD LED lit flashing Is the SD LED lit YES Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure Are the station No
35. TEES Other settings 5 Automatic reconnection station count Cancel 3 9 Transmission rate 156kbps Occupied Sta lt ccupiert station Default 6 Default Standby ter station 029 d 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode v Input for Err Sta _ rne tt 7 Se a Station information settings Delay information setting 0 50 micro sec AL eonnest cun 8 p Driver WDT monitoring time Remote station e tumido z Use diver WDT function 9 Block data assurance per station I Assure block data This function use link refresh function i a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 12 3 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type 5 Master station Local statio Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mod p Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input fo
36. This function use link refresh function 13 P Lirkretesh cycle d ms 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Table 6 1 Parameter setting items list Setting required X Setting not required Settina it Description Master p ru Reference TUA P station y section master station Sets a station No and a type of the own station Setting range Sta No 0 1 to 64 Default 1 Section 1 Sta No Type Type When Sta No is 0 Master station 4 3 4 When Sta No is 1 to 64 Local station Default Standby master station Set the transmission speed of the CC Link Ver 2 board 2 Transmission rate Setting item 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps Default Set the operation mode of the own station Setting item Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Remote net ver 1 mode Default Offline Operational settings Make the expanded cyclic setting when increasing the number of cyclic points Can be set in remote net ver 2 4 Expanded cyclic mode or remote net additional mode Setting item single Default double quadruple octuple Set the occupied station count by the own station Setting item occupies 1 station Default occupies 5 Occupied Sta 2 stations occupies 3 stations occupies 4 stations Set how to handle the input data in the event of a data 6 Input for Err Sta link error Setting item Hold Clear Default Other settings Set the number of retries to be performed when a
37. a Insert SW1DNC CCBD2 B into the CD ROM drive b Click Start Run Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open G Tool US Prmbkup exe v OK Cancel Browse c Click the button in the Run dialog box and select the Parameter backup restore tool PrmBkup exe 5 1 PrmBkup exe is stored in the following folder CD ROM drive gt lt Tool gt lt US gt d Check the displayed path then click the button e The Parameter backup restore tool dialog box is displayed 2 Exiting the tool To exit the Parameter backup restoration tool click Close C in the system menu the button at the top right of the dialog box or button at the bottom of the screen App 56 App 56 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 1 2 Backing up parameters The following describes the procedure for backing up parameters 1 Activate the Parameter backup restore tool 5 Type the name of a program Folder document or Refer to Ap pend ix 7 Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open G Tool US Prmbkup exe OK Cancel Browse MaBaremeterbeekuprestorg too 2 Select the Parameter backup in the Parameter as backup restore tool dialog box pedis Enter the destination where the parameters are to be arameter information Parameter backed CC Link parameter backed up in the Parameter file setting fi
38. i i RY3F to RY30 i i i i 4 i RX4F to RX40 i RY4F to RY40 i i mdReceive pe Dyro XB dp ve E i3 ESSEN i2 i RX5F to RX50 3 i J RYsF to RY50 2 i i RX6F to RX60 RY6F to RY60 i i RX7F to RX70 to RY70 RX8F to RX80 i RY8F to RY80 RY7FF to RY7FO A E E A AEE S N a 8 a A A N T E eeeeeee The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master station and the local stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC On off information from the master station to the local stations 6 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RY buffer memory of the master station 7 The information in the remote output RY buffer memory is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of each of the local stations 8 The input status stored in the buffer memory remote input RX is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 Local station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Personal computer Master station Prog am i RYOF to RYOO RY3F to RY30 6 comasend_ gt EERYAE to RY4 RYSF to RY50 RX5F to RX50
39. 4 3 5 Monitoring the operation of the software operating system driver inside the hardware Driver WDT function Driver WDT function monitors the operation of the software operating system driver inside the hardware by the timer function on CC Link Ver 2 board When the driver cannot reset the timer of the board within the specified driver WDT monitoring time CC Link Ver 2 board detects driver WDT error Driver WDT function detects driver operation delay due to the access error from the driver to CC Link Ver 2 board or system high load 1 Driver WDT settings For the setting method refer to section 8 2 5 The driver WDT function is set to invalid as a default 2 When the driver WDT error has occurred The following shows the operation when driver WDT error has occurred 1 CC Link Ver 2 board and the driver stop link refresh and communication and are disconnected from the network in order to avoid an erroneous output A CPU stop error occurs when checking the CC Link Ver 2 board from other station on which the driver WDT error has occurred 2 RUN LED flicks and SD LED turns ON on the CC Link Ver 2 board 3 28158 9202H Driver WDT error occurs when accessing CC Link Ver 2 board from the application program in which the CC Link Ver 2 utility and MELSEC data link library function are used 1 When the multiple applications in which MELSEC data link library is used are executed driver WDT error is returned to all the prog
40. 4 4 4 Station number duplicate check This function checks whether or not multiple modules with the same station number exist in the system when the master station is started up 1 When there is a duplicate station number the ERR LED is lit an error code is stored the SWOO6A switch setting status and the SBOO6A turns on 2 By correcting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link the ERR LED can be turned off and the data in the SWO006A can be cleared 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 5 Multiple CPU system support By setting the logical station number using the CC Link Ver 2 utility any CPU of a multiple CPU system in which a RJ61BT11 LJ61BT 11 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT QJ61BT11 N is installed can be accessed by a personal computer in which a CC Link Ver 2 board is installed Access example Using logical station number 65 an access can be made from a personal computer in which a CC Link Ver 2 board is installed to the CPU No 4 via a QJ61BT11 N the control CPU is the CPU No 2 Local station Station number 5 CPU No 2 is the control CPU Multiple CPU system Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Terminal resistor Setting the logical station number Set the logical station number in the Target of the CC Link Ver 2 utility For details on the Target refer to Section 8 2 6 Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settin
41. End 16 10 1 The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after installing the board and starting up the personal computer Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click the button 2 Select Search for the best driver in these locations lt For 32 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x86 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x86 lt For 64 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x64 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 16 10 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC When the Found New Hardware Wizard screen is not displayed automatically after the board installation update the driver on the Device Manager screen 1 Open the Windows Device Manager screen Right click on Computer Management Fie Action View Window Aalx e assem ARA Network Controller and select Update Driver Software 125 Computer Management Monitors E fl System Tools 29 88 Network adapters i E Event viewer Gp Other devices E E Shared Folders 4 Em E 2 Local Users and Groups fh Processors dij
42. MELSEC 14 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program Using a user program confirm that the data link is being executed normally Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual With the sample program the initialization zero point return positioning and jog operation can be performed Program execution Initialization Zero point return Positioning SS JOG operation Master station Bm NS Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 1 Terminal resistor Initialization operation occupies 4 station Intelligent device station station No 1 AJGSBT D79P2S3 Zero point return operation Positioning operation r3 JOG operation Positioning module Terminal resistor Servo amplifier moor amplifier 14 15 14 15 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC MEMO 14 16 14 16 15 ERROR DE MELSEC 15 ERROR CODE The following table shows the error codes For error codes which are not listed in this section refer to the following manuals MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual CC Link System Master Loc
43. Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System 5 Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Operating System Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise 32 bit version 64
44. RWwi2 E RWr12 2F2 number5 4F34 oo ro E RWr13 7 2F3 to to to to 2DCu RWw FC RWr FC 3DC For station 2DDu RWw FD RWr FD 3DD For station number 641 ope RWwFE RWFE apE f number64 2 RWwFF ooo odo RWrFF J D Ds ac tad gate asec Aaa meatier o m E NE PERIERE E App 5 App 5 APPENDIX App 6 Master station Address 2E0 For station 2 1 number 1 2E2u 2 3 2 4 For station 2 5 number 2 2 6 2 7 i 2 8 For station 2 9 number 2EAu 2 2 For station 2EDu number 4 2 2 2 0 For station 2F1u number 5 2F2u 2 to 3DC For station 3DD number 64 3DE b Master station RWr remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing itin the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Remote register RWr Local station Station number 2
45. SB0076 E74 b6 SB0077 E74 b7 SB0079 E74 b9 SB007B 7 b11 App 20 Input data status of host data link faulty station Number of host occupied stations Switch setting status Parameter setting status Host station operation status Master station information Standby master station information Scan mode setting information Operation specification when CPU is down status Reserved station specified status Error invalid station specified status Temporary error invalid station setting information Parameter receive status Master station return specification information Host master standby master operation status Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the host OFF Clear ON Hold Indicates the setting status of host occupied stations Number of occupied station SB0066 SB0067 x Indicates the setting status of the host OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SW006A Indicates the parameter setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored SW0068 Indicates the host data link operation status OFF Being executed ON Not executed Indicates the data link status OFF Data link control by the master station ON Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present OFF Not present ON Present Indicates the scan
46. This function use link refresh function z 10 gt uice E 4 a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 12 3 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type Master station Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 modep Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stationsTOccupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold Retry count 3 Times Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules Standby master station No No 0 Other settings Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 8 Driver WDT Monitoring Time CNo setting x 8 ms 9 Block data assurance perz Disable Enable station 10 Link refresh cycle CNo setting Station information settings All connect count Modules 1 Set station No 5 to the Ver 2 Intelligent device station 2 Set Remote net Ver 2 mode to the Ver 2 intelligen
47. Two words 32 points are used per station 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored e Two words 32 points are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYSE and RY9F cannot be used Remote I O station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations i Address For station EO number 1 1 1 For station 2 number 2 1 Forstation J 4 number3 E5 1 For station E6 number 4 For station number 5 1 1 i For station number 63 For station number 64 Remote input RX Remote output RY Address XOF to X00 X1F to X10 RY F to RY 0 1604 For station RY 1F to RY10 1614 number 1 RY 2F to RY 20 162 For station RY 3F to RY 30 1634 number 2 RY4F to RY40 164 For station RY 5F to RY50 165 number 3 RY 6F to RY 60 166 For station RY 7F to RY 70 1674 number 4 RY 8F to RY 80 1684 For station RY 9D to RY 90 1694 number 5 to to to RY7CO 1DC ror station RY7DF to RY7DO 10 number 63 RY7EF
48. of CC Link system master local module on the receiving side 4 By a link refresh the data RXO is stored in a device X0 of the CPU module Sending side personal computer Receiving side programmable controller i Personal computer CC Link Ver 2board t CC Link CPU module master and local module RY buffer RY RX x rc i 1 RYO turns ON L J 2 Gear s Link device f 3 N Y Link device Device program write Ver 2board Link scan i driver buffer Link refresh Link refresh CEES E E A A E aN E AE PEE P T ta E NE EON AA E 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 3 Link refresh The link refresh is executed between the link device and the CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer In order to execute the link refresh set the block data assurance per station setting and the link refresh cycle at Parameter settings Other settings screen in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 2 Link refresh time is shown on Board information screen Board detail information screen in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 2 2 However link refresh is not executed when the board WDT error or hardware failure occurred or data link has stopped 1 If the link refresh cycle is shortened CPU utilization of the personal computer may increase and load may
49. 16 1 ej X 1 067 SL ms LS Link scan time Refer to Appendix 3 1 BC Constant EE ee SL Local station s sequence program scan time 1 Round up decimals App 44 App 44 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Write OT LS X BC Write points 16 72 X 1 067 SL ms OT Data transmission time between the personal computer and the CC Link Ver 2 board The processing time varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following table shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with a Pentium Il 233MHz Batch read mdReceive Batch write mdSend LS Link scan time Refer to Appendix 3 1 BC Constant Transmission speed 10Mbps pm wp ess SL Local station s sequence program scan time x1 Round up decimals When performing a transient transmission using the md functions the transient transmission is executed in several runs by dividing the number of request data into sizes inside the md functions that can be received by the opposite station In addition after the communication line is opened the first md function performs extra transient transmission in order to obtain detailed information of the programmable controller App 45 App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board intelligent device station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Intell
50. 5 3 Installationz usse ERREUR ERU Epist di p 5 4 5 3 1 Precautions on handling the CC Link Ver 2 board sssssseeeeneenenn 5 4 5 3 2 Installation environment EAE enne nennen 5 4 5 39 39 Board iristallatlon ion ito 5 5 5 3 4 Setting Channel 5 6 5 4 WINING 5 7 5 4 1 Preparation before wiring 2 eeeesieeeeeseeeeeesene etes a tnit ttes R 5 7 542 Terminal block otn cnn ire deseen ir dee iit dc deed He dine eee d v 5 8 5 4 3 Winnog pIOCedure edis etae etude etus Dota Dota Dead ug 5 10 5 4 4 T branch corinectlOl 25er E ot poen pte 5 12 5 5 Station Number Settifig i ti ett e pte et pte Eo aetas 5 14 5 6 Transmission Rate and Mode Settings seems 5 15 Oil Test sonet dosage A AE 5 15 6 1 Parameter Setting Items feit Leute Foe ote Le dus Foe dae tee Po da 6 1 6 2 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 6 5 6 2 1 Master station network parameter settings sssssssseeneeeeeeeeneneeeeeeenenen 6 5 6 2 2 Local station network parameter settings sssssseeeeeeneeneeeeee nene
51. Input processing time LS x 16 Input processing time LS x 32 Input processing time LS x 3 Input processing time App 50 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 CC Link Board Functions CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Cyclic points increase function Available Unavailable 1 2 4 4 7 Remote I O station points setting Available Unavailable 0 points Setting for the reserved station Available Unavailable Parameter Saving function Available Unavailable m 8 2 4 CC Link Ver 1 board Reference A80BDE J61BT11 ASOBDE J61BT13 section Parameter Reading function Available Unavailable Parameter Verification function Available Unavailable SB SW save function Available Unavailable 3 MELSEC Data Link Library CCCII Sra Board CC Link Ver 1 Board pd ABOBDE J61BT11 ABOBDE J61BT13 S G fixed The sum of 024 to Date year month day Exp 2005 April 1st 0 5 0 4 0 1 06x 074 0000 fixed EM me name ESTEE EAD Je1BT11 mdBdVerRead 10 17H to 17u HIW format name format name QBBD J61BTMN J61BT11N AB0BD J61BT13 A80BD J61BT11 J61BT13 ABOBD J61BT11 Version bomo information to be EN 02004 512k bytes 40004 16k bytes possession size read by functions 19 2port attribute attribute 0080 fixed RI Useable offset 00004 fixed Function version CC Link version higher Machine 1 to 1 CC Link version
52. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi PC Interface Board MELSEG Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT 11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCBD2 B Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Be sure to read these instructions before using the product Before using this product read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety Note that these precautions apply only to this product Refer to the user s manual of the CPU module for safety precautions on programmable controller systems In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION 4 N Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions WARNING resulting in death or severe injury 1 Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage M N Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results depending on the circumstances Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING e For details on the operating status of each station when a communication problem occurs in the data li
53. Make the communication buffer size of the corresponding station larger than the transient data length Check the cable and the corresponding station 15 5 15 ERROR CODE MELSEC Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station BA1B All stations error Al rations stopped communications Check the cables O during line test BBC1 Mode setting error The mode setting of a local station is Set 0 not set to 1 BBC2 Station number setting The station number setting is set to a Set the value within the range error value other than 0 to 64 from 0 to 64 Transmission rate The transmission rate setting is set to a Set the value within the range BBC3 i i setting error value other than 0 to 4 from 0 to 4 5 Master station duplicate A master station already exists Review the station number error setting switch BBC7 The module is faulty Replace the module ES 15 6 15 6 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 TROUBLESHOOTING This section explains the identification of the causes and troubleshooting when an error occurred 1 Basic checking procedure Check if there is a corresponding error symptom written in Verification of problem occurrence Section 16 1 If the corresponding error could not be found check the cause by following the procedure shown below 1 Check if all the boards installed on a personal com
54. Mode Remote net Ver 1 modep Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No No 0 Other settings 11 Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time CNo setting x 8 ms 13 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station 14 Link refresh cycle setting ms 15 All connect count 1 Modules Station information settings Table 14 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No nM Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word cyclic Sta station points station select Occupies 16 1 Intelligent device station 128 points No setting xpo bep E m MEE EE MMC NE 14 3 14 3 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 3 Setting up the intelligent device station AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The settings of the intelligent device station AJ65BT D75P2 S3 switches are shown below Transmission speed setting switch 0 156 kbps Station No setting switch Module
55. Occupies 1 station Remote I O RX RY 8points 32points 64points 128points 32points Remote register RWw 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Remote register RWr 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Occupies 2 stations Remote I O RX RY 64points 96points 192points 384points 64points Remote register RWw 8points 16points 32points 64points 8points Remote register RWr 8points 16points 32points 64points 8points Occupies 3 stations Remote I O RX RY 96points 160points 320points 640points 96points Remote register RWw 12points 24points 48points 96points 12points Remote register RWr 12points 24points 48points 96points 12points Remote I O RX RY 128points 224points 448points 896points 128points Occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw 16points 32points 64points 128points 16points Remote register RWr 16points 32points 64points 128points 16points Transmission delay time App 50 Output transmission delay time LS x 4 Output processing time LS x 8 Output processing time LS x 16 Output processing time LS x 32 Output processing time LS x 3 Output processing time Input transmission delay time LS x 4 Input processing time LS x 8
56. RX x ERAN 1 RYO turns on i i y f 2 3 User Link device Link 1 Link device Device gt ink scan program 4 Write i 1 Link i refresh T 1 D ISNIN mc cose R INCUN MA UE 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC b In the case of block data assurance per station is enabled The data is accessed read write from the user program with respect to the CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer and the data of CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer and CC Link Ver 2 board link device will be updated by a link refresh When block data assurance per station setting is enabled usually the link refresh will be enabled It is possible to prevent the cyclic data separation only by setting the parameter without implementing the data separation prevention function in the user program This explains the case where personal computer transmits the data RYO to programmable controller X0 cyclically 1 The buffer 0 of the CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer on the sending side personal computer becomes ON when the user program turns ON the RYO 2 By a link refresh the RY buffer O of the CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer is stored in a link device RYO of the CC Link Ver 2 board 3 By a link scan the link device data RYO is stored in a link device RXO
57. and updates the count and status 5 Reset board button Resets the CC Link Ver 2 board 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 8 Operating the Test screen The Test screen is used to test the installed CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Depending on the station type and operation mode parameters written to the CC Link Ver 2 board test availability varies The following table shows each test can be selected or not O Selectable x Not selectable Station E Master station Other than master station LT TIT NR EI RR rine test Hardware 0o rane test Sofware o x x wwe 2 When an error occurs in the Test refer to Chapter 15 to check the error description and take corrective action For error codes when executing functions refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 120 test d 1 Channel No ChannelNo 81 v 2 gt Self station information Sta No 0 Master station Ver 2 mode 3 gt Test item Network test Start 1 Channel No Sets the channel to be tested 2 Self station information Displays the station No station type and operation mode of the selected channel 3 Test item Select the test to be executed For details refer to 1 About tests Start butt
58. con K B M SEL C a set 2 UP o i LRUN 3 Ing DOWN L ERRI Station number setting switch Swi Transmission speed setting switch a TEST 4 n shop OFF B o 120 oFF 5 120 Z eho a 40 2 Station 0 S 8 orF gt Elg number 1 B OFF 6 0 5122 OFF H u a 1 J 7 Bg 4 OFF Gs g 2 OFF gt 156kbps EE m 1 OFF J 8 S J f 7 CJ MODE Mode select switch 0 mode CON P C CON MITSUBISHI Cun 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CON A 1 con K B SEL C H PONEN set 2 UP FUN LRUN 3 um EN DOWN L ERRI Station number setting switch A Transmission speed setting switch a TEST AL n shop OFF a 0 10 c amp po OFF 5 2 210 orr l s orF OFF gt Station Elg number 1 B amp g 4 OFF 6 22 cH u 1 J 7 4 OFF gt i 2 OFF gt 156kbps m 1 OFF J 8 ZA p pu T MODE Mode select switch 4 3 Ver 2 mode Nomal mode CON P o CON MITSUBISHI _ CC iox
59. executable status Temporary error invalid acceptance status Temporary error invalid complete status Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgment status Availability O Available x Not available _ Onine Master station Description Local station Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system configuration The execution result of the request is stored to SWOO4F OFF Normal ON Abnormal Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in case the standby master station becomes faulty OFF Not requested ON Requested Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the initialization procedure registration While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and remote registers stops OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Stores the communication status between CC Link Ver 2 board and personal computer OFF Normal ON Abnormal Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Startup instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment completion status OFF Not complete ON Startup complete Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master Switching have been acknowledged OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not the refresh inst
60. lower classification 0 fixed 4 Communication with Intelligent device station AJ65BT R2 03H to 5 Date CC Link Ver 2 Board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link Ver 1Board A80BDE J61BT11 ASOBDE J61BT13 Communication function using the buffer on the host station CC Link Ver 1 Board CC Link Not available Available Ver 2 Board that can send receive data App 51 App 51 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 5 2 Functional comparisons with CC Link module The main functional comparisons between the CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N and CC Link Module QJ61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 are shown here For details of the functions refer to Chapter 4 Q80BD J61BT11N Function Q81BD QJ61BT11N J61BT11 Compatibility with Remote net ver 2 mode Compatibility with Remote net additional mode Cydlic Remote net mode Me Compatibility with Remote net ver 1 mode con Gommunicationin Remote YOnetmode f x o t ridti n Communication in Remote I O net mode Block data assurance Function to prevent link data separation per per station setting station Transient Other station access by GX Developer transmission Other station access by dedicated instructions L 1 function Other station access by MELSEC data link library x Standby master Standby master function function Master station duplex function Reserved station function Communication in Error inva
61. metho To next page App 75 App 75 APPENDIX MELSEC From preceding page 3 Select User Accounts User Accounts Change your account picture or remove user accounts Change your Windows password Network and Internet 3 Sue ps Windows CardSpace P sedes sent Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services Programs Mobile PC User Accounts Appearance and Personalization Clock Language and Region Ease of Access Additional Options Classic View 4 Select Turn User Account Control on or off Make changes to your user account Change your password Remove your password Administrator Change your picture Password protected Change your account name Change your account type Manage another account Turn User Account Control on or off ewm 5 Deselect Turn on User Account Control UAC to G 188 User Accounts Turn User Account Control On or Off 9 Search 3 make your computer more secure and click the Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that b tt you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer utton E Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer l Setting completion App
62. n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 2X 2X2 1 1 1 5 22 5 ms 1 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RX but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWr 2 When reading RX from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 34 App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY Remote device station RY The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the remote device station output turns on off 53 Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 1 2 2 1 1 1 5 13 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1
63. occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw Address 1EO 1 1 For station 1E2 number 1 1E3 1E4u 1 5 For station 1E6 number 2 1E7u 1E8u 1 9 For station 1EA number 1 1ECu 1EDu For station 1EE number 4 1EFu 1FOu 1 1 For station 1F2 number 5 1F3u 2 to 2DC 200 For station 2DE number 64 2DFu App 6 MELSEC APPENDIX Station Buffer memory address 2 0 to 2 2 4 to 2 7 2 8 to 2 2 2 2 0 to 2F3H 2 4 2 7 2 8 to 2 2 to 2 300H to 303H 304 to 307H 308H to 30BH 30CH to 30FH 310H to 313H number N Station Buffer memory address 1 0 to 1 1 4 to 1E7H 1 8 to 1EBH 1ECu to 1EFH 1FOH to 1 1 4 to 1F7H 1 8 to 1FBH 1 to 1FFH 200 to 203H 204 to 207H 208u to 20BH 20 to 20FH 210 to 213H 2 Lug 8 MI App 7 MELSEC The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 314 to 317H 318 to 31BH 31CH to 31FH 320H to 323H 324 to 327H 328 to 32BH 32CH to 32FH 330H to 333H 334 to 337H 338H to 33BH 33CH to 33FH 340 to 343H 44 to 347H Local station Station Buffer
64. on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV is turned ON 16 Turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY19 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 17 The initial data setting completion flag RX19 on the AJ6SVBTCU 68DAV is turned OFF and the remote READY RX1B is turned ON 20 Writes digital values to the CH1 digital value setting area RWwO on the AJ6SVBTCU 68DAV Analog values are output from the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 11 6 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 1 5 Executing the data link Turn ON the remote device stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and remote device stations under normal data link condition a Checking the master station Check the status of the master station 1 Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows L ON O OFF 1 6 25 RUN ERR The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally No error has occurred gt 0 lt Data are being transmitted RD Data are being received 2 Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below Board detail information Chann
65. s Mn ee iA Pasian Allow remote access See the name of this computer Cleck Language and Region Ease of Access p Windows Update Power Options Backup and Restore Bsckupyourcomputer Restorefiles backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 dministrative Tools up diskspace Defragment Creste and format hard disk parctions Mj View event logs ir hard drive settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Checkfirewall status Allow program through Windows Firewall Tum automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change whatthe power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps scnecutetaske 1 f User Account Control Settings Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer Tell me more about User Account Control stings Always notify sepe Never notify me when Programs try te install software or make changez to my computer make changes to Windows settings Not recommended choose tis if you need to tse programa that ee not ceed for Windows 7 o because they do no suppor cer Account Never notify Eac User Account Control helps prevent potentially harmful programs from making changes to your computer 4 Setting completion App 77 Windows Serve
66. x x x x x aser Addtionalmode x o wwe x x 9 9 messer veao x o 1 LLL Gerusr Amman x x x x x o x zm fel eo QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 Ver 1 Mode 2 Standby master station Q80BD J61BT11N A80BD J61BT11 Q81BD J61BT11 A80BD J61BT13 O Available x Not available 1 The additional mode is not supported 2 Incorporating the CC Link Ver 1 board into the CC Link Ver 2 network system Use any of the following software versions to utilize the CC Link Ver 1 board at a local station when the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode e ABOBDE J61BT141 Version or later e ABOBDE J61BT13 Version Y or later Refer to Appendix 10 for how to check the software version 3 System design to prevent erroneous inputs from the remote I O modules a When powering on and off Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I O modules Turn off the power to the remote I O modules after stopping the data link Data link start Data link stop Executing CC Link Ver 2 board data link status Stopped ON Remote I O module power status OFF 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC b During momentary power failure of the remote I O modules When a momentary power failure occurs in the power being supplied to the remote I O modules 24 V DC an erroneous input may occur Cause for erroneous inputs due to a mom
67. 1 Remote device station processing time ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 X 2X 2X2 1 1 1 5 22 5 ms 3 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RY but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWw 4 When writing to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 35 App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC 3 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt local station programmable controller Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Local station programmable controller RY The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a local station s CPU device turns on off until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off 1 Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is
68. 1 i 1 1 1 Master station Remote I O Remote I O SIJOTETTAN station station J61BT11N remote device occupies occupies occupies station 4 stations ador 1 station 1 station Operational Automalicreconnectonstaioncount settings Standby master staton No Other Driver WDT Monitoring Time Link refresheyce PS Station information All connecteount Es Station information setting items Setting item Setting value No Sta No Oo o oo ee ees o Station type E Se see MEE NNNM EE Intelligent buffer select word 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 5 Status Difference Between a Master Station and a Slave Station at an Error The status at an error occurrence differs depending on the settings of Input for Err Sta in Operational settings of Parameter When configuring the settings consider the station status at errors listed below 1 Status of a master station and remote I O station The following table shows the status of the master station and remote I O stations when an error occurred Data link status When the local station s programmable controller CPU is stopped data link continues When data link for the entire system is stopped When a communication error power off etc occurs in a remote station When a communication error power off etc occurs in a remote device station When a communication error p
69. 10 Section 8 3 7 Apr 2015 SH NA 080527ENG U Correction Section 2 3 Section 3 4 Section 7 2 Section 16 3 2 Sep 2015 SH NA 080527ENG V Correction Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 3 Section 4 1 Section 4 3 4 Section 4 3 5 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 2 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section 7 1 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 2 5 Section 10 2 2 Section 11 1 2 Section 11 2 2 Section 12 1 2 Section 12 1 3 Section 12 2 2 Section 12 2 3 Section 13 2 2 Section 14 2 2 Section 16 1 Section 16 2 3 Appendix 3 2 Appendix 5 2 Appendix 7 1 2 Appendix 7 2 Appendix 8 1 Appendix 14 Addition Section 4 3 6 Section 16 6 Section 16 6 Section 16 7 Japanese Manual Version SH 080526 V This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION PRECAUTIONS FOR USE 1 Restrictions for functions depending on the personal computer or 5 6 the operating system There are some restrictions for the functions or supported versions depending on the operating system or personal computer to be used For the operating environment refer to Section
70. 13 3 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 13 3 Setting up the intelligent device station 13 4 Transmission rate setting switch The settings of the intelligent device station switches are shown below 0 156 kbps Station No setting switch Module AJ65BT R2 0 x10 X1 1 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Avespt R2 PWO RUN L RUNO RDO L ERR RS 232 C B RATE 10 1 204 04 904 sDO xcO LOF KDE IOE RDO x 37 3 ERR ye CTA 654 654 YO SW 12345678 SO itia RESET to Mode setting switch Set the operation mode of the module RS 232C transmission specification setting switches Set according to the transmission specification of the external device MELSEC 13 4 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 4 Creating a Program Create a program for making the following setting and data transfer to the AJ65BT R2 Initialization of the AJ65BT R2 Refer to Section 13 4 1 Data transmission Refer to Section 13 4 2 Data Refer to Section 13 4 3 13 4 1 Initialization of the AJ6E5BT R2 The following describes initialization o
71. 163 162 161 160 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1 1A0 1BF 1BE 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1BO 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 1C5 1C4 103 1C2 1C1 1CO 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 1D7 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 1D1 1DO 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1 4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1EO 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1FO App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 Link special registers SW The link special registers store the data link status using word data Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special registers SW0000 to SWOTFF For more details on the link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF refer to Appendix 2 2 5 Slave station offset and size information For the remote net ver 2 mode and the remote net additional mode RX RY RWw RWr assignment to station numbers varies depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the remote I O station points
72. 2 perational settings ET 8 3 Set 5ta No Type 0 5 Master station X z 21 Expanded cyclic deaa p 5 9 p Automatic reconnection station count 14 Cancel 3 Transmission rate 156kbps 21 Occupied Sta ME m 6 10 Standby master station N Deos 4 Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode 1 Input for Er Sta a 7 11 Delay information setting 029 50 micro sec 2 E le 15 AM connect count 12 p Driver wDT monitoring time quse 5 2 Use driver WDT functi 1 6 No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta Visit io sse 1 1 Ver 1 Intelligent device station single Occupies 4 stations 1 7 2 5 Ver 2 Intelligent device station single ccupies 2 stations 1 3 We p Block data assurance per station Assure block data This function use link refresh function 14 b uncetesho 3s a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 12 4 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type 0 lt Master 5 Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5
73. 2 Utility is displayed as shown below O OFF af Board detail information x Channel No 94 i Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate 1 Mbps Data link status In data link In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status Normal 4 c Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally Board type Q80BDJ61BT11N Product information 140720000000000 IRQ No Iul ES ROM version Los c Memory FI300FISTFFFFH 140 port Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 2 Min 2 Current 2 Link refresh time ms 3 Min 1 Current 1 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally E vei Pim LOCAL OFF No error has occurred ERR Sw MS T PRM TIME LINE 12 7 12 7 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 2 Confirming the operation with a user program With the user program check whether the data link is being performed normally or not by transferring data between the master station and local stations Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration Execute user program of the local station within 10 minutes after an user program of the master station has been load
74. 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 1X 2X2 1 1 10 22 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 298 X 2X 2X2 1 1 10 31 ms 1 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RX RY but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWr RWw 2 When reading RX from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY Local station programmable controller RX The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the local station s CPU device turns on off 23 Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 com
75. 5E6x b2 invalid canceling complete status Line test acceptance status Line test complete status Parameter information read acknowledgment status Parameter information read completion status Offline test status Master switching request acknowledgment Master switching request complete Forced master Switching request acknowledgment Forced master Switching request complete Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure Host mode Host type Host standby master station setting status Indicates the acknowledgement completion status temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete Indicates the line test request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the line test completion status OFF Not executed ON Test complete Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the completion status of the parameter information read request OFF Not executed ON Test complete Indicates the offline test execution status OFF Not executed ON In progress Indicates the acknowledgment status of the standby master station when it has received a master switching request from the l
76. 6 6 6 3 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 2 Mode 6 7 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings 6 7 6 3 2 Local station network parameter settings sssssssseeeeeneeeeeeeeeee enne 6 8 A 13 A 13 6 4 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Additional 6 9 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings sssssssseeeneeneeneeeeeeneeenenn 6 9 6 4 2 Local station network parameter settings sssssseeeeeeneeeeeneneeeeeeeenennnnnen 6 10 6 5 Status Difference Between a Master Station and a Slave Station at an Error 6 11 7 1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions seen 7 1 7 2 Installation oie e te en teen ta d e te pet eta 7 2 Tonn tallati E ia dated aed Sateen ene 7 4 and Ending Utillty 25 Eee ea adeat ecoadea add eealteaanem 8 1 91 1 Starting sa utility com eo ee em teet derer ed n ce D gent ed etus 8 1 9 1 2 Quitting a utili uo dcs ome Ren ttem meae ar D Po e net ouo eo te eee o 8 2 98 2 CC Link Wer 2 Utility ri be ate EE E ER PORE RU 8 3 8 2 1 Screen configuration and basic operations ssssseeneeeneneenneenne 8 3 8 2 2 Operating the Board Information scre
77. 76 App 76 APPENDIX MELSEC b Using Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 i Getting Started n Connect to a Projector a E Calculator Sticky Notes a y Paint Q Snipping Tool i XPS Viewer Documents Pictures Computer Control Panel Windows Fax and Scan Devices and Printers A Remote Desktop Connection Default Programs Magnifier Help and Support gt AllPrograms Find fx problems Network and Internet Change the theme Change d Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options 7 Hardware and Sound E Glock Language ari e Add a dev Connect t Agjust com gt Programs Adjust sereen resolution L sings NIS optimize visual display gO E Conte Pana lt Adjust your computer s settings Viewty Category Y System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety Review your computer s status B Ade or remove user accounts Back up your computer 1 Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization op background Region Change keyboards or other input methods suggest settings O Gp a System E 3 Control Pane Home System and Security Network and Internet puter tc an earlier time Hardware and Sound d Windows Firewall Programe User Accounts and Family Safety y
78. AJ65BT D75P2 S3 and starts JOG operation 14 Turn OFF the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY16 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 to stop the JOG operation 16 Turn OFF the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY 18 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 to stop JOG operation 18 Turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 20 Turns OFF the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 14 12 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 5 Executing the Data Link To start the data link first power on the intelligent device station and then the master station 14 5 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and intelligent device stations under normal data link condition 1 Checking the master station Check the operation status of the master station a Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows ON 1 6 25 RUN ERR The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally No error has occurred gt 0 lt Data are being transmitted RD Data are being received Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information on the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below
79. Account Control fs An unidentified program wants access to your computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Setup exe Unidentified Publisher Cance Idon tknow where this program is from or what it s for rogram I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer y User Account Control Do you want to allow the following program from 57 unknown publisher to make changes to this computer Program name CCBD2UTL exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer M Show details Coo E NN EE For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of Windows will be changed as follows after installing Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Do you continue the installation Click the button MELSECPowerManager is installed and the Windows Power Options settings are changed automatically For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to Appendix 17 Program Compatibility Assistant This program might not have installed correctly If this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that are compatible with this version of Windows Program SETUP E Publisher Setup Location E Setup exe Reinstall using recommended setting
80. Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode hibernate sleep e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 2 Behavior when entering the hibernation mode sleep mode The following explains the behavior of the board when the power save mode hibernate sleep is entered on the personal computer e The CC Link Ver 2 board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network e The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep e After the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link Ver 2 board from the CC Link Ver 2 utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Countermeasure When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to Appendix 17 Appendix 16 3 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the fast startup function e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1
81. Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue etc occurs ina Retains the receive remote I O for local station setting area from the remo station station having a communication error Clears the receive area from the remote receive When device station having f IM PH area from communication a communication Input for Err Sta of the the remote error power off i error R CC Link Ver 2 utility Continue device Continue etc occurs ina Retains the receive for local station setting remote device area from the remote station station device station having having a bets communica a communication error tion error Clears the receive Retains the When a Clear area from the local receive V rj station having a area from communication Input for Err Sta of the uius i communication error the local error power off CC Link Ver 2 utility Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue A Continue i i i Retains the receive station etc occurs in a for local station setting local station Hold area from the local having a station having a communica communication error tion error 1 This is because YnO refresh direction is turned off Retains the 7 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE 7 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE This chapter explains how to install and uninstall the softwar
82. D Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW 3 gt Transmission rate 1 OMbps 4 gt Data link status 7 5 gt gt Eror status Nomi 6 Board type UB0BDJEIBTITIN 7 gt Product information 1407200000000008 8 t gt 180 No 9 ROM version brc 10 3d1 Memory 1 300000 1 7 11 gt 1 0 port 7 12 gt Present Error 7 13 gt Link scan time ms Max 225 Min 2 Current 27 14 Link refresh time ms ES Min cts Current 15 gt LED information RUN MST F SMST LOCAL ERR Sw M S PRM TIME LINE 1 Channel No Dene the channel number S Tension a Displays the data link status in the CC Link system f There is no polling from the master station and a the data link is in the cut off status 4 Data link status Disconnecting link error Data link is in the cut off status due to a line error Data link is the cut off status due to any other Disconnecting other m During line test The line test is being conducted During parameter setting test The parameter setting test is being performed from the master station During Auto Returning The disconnected station is being returned to the network automatically The CC Link Ver 2 board is being reset 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 5 E
83. Data link control Standby master station by the master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote station Data link iral Station number 2 Station number 3 a a Com Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby in progress AN Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 2 Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 amp ontroriri aa p Progress Cyclic co Giysutfication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication In this section the above system configuration will be used in the explanation Refer to Section 2 2 1 for the combinations when using the CC Link Ver 2 board as the standby master station 4 FUNCTIONS Master station Remote Remote output RY input RX Master station Remote Remote output RY input RX MELSEC 1 Overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used The following provides an overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used a Master station output while the master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Station number 1 Number o
84. J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV _ AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1 compatible Ver 2 compatible Th it ding remote device station remote device station og Vo age corresponetrig to station No 1 station No 4 j digital value 300 is output Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station y Analog Analog output output 11 16 11 16 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and local station setting parameter setting programming and operation check 12 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 1 mode 12 1 1 Configuring the system In this system one local station shall be connected Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 4 stations Local station station No 1 Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 1 2 Setting the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel
85. L26CPU BT Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11N A80BDE J61BT11 QJ61BT11 1 When the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode and the local station is in the remote net ver 1 mode or is the QJ61BT11 the local station can communicate with the master station but cannot confirm the data of the ver 2 compatible station Local station Local station Remote device station Remote device station Ver 2 mode Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible Ver 1 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 sation Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 seron Occupies 1 station Remote input RX E Os Station number 1 Joe number 2 Station number 3 Remote output Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 compatible remote output RY remote inputRX Station number 1 IStation number 2 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 IStation number 4 Station number 4 Remote output to double quadruple 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC x2 When the master station is the remote net additional mode and the local station is the remote net ver 2 mode data in other stations can be checked as shown below Local station Local station Local station Standby master station Ver 1 mode Ver 2 mode additional mode additional mode Master station Station number 1 Station n
86. No 2 3 RY1F to RY10 i 4 gt HH RY2F to RY20 YOF to YOO mdSend i gt RY3F to RY30 i Y1F to Y10 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 The input data X of the remote I O station are 2 The remote input data RX of the CC Link Ver 2 1 stored into the remote input RX the CC Link board are read out Ver 2 board by the link scan Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x1 own station RX Device No 0x0 3 Data are written to the remote output RY of the CC Link Ver 2 board gt 4 The remote output data RY of the CC Link Ver 2 Arguments to be set board are output to the remote I O station Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x2 own station RY Device No 0x20 10 5 10 5 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 5 Executing the Data Link To start the data link first power on the remote I O stations and then the master station 10 5 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and remote I O stations under normal data link condition 1 Checking the master station Check the operation status of the master sta
87. Normal data link is being performed Error status Normal Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally Board type pBOBDJEIBTTIN sst S Product information 1407200000000008 OS S IRQ No ROM version n Memory JFI300ISTFFFFH 140 port Present Error 7 Link scan time ms Max 28 228 Current 828 Link refresh time ms 3 Min 1 Current 1 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally bs imm SMSI LOCAL T OFF No error has occurred ERR Sw MS J PRM TIME LINE 13 9 13 9 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 2 LED displays of the intelligent device station Be sure that the LED displays show the following status m c 24 V DC is being supplied AJ65BT R2 PW e The module is normally RUN e M The data link is being executed normally SD gt BP ae RD e Sending data LERR O mde gt Receiving data No error has occurred 13 10 13 10 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program Using a user program confirm that the data link is being executed normally Use of the sample program al
88. RX5F to RX50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RX6F to RX60 RY8F to RY80 RX6F to RX60 eeeeeee The last two bits cannot be used the communication between the master station and the local stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Word information from the master station to all local stations 9 The program uses the mdSend function to write the word information to the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station The remote register RWw is used as the word information for writing to be used by local station systems 10 The information in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote registers RWr of all local stations The remote register RWr is used as the word information for reading to be used by local station systems 11 The word information stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Personal computer Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 P Ver2 board i occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU i Remote register RWr i i Program spe RWrA 9 4 mdSend 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Word information from a local station to the master station and another local station 12 T
89. Refer to Section 8 3 3 Refer to Section 8 3 6 Refer to Section 8 3 7 Refer to Section 8 3 8 Refer to Section 8 3 9 and 8 3 10 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 3 List of the functions The following explains the functions of the device monitor utility Batch monitor Batch monitors one type of devices Section 8 3 2 Monitors multiple devices simultaneously in units of 16 Menu 16 point register monitor ini Section 8 3 3 points Exits the device monitor utility Section 8 1 2 Sets a programmable controller CPU or board to be Network setting Section 8 3 4 Setting monitored Device setting Set devices to be monitored Section 8 3 5 Data changing Changes word device double word device values Changes sequenced word devices double word devices Section 8 3 6 Continuous change in data Device Write to a same value Data Format Section 8 3 8 h pe th Version Displays the version information 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 2 Setting the batch monitoring Set the Device Monitor Utility so that it monitors only a single designated device 1 Menu selection Select Menu Batch monitor on the menu bar Selectable for 16 point register monitor only 2 Display screen S Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help cOocccoccocoococococococococoococcocosc cocccoccococcocococcoc
90. Start data link Starts the data link 2 Stop data link Stops the data link 3 button Starts the test 4 button Cancels the test 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE 8 3 Device Monitor Utility This section explains how to set up and operate the Device Monitor Utility MELSEC For accessible devices refer to the MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual In the Device Monitor Utility the identical data are displayed for SB link special relay and SM special relay when accessing the own station Also the identical data are displayed for SW link special register and SD special register 8 3 1 Overview 1 Overview Device Monitor Utility is a utility to monitor devices and change current values 2 Operation flow The following explains the operating procedure of the Device Monitor Utility Click Setting Network Setting and set the channel to be used P UUI Set the device to be monitored Tr v Monitor the device Monitor the specified devices eee Batch monitoring Monitor multiple devices at the same time 16 point entry monitoring Change the specified device values When word devices double word devices are specified When bit devices are specified nett rete Switch the display format during monitoring peee Otheroperations ne eee Refer to Section 8 3 4 Refer to Section 8 3 5 Refer to Section 8 3 2
91. Station type 1 1 Ver 1 Remote device 2 3 Ver 1 Remote device Ly v lt gt 4 5 6 7 8 No Sta No Occupied station count Status Transient error 1 1 Occupies 2 station Normal e 3 Occupies 2 station Normal t t 9 10 11 Mo Sta No Transient error Expanded cyclic setting Remote station points 1 1 single B4points 2 3 single 64points A A 12 13 1 Channel No Select the target CC Link Ver 2 board to be monitored ee Displays the station No station type and operation mode of the selected CC 2 Self station information 2 board Link All stations view Each station information hff fe Displays the communications states of other stations 3 All stations view button Normal station station Error invalid station Reserved station Temporary error invalid station 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC Displays the number of modules currently connected to the CC Link system 5 Sta No Displays the station No set to each station Displays whether or not the station is set as a reserved station 6 Reserved station Display information Reserved station Set as a reserved station eee No setting Displays whether or not the station is set as an error invalid station 7 Eror inva TUS stanon Error invalid station Set as an error invalid station Sa ae No setting Displays the set station type 8 Station type 9 Occu
92. Ver 1 00 compatible 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 4 2 Terminal block A 2 piece terminal block is required for CC Link Ver 2 board The terminal block can be removed when there is difficulty in wiring work with installing the board on the personal computer The CC Link Ver 2 board can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block 1 Mounting and removing a terminal block a Removal procedure 1 Loosen the terminal block mounting screw 2 Remove the terminal block Screwdriver Remove the two screws on both ends of the terminal block and pull the terminal block out b Mounting procedure 1 Mount the terminal block 2 Tighten the terminal block mounting screws NCAUTION Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed Do not drop the board and the terminal block or subject it to any excessive shock It may damage the board and the terminal block or result in malfunction Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the board resu
93. When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 14 11 14 11 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 User Program Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 1 JOG speed setting area RWw6 RWw7 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 2 JOG speed setting area RWw14 RWw15 Turns ON the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY16 11 Turns ON the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY18 13 To stop JOG operation of Axis 1 turn OFF the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY 16 15 To stop JOG operation of Axis 2 turn OFF the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY 18 17 Turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 19 Turns OFF the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 14 12 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board 2 Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Turns ON the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 1 JOG speed setting area RWw6 RWw7 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Writes the JOG speed to the Axis 2 JOG speed setting area RWw14 RWw15 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 10 Turns ON the Axis 1 forward run JOG start flag RY16 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 and starts JOG operation 12 Turns ON the Axis 2 forward run JOG start flag RY18 of the
94. and restore them 3 3 2 Parameter file setti Scopes BLA Click the Browse button in the Parameter file setting ile path WISE field The Browse dialog box is displayed EM 3 Select the parameter file to be restored and click the Look in O PARAM button File name Param bdp Open Files of type Backup Parameter File bdp xi Cancel f Parameter backup restore tool 4 The information of the selected file is displayed in the Parameter backup Parameter restore Parameter file information field under the Parameter Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them in 2 file setting Parameter file setting Set parameter file path i 1 i i i iun lt cha Click the Restore button The confirmation dialog box is Parameter file information d i S pl a yed CC Link SwnDNC CCBD2 B Ver 1 amp Ver 2 Local amp Master Click the button to restore the parameters To the next page App 58 App 58 APPENDIX MELSEC From the previous page l T ia Parameter backup restore tool 5 When the restoration ends successfully the Parameter backup Parameter restore dialog box on the left is displayed Read parameter settings from parameter file and restore them Click the button to end the restoration Parameter file settings FFs Chal t te i Set parameter file p
95. automatically resets the CC Link Ver 2 board selected in Reset operation after writing parameter 3 butfen Compares the parameters written to Ing 2 with those set in the utility When an error occurs the error location is displayed 1 No error details are displayed on the Online operation screen If one or more errors are detected the following dialog box appears P 1 difference points were detected Do you save detailed information To check the error details click Yes and specify where the information is to be saved The detailed error information is saved in the text file so that it can be checked using Windows Notepad for example 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 5 Operating the Parameter Settings screen Various CC Link Ver 2 board parameters are set on this screen 1 Parameter Settings screen 8 7 6 Board information Other station monitor Online pperption Parameter settings Target s tings Memory 1 0 test Test 1 gt Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel Mo 84 2 gt Channel No Channel No 81 Operational settings 1 Expanded cyclic 3 Sta No Type 0 H Master station Other settings 4 3 9 4 9 Transmission rate 156kbps th Occupied Sta Defau
96. backup restoration tool Back up or restore parameters with the CC Link Utility already installed 2 Restrictions on restoration The following table shows whether backed up parameters can be restored or not for each case be restored x Cannot be restored Restoration target Backup target CC Link Ver 1 board CC Link Ver 2 board SWnDNF CCLINK B SW1DNC CCBD2 B CC Link Ver 1 board Ver 1 SWnDNF CCLINK B mode Ver 1 mode CC Link Ver 2 board Ver 2 SW1DNC CCBD2 B mode Additional mode 1 The parameter added to the SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 17T or later will be considered as default value 3 File name and file path entered when backing up parameters The following table shows the maximum number of characters that can be entered and the characters not to be used when entering file names and file paths File Name Length Path Length Illegal Characters App 61 App 61 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 8 Setting Checklists Some kinds of sheets are provided in this section for setting the parameters required for the CC Link system configuration Make photocopies and use them as needed Appendix 8 1 Parameter setting checklist Parameter Setting Check List Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Remote net Additional mode Off line Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Automatic reconnection station count Standby master staton No Ne oo Other Settings Delay information setting Dr
97. bit version Operating System Display Resolution 800 X 600 dot or higher Recommended 1024 X 768 dot Disk drive CD ROM disk drive 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Microsoft Visual Basic 5 0 Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual Basic NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2013 Visual Basic Programming language English version 2 4 Microsoft Visual 5 0 Microsoft Visual 6 0 Microsoft Visual NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual Microsoft Visual Studio 2013 Visual 1 Windows XP 64 bit version and Windows Vista 64 bit version are not supported 2 For a combination of the operating system and the programming language refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base x3 Not supported by SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 13P or later When using one of these operating system use SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 12N or earlier SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 12N and its supported manual are stored on the CD ROM of this product Refer to Appendix 14 4 When creating 64 bit version Visual Basic application to be used for the MELSEC data link library use Visual Studio 20
98. board Reinstall the software package If the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair or replace the personal computer If the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board Is I displayed next to the icon on the Device Manager The board installation failed screen Reinstall the software package Check the board installation status and reinstall the board If the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair or replace the personal computer If the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board If any of the above corrective actions do not help refer to Section 16 7 2 is displayed next to the icon however the CC LINK Ver 2 board is recognized normally y Device Manager File Action View Help 3 48 Computer Disk drives Display adapters xu DVD CD ROM drives e Floppy disk drives F cB Floppy drive controllers ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers Jungo 2 Keyboards MELSEC CC Link Device i 5 4 Status after the installation of 5 PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller the CC Link Ver 2 board Do not uninstall or disable the driver of the board on the Device Manager when the board is no
99. buffer memory of the local station and a CPU device 2 When writing is completed 0 is stored as return values Personal computer Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Local station PLC CPU Program mdSend Return value mdSend 1 Return value ge o Buffer memory When reading data from the buffer memory and CPU device in a local station using the mdReceive function 1 The program uses the mdReceive function to read data from the designated buffer memory of the local station and the CPU device to the variables of the program in the master station 2 When reading is completed 0 is stored as return values Personal computer Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Local station PLC CPU Program mdReceive Value return value mdReceive um 2 od Value return value 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device station The following explains an overview of the communication between the master station and the intelligent device station 1 Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station by cyclic transmission Handshaking signals with the intelligent device station positioning complete positioning start etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is commun
100. data Program i processing request flag Roe to era RX1F to RX10 2 J RXtF to RX10 y pir Le eM i i 4 i processing request 3 i RX3F to RX30 ZEE NE i i mdReceive 4 4 FUNCTIONS Remote output MELSEC 4 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RX buffer memory 5 The remote output RY is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Personal computer Master station PES EE Remote device station JosvddogceussscUccusod go ma Remote device station Station number 3 occupies 2 stations EEE ure Ea E Station number 1 occupies 2 stations Remote input RY Handshaking signals Such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 Remote input RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial 4 i RY3F to RY30 C masen ee data processing complete flag RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 Signal direction Master module AJ65BT 64DAV Device No RY04 RY05 to RY17 RY18 Signal name CH1 analog output enable signal CH2 analog output enable signal CH3 analog output enable signal CHA analog
101. date Dec 2010 NA 080527 ENG M Correction Section 2 2 1 May 2011 Mar 2012 SH NA 080527ENG N NA 080527ENG O Correction Precautions for use Manuals Product List Appendix 2 3 Appendix 7 2 Correction Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Appendix 10 changed to Appendix 12 Addition Appendix 10 Appendix 11 Apr 2012 SH NA 080527ENG P Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Manuals How to Read this Manual Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product List Section 1 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 4 7 Section 7 2 1 Section 7 4 1 Section 7 4 2 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 1 7 Section 8 3 3 Section 8 3 5 Section 8 3 6 Section 8 3 7 Section 8 3 8 Chapter 9 Section 9 2 Section 10 5 2 Section 11 1 5 Section 11 2 5 Section 12 2 5 Section 13 5 2 Section 14 5 2 Section 15 1 1 Section 15 1 4 Section 15 2 1 Section 15 3 5 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 3 1 4 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 8 Appendix 10 Appendix 12 1 Chapter 7 Appendix 10 Chapter 8 to Chapter 9 Chapter 7 to Chapter 8 Chapter 11 to Chapter 17 Chapter 9 to Chapter 15 Appendix 9 to Appendix 12 Appendix 11 to Appendix 14 Addition Appendix 9 Chapter 10 Section 11 3 to Section 11 9 Dec 2012 SH NA 080527ENG Q Correction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 7 7 2 Print date Sep 2013 SH NA 080527ENG R The manual number is written a
102. do not have permissions to execute 16 bit applications Check your permissions with your system administrator Unable to install SW1DNC CCBD2 B because NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 is unchecked Please install SWIDNC CCBD2 B again after checking the box on NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 Control Panel Programs Programs and Features Turn Windows features on or off Windows downloads required files connecting to Windows Update Environment of MELSOFT is a 16 bit application Execute EnvMEL EnvMELENG SETUP EXE in the CD ROM after searching 16 bit Application Support on the control panel and setting to Enable The message is displayed when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is set to disabled Reinstall the utility after searching the Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel and enabling the function of Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 The procedure when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is disabled is the same procedure as MELSOFT products For details of the procedure refer to the technical bulletin FA A 0153 Select Install this feature B Instal Windows Management Instrumentation has not been started Please restart setup after start Windows Management Instrumentation Displays when Windows Management Instrumentation service is stopped in Windows 7 and Windows Serve
103. do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal START UP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Do not dismantle or rebuild the board Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the board e Do not touch the terminal while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Not doing so may cause damage to the product e Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Under tightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Over tightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e 1 Mitsubishi programmabl
104. functi n No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta ISDN MERC 16 11 Intelligent device station single Occupies 4 stations 1 3 Block data assurance per station Assure block data This function use link refresh function 14 gt a a Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 12 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type i lt Master statio Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 modep Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No No 0 Other settings 11 Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time No setting x 8 ms 13 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station 14 Link refresh cycle CNo sett
105. function to write the on off information to the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is output automatically for each link scan to the remote I O stations Personal computer Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station P a HOA a oe MEN Station number 3 Station number 4 CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 1 station occupies 1 station aree eruca aT A EUM oo enn he Cree ee nee coe Program RY2F to 20 i 5 4 YOF to YOO 5 i YOF to YOO i to Y10 mdSend RY7FF to RY7FO 16 point module 32 point module pDe 66 i E E E E E E EEEE E A E E EE T A E EET 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations This section explains an overview of the communication between the master station and the remote device station In the communication with the remote device station the handshaking signals with the remote device station initial data processing request flag error reset request flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data averaging processing specification digital output values etc is communicated using the remote register RWw and remote register RWr Personal computer Master station Remote device station CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Network param
106. functions are executed to other stations 4 54 4 54 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK This chapter explains the operating procedures required before starting the CC Link Ver 2 board operation as well as the names and settings of the CC Link Ver 2 board components the wiring method and how to perform hardware tests 5 1 Procedures Before Operating the CC Link Ver 2 Board The following flowchart explains the procedures before operating the CC Link Ver 2 board Start Check Install the software package C Install the software package on a personal computer e e e Section 7 2 Installation i Install the board C Install the board to the slot on a personal computer e e e Section 5 3 3 Board installation Set the channel No 5 Set the channel No and confirm it with the switch e e Section 5 3 4 Channel No settings Check the board Test the hardware of the installed board e e Section 5 7 Test Wire the cables O Wire the network cables for the installed board e e Section 5 5 Wiring Set the parameters O Set the parameters and confirm them with the utility Chapter 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS Check the network Test the cable connection and data link on the network e e Section 5 5 Wiring Execute a user program Execute a user program or utility Operation When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a local board the setting on the
107. link stops the data link 2 Use Selected Station on the Line test screen for any of the error stations detected in the All stations 1 to 64 test 3 The CC Link Ver 2 board is automatically reset before and after execution of the hardware test 4 Specifying All stations 1 to 64 with not all of 64 stations connected to the CC Link system and executing this test will cause unconnected stations to be detected as error stations 5 Do not set the transmission speed of the slave station to Auto Following when executing a line test hardware Set the transmission speed of a slave station as the same as that of the master station 156 kbps to 10 Mbps An abnormal completion of the line test hardware may occur in slave stations with transmission speed set to Auto Following only 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 6 The setting of Standby Master Station No in the network parameter is required to execute a line test hardware for the standby master station 7 When data link has started by the standby master station a line test hardware cannot be executed Operation Procedure After selecting Line test Hardware in the Test item click the Start button The line test screen appears Line test screen Line test Selected station 21 1 All stations 1 to 64 Select this when performing the line test on all stations 2 Selected station Select this when performing the line test on a si
108. local station Read write Also stores the receive data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations enabled Appendix 1 Read only O Available Not available For the master station Stores the receive data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations Stores the receive data from the master station For the local station 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors 3 Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC MEMO 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board dividing them into four sections Basic Functions Functions for Improving System Reliability Useful Functions and Transient Transmission Function 4 1 Function List 1 Table 4 1 lists the basic functions Table 4 1 List of the basic functions I O station I O station device station numeric data with remote device station station numeric data with local station Performs communication with intelligent device station via intelligent device station cyclic transmission and transient transmission 2 Table 4 2 lists the functions for improving system reliability Table 4 2 List of the functions for improving system reliability Item Description Reference section Disconnects modules that
109. mode setting information OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when the CPU is down OFF Stop ON Continue Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0078 to SWO007B Indicates whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting OFF No setting ON Setting exists information is stored in SW007C to SWO007F Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station OFF Reception complete ON Reception not complete Indicates whether the Type setting of the host operates is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master station OFF Operates as the master station controlling data link ON Operates as the standby master station standby APPENDIX MELSEC Available x Not available Number Name Description Onie station station Slave station i eT Indicates the parameter set slave station refresh forced clear SB007C acidi setting status in case of programmable controller CPU STOP 5 7 b12 OFF Refresh prog
110. number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Is th ding local stati rforming dat nie ur cru MI Md Coney l Check the LED displays on the corresponding local station Do the number of occupied stations set for the Check the communication status of the master local station match the station information of the station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 master station Is data written to the correct address of the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master Check the user program station Is data read from the correct address of the remote register RWr buffer memory of the local Check the user program station Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Chec
111. number oro ccupied stations dion ud Set the station number within the B384 to a value other than 1 to 40H with a 5 a x error parameter range from 1 to 40 station information parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu 1 5 The total number of occupied stations Total number of stations set with a station information Boe error parameter parameter addresses 20 to 5 Set MSS exceed 64 Number of occupied The number of all occupied stations lOS PE Set the occupied station number B386 stations setting error was set to with a station information M x between 1 and 4 parameter parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu USE prohibited rea A write operation was performed to a Do not write to any of the use B387 use prohibited area not used in the prohibited areas not used in the write error buffer memory buffer memory The station type was set to a value B388 Station Rips sening erro other than 0 to 2 with a station Set the parameter within the 9 information parameter addresses 20H range from to 2 to 5 Use orohibited eren A write operation was performed to a Do not write to any of the use B389 use prohibited area not used in the prohibited areas not used in the write error buffer memory buffer memory The number of remote device stations Remote device station was set to 43 stations more with Set th
112. other input Set up file sharing methods 2 Hardware and Sound Ease of Access Play CDs or other media automatically W Let Windows suggest settings Printer Optimize visual display Mouse Additional Options Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Adjust commonly used mobility E mi Programs 3 Select Administrative Tools Name Category Control Panel Home ier Add Administrativ AutoPlay Backupand Color Dateand Default Hardware e Tools Restore C Management Time Programs Device Folder Game Indexing Internet Manager Options Controllers Options Options s m iSCSI Initiator Mouse Offline Files Penand People Near Performance Input Devices Me Informatio a amp Personali Phoneand Power Printers Problem Programs Network and Modem Options Reports a and Features Sharing Ce Regional and Scannersand Security Speech Sync Center System Language Cameras Center Recogniti 4 Tablet PC Taskbar and Tetto Welcome Windows Windows Settings Start Menu Speech Center CardSpace Windows Windows Windows Windows Mobilit Sidebar SideShow Update J To next page App 78 App 78 APPENDIX MELSEC From preceding page 4 Select Local Security Policy Neme Date modd When user account control is enabled Bf Compu
113. output enable signal Selection of offset gain values Not used Initial data processing complete flag Initial data setting request flag Error reset request flag Not used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The program uses the mdSend function to write the transmission data to the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device station Remote device station Station number 3 occupies 2 stations Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 2 stations Remote device RWw Numerical data Such as digital value setting areas Personal computer Master station Program cm RWwO H RWw1 RWw1 RWw2 RWw2 nam RWw3 7 i Rww3 Remote device RWw RWw4 RWw4 Numerical data litur RWw5 RWw5 Such as digital i DLE RWw6 RWw6e value setting ee o MR 77 ee i 2 d RWwO E EM A hQWaQO 2 O o P RWwi bec LL RWw2 RWwB 7 RWw3 RWwC m RWw4 RW KEY RWwE RWw6 00 L RWwF J L RWw7 RWwwid to RWWwFF Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT 64DAV is set to station number 1 CHA digital value setting area Analogue output enable disable setting area RWw5 to Not used RWw7 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Reading from t
114. point address 0 Zero point return deceleration time selection 0 Zero point return speed 2000 Zero point shift amount 0 Creep speed 1000 Zero point return torque limit value 300 Zero point return retry O no retry Speed designation during zero point shift 0 Dwell time during zero point return retry O Zero point return method Zero point return dwell time 0 5 counting system 2 zero point signal is not used Displacement setting after near point dog 1000 Zero point return direction O forward direction Zero point return acceleration time selection 0 Zero point address 0 Zero point return deceleration time selection 0 Zero point return speed 2000 Zero point shift amount 0 Creep speed 1000 Zero point return torque limit value 300 Zero point return retry O no retry Speed designation during zero point shift 0 Dwell time during zero point return retry O 14 8 14 8 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 4 3 Positioning control The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and positioning control The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 Personal computer Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board at Remote inputs RX RX01 axis 1 start complete flag RX02 axis
115. points for RX RY and up to 2048 words for RWr RWw per network by the expanded cyclic setting single double quadruple or octuple Also it can be increased up to 224 points for RX RY and up to 32 words for RWr RWw per station Refer to Section 4 4 7 17 Remote I O station points setting I O points are set for remote I O stations Since only the points used in remote input RX and remote output RY need to be set for remote I O stations the reserved points for the remote I O stations can be reduced This enables the minimum remote device allocation in the CC Link system Refer to Section 4 4 6 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC MEMO 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the CC Link 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link Ver 2 Board Connection Connection CC Link gt CC Link dedicated cable system Installed Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Personal computer Installed SWODNC CCBD2 B 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 2 Notes on the System Configuration 1 Combinations of master and standby master stations The following table shows the combination availability for the master station and standby master station in the system configuration RJe1BT11 QJ61BT11 LJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 L26CPU BT A1SJ61BT11 L26CPU PBT AJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 Mode mode Mode Mode mode Mode Mode ver2mode o x
116. problem Check item Check procedure Cannot output data from a remote I O station Cannot receive the remote input RX of a remote device station 16 20 Is the corresponding remote I O station performing data link Is data written to the correct address of the remote output RY buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote I O station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote device station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote I O station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of all stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication st
117. processing time of the md function When writing RY and RWw to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors App 38 App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 In the case of block data assurance per station is enabled 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board remote I O station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Remote I O station input The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote I O station until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off Formula Normal value lu a1 LR X m LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 1 Maximum value lu a1 LR X m LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 1 lu Reading execution interval of the user program a1 Request processing time of the personal computer LR Link refresh time LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 m LS LR However the decimal point is rounded up 1 When reading RX from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function b Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY Remote I O station output The following formula indicates the time t
118. range error installation status 64 between 1 and 64 A duplicate station number was specified for the connected board Duplicate station module including the number of Check the board module station number error occupied stations number However this excludes the duplicate head station numbers x 15 1 15 1 15 ERROR CODE MELSEC Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station The station types of the module are different from the parameter settings Example insisto Connected Parameter B30A a Opara moror module setting Set the correct parameters mismatching error Remote device Intelligent Remote I O device Remote device device Match the contents of the Installation parameter The contents of the installation status B30B installation status and network mismatching error and network parameters do not match parameters Standby master station Station switening was directed Designate the station number of B30C gt to a station other than the standby designation error the standby master station master station B30D Temporary error invalid A temporary error invalid station was Designate a temporary error station designation error designated before the link was started invalid station during data link O The station number including the Station number setting
119. remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Hexadecimal Decimal Ver 2 compatible 4000 remote input RX 3 41FFu Ver 2 compatible remote output RY 3 43FFu 17407 Ver 2 compatible remote register 4400 17408 RWw Master station 4BFFu 19455 For sending Local station For sending receiving Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr Master station For receiving Local station For receiving 5400 21504 Use prohibited 1 32767 T Read write Item Description D possibility MELSEC Availability Master Local Reference station station For the master station Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent Write only For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local intelligent device standby master stations For the local station Stores the input status from the master station Appendix 1 device standby master stations For the local station Stores the output status from the master station Also stores the receive data from the remote other local intelligent device standby master stations Read write enabled For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local m Write only intelligent device standby master stations Stores the send data to the master other local intelligent device standby master stations For the
120. result Temporary error SWw0049 invalid station 649 Temporary error invalid station specification cancel result SWO004B 64Bu SWO04D 640 SWO04F 64 Parameter setting test result Automatic CC Link startup execution result SW0052 6520 SW0058 658 Detailed LED display status specification result Line test result Stores the execution result of the data link stop instruction with SB0002 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Indicates the execution result of temporary error invalid station specification with SB0004 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station specification cancellation with 0005 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Indicates the execution result of the line test with SBOO08 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Indicates the execution result of the parameter setting test with SB0009 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Stores the system configuration check result when a new station is added to a system using an automatic CC Link startup 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Stores the details of the LED display status 0 OFF 1 ON b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bi bO TT TT
121. session security for NTLM SSP based including secure RPC clients Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including secure RPC servers Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives and all folders Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to log on Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile System cryptography Force strong key protection for user keys stored on the computer System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption hashing and signing System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows subsystems System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal system objects e g Symbolic Links System settings Optional subsystems System settings Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executables for Software Restriction Policies User Account Control Admin Approval Mode for the Built in Administrator account Security Setting amp Negotiate signing No minimum No minimum Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Not Defined Disabled Enabled Enabled Posix Disabled Disabled User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Prompt for consent User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for standard users User Account Control Detect application installations and prompt for elevation User Account Control Only elevate executables that ar
122. setting a Offset Head buffer memory addresses of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station are stored When two or more stations are occupied values are stored to the head buffer memory address of the station only When the station No 1 occupies 2 stations values are stored to RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 1 only RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 2 are remained as default App 9 App 9 APPENDIX MELSEC b Size Sizes of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station are stored in word data When a size is less than 1 word it is rounded up and 1 is stored When 8 point setting is set for I O station points setting 1 is stored For the I O station points setting refer to Section 4 4 6 For a reserved station 0000H is stored Buffer memory address item Default Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal 3E0H 992 Station No 1 RX offset 0000H Station No 1 RX size to Station No 64 RX offset Station No 64 RX size Station No 1 RY offset Station No 1 RY size to Station No 64 RY offset Station No 64 RY size Station No 1 RWw offset Station No 1 RWw size to Station No 64 RWw offset Station No 64 RWw size Station No 1 RWr offset Station No 1 RWr size to Station No 64 RWr offset Station No 64 RWr size App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Example When local station with the expanded cyclic setting and a remote I O
123. setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning start No setting area RWw8 of the AJ65BT start No setting area RWw8 D75P2 S3 Turns OFF the initial data setting request flag The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data RY79 setting request flag RY79 10 Reads out the initial data setting complete flag The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data RX79 and the remote station READY flag setting complete flag RX79 and turns ON the RX7B remote station READY flag RX7B 11 With the initial data setting complete flag RX79 12 Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and OFF and the remote station READY flag RX7B Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 of the AJ65BT D75P2 ON turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 13 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 14 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY11 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 starts the zero point return operation Parameters set in the sample program For zero point return Basic parameters Extended parameters Zero point return method Zero point return dwell time 0 5 counting system 2 zero point signal is not used Displacement setting after near point dog 1000 Zero point return direction 0 forward direction Zero point return acceleration time selection 0 Zero
124. special relays SBs The data link status can be checked by the bit information link special relays SBs The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address When the standby master station is controlling the data link the availability of the link s special relays is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station the availability of the link s special relays is identical to that of a local station Availability Number Name Description Master Local Offline station Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002 SB0000 0 b0 Data link restart OFF Restart not instructed ON Restart instructed Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is Refresh instruction SB0001 at standby master transferred to the standby master station 5E0n b1 switching OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Stops the host data link SB0000 is used for restart However when the master station executes this the entire Data link stop system will stop OFF No stop instruction ON Stop instructed Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the SB0003 when changing RLPASET instruction 0 parameters by the OFF Not instructed stop refreshing dedicated instruction ON Instructed start continue refreshing Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 t
125. station with the points setting are connected Local station Station No 1 occupies 2 stations expanded cyclic Master station setting octuple setting Remote O station Remote I O station Station No 3 occupies 1 Station No 4 occupies 1 station remote I O points station remote I O points setting 8 point setting setting 8 point setting AN m Description Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RX 384 points of RX 16 24 words Checks the station No 1 area because it occupies 2 stations Checks the station No 1 area because it occupies 2 stations Head buffer memory address of station No 3 RX Station No 3 RX size 1 1H The lower 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 3 RX however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Head buffer memory address of station No 4 RX Station No 4 RX size The higher 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 4 RX however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 1 RY offset Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RY 384 points of RY 16 24 words Station No 3 RY size 1 1H The lower 8 bits of buffer memory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 3 RY however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 4 RY size 1 18H The higher 8 bits of buffer me
126. the ground point with the thickest and shortest ground cable possible 30cm or shorter e Twist the ground cable leading to the ground point with the power supply cable By twisting it with the ground cable the noise leaking from the power supply cable may be grounded at a higher rate However twisting the power supply cable with the ground cable may not be necessary if a noise filter is installed on the power supply cable App 88 App 88 APPENDIX MELSEC 3 Cables Use a shielded cable for the cable extended out of the control panel If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly the noise immunity will not meet the required value a Grounding of shielded of shield cable e Ground the shield of the shield cable as near the exit as possible from the control panel If the ground point is not near the outlet the cables after the ground point will cause electromagnetic induction and will generate a higher harmonic noise e Peel part of the shielded cable s sheath and ground a wide section of the exposed shielded section against the control panel Clamp fittings can be used as shown below Note that the painting on the inner side of the control panel against which the clamp fitting is contacted must be masked Screw Clamp fitting Paint mask The method of grounding by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance wil
127. the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section g e e 89 Channel No setting switch 1 OFF 2 OFF 4 EN z 5 5 ay SE BS as Seo T 11 11 11 11 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test lt Other settings screen gt Use board settina Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 ChannelNo 82 ChannelNo83 ChannelNo 84 Other settings 1 9M Channel No Channel No 81 perational settings 8 P Retry count 3 Set 2 Sta No Type 0 4 Master station Zl Expanded M Other settings 5 9 Automatic reconnection station count 14 Cancel 3 Transmission rate 156kbps zi ccupied Sta faqs SF 6 7 Default Standb tation D 4 Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode v Input for Er Sta lt Hokt tear CREE 7 10 ancy eset bro
128. to 13 13Cu to 13Du 13Ex to 13FH 140 to 141 142 to 143 144 to 145 146 to 147 number Station Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14BH 14Cu to 14Du 14 to 14FH 150H to 151H 152 to 153H 154 to 155u 156u to 157u 158 to 159H 15 to 15BH 15Cu to 15Du 15 to 15FH number Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 17 to 17BH 17 to 17DH 17 to 17FH 180H to 181H 182u to 183H 184 to 185u 186H to 187H 188 to 189H 18 to 18BH 18 to 18DH 18 to 18FH 190 to 191H 192 to 193H Station Buffer memory address 194u to 195H 196 to 197H 198u to 199H 19Au to 19 19 to 19DH 19 to 19FH 1A0H to 1A1H 1A2u to 1A3H 1 4 to 1 5 1A6u to 1A7H 1A8u to 1A9H 1 to 1 1 to 1ADH Station Buffer memory address 1 to 1AFH 1BOu to 1B1H 1B2u to 1B3H 1B4u to 1 5 1B6u to 1B7H 1 8 to 1B9H 1 to 1BBH 1 to 1 1 to 1BFH 1C0H to 1C1H 1C2u to 1C3H 1 4 to 1 5 1C6H to 1C7H Station Buffer memory address 1C8H to 1C9H 1 to 1CBH 1CCu to 1CDH 1 to 1CFH 100 to 1D1H 102 to 1D3H 1D4 to 105 106 to 1D7H 108 to 1D9H 1DAu to 1DBH 1DCu to 1DDH 1DEnu to 1DFH number App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 M
129. to RY7EO For station RY7FF to RY7FO 1 number 64 RX7FF to RX7FO App 1 APP APPENDIX Station Buffer memory address EOn to E1H 2 to 4 to 5 to E7H E8n to 9 to EBH ECu to EDH to EFH FOH to F1H F2u to F3H 4 to F5u to F7H F8u to F9u number Station Buffer memory address 160 to 161H 162u to 163 164 to 165 166 to 167 168 169 16 to 16 16 160 16 16 170u to 171 172u to 173H 174 to 175H 176u to 177H 178u to 179 App 2 MELSEC The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address to FBH to FDH to FFH 100 to 1014 102 to 103H 104 to 105 106 to 107 108 to 109 10 to 10 10 to 100 10 to10FH 110 111 112 113 Local station Station Buffer memory address 114 to 115 116 to 117 118 to 119 11 11 11 to 11Du 11 to 11FH 120 to 121 122 to 123 124 to 125 126 to 127 128 to 129 12 to 12 12 to 12Du number Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12 130 to 131 132 to 133 134 135 136 to 137 138 to 139 13Au
130. to RY80 to RY7FF to RY7FO Remote output RY when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ6E5BT D75P2 S3 Master module Device No Signal name RYO1 to RYOF RY10 Single axis positioning start Use prohibited RY11 Dual axis positioning start RY12 Use prohibited RY13 Single axis stop RY14 Dual axis stop 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The program uses the mdSend function to write the sending data to the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device station sa Personal computer E oat seed f M aster station Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw es post data such i as positioning start number RWwO RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 mdSend Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction Master module gt AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Address Description RWwO Single axis positioning start number RWw1 Single axis override RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 to Single axis new present value Single axis new speed value Single axis JOG speed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote regis
131. turns OFF the reception normal 7 Reads out the reception normal read request read complete signal RX2 or reception error read signal RX2 complete signal RX3 8 Turns OFF the reception read complete signal RY2 13 8 13 8 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 5 Executing the Data Link To start the data link first power on the intelligent device station and then the master station 13 5 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and intelligent device stations under normal data link condition 1 Checking the master station Check the operating status of the master station a Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows TS O OFF 1 6 25 RUN ERR The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally No error has occurred gt 0 lt Data are being transmitted RD Data are being received Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information on the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below Board detail information Channel No 84 Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate 10Mbps Data link status In data link 4 data link
132. update buffer of the 1st module 2 The automatic update buffer data are transferred between the AJ65BT R2 and CC Link Ver 2 board by the link scan 3 The data is read from the automatic update buffer for the 1st module For details on the automatic update timing refer to AJ65BT R2 Type RS 232C Interface Module User s Manual App 12 App 12 APPENDIX 8 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX and Ver 2 compatible remote output RY When the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of points indicated below is used a Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Sectio
133. 0 RX6F to RX60 RX7D to RX70 _RX8F to RX80 RX9F to RX90 Remote registers RWw RWwO RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 mdSend Remote registers RWr RWO Rwr2 RWr3 RWIC RWID mdSend 7 TT to RXCF to _ A IRYDD to RYDO RXDD to RXDO RYEF to RYEO 1 _ d 1 1 1 j Remote registers RWr Remote registers RWw i RWO RWwO i RW RWw1 RW RWw2 i RWr3 RWw3 i RWC 1 RWD _ RWE RWwE RWF RWwE RWHO RWw10 RWA RWnA2 RWw12 6 RWr13 RWw13 mdReceive je 2 t Rwric RWC RWHD RWw1D RWIE RWwIE RWHF RWr20 _ RWw20 i i i f 1 f f Local station No 5 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to 10 to RY60__ RYTD to RY70 RY8F to RY80 _ RYGF to RY90 Personal computer RYCF to RYCO RYDD to RYDO RYEF to RYEO Remote inputs RX RXOF to RX00 RXTF to RX10 RX6F to RX60 _ RX7D to RX70 RX8E to RX80 RX9F to RX90 mdReceive RXCF to RXCO_ RXDD to RXDO RXEF to _ 2
134. 0 2556 2 us 2 56 ms App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 3 2 Cyclic transmission processing time This section shows the transmission processing time taken when data of remote input RX remote output RY and remote register RWw RWr are transferred by cyclic transmission When calculating the transmission delay time the following processing time must be added to the cyclic transmission processing time shown in this section e The execution cycle time of reading writing e The own station access processing time by the md function Refer to POINT POINT The own station access processing time by the md function differs according to the performance loaded condition of the personal computer and the type of the CC Link Ver 2 board The following table shows the example of the processing time of the personal computer Use it as a guide 1024 bytes own station access processing time Reading data from own station Writing data to own station mdReceive mdSend Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Personal computer CPU specification Pentium II 233MHz Pentium III 633MHz Pentium4 3GHz PentiumD 2 8GHz Intel Core2Duo 1 86GHz 1 In the case of block data assurance per station is disabled 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board gt remote I O station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Remote station input The following for
135. 0000 Ei Set a type of a device whose value is to be changed Device Type Enter a network number for LX LY LB and LSB Set the number of a device whose value is to be changed 2 Device N evi Ng HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 8 Switching Display Format This section explains a method for switching a display format such as in hexadecimal or in decimal of device information for monitoring 1 Menu selection Select Data Format Word device Double Word device Bit device on the menu bar The following sections 2 3 and 4 show the menus that can be selected with the Batch monitor and 16 point register monitor functions 2 Word device Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor DEC decimal signed 16 bits DEC decimal unsigned 16 bits HEX hexadecimal 16 bits OCT octal 16 bits BIN binary 16 bits DEC decimal signed 32 bits DEC decimal unsigned 32 bits HEX hexadecimal 32 bits OCT octal 32 bits BIN binary 32 bits
136. 014 230 M Shortcut B Videos 7 13 2009 8 54 PM Shortcut 26 By Sater Configuration 7 13 2009 653 PM Shortcut 1 Computer D Task Scheduler 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut HS m d Windows Frevall with Advanced Securty 7 13 00005 54 PM Shortcut 2 ca 2003 x64jp D 0 Windows Memory Diagnostic 7 13 2009 53 Shortcut 18 Ea Data Disk 4B Windows Powershell Modules 7 13 2009 3032 M Shortcut 208 64 en F 20082 6 jp Network 14 items App 84 App 84 APPENDIX MELSEC From preceding page i 4 Check if MELSECPowerManager is registered esiEssiHm sasurn Th Services ESSERE MEISECPowerManager The Offline Started This service Extended Standard Setting completion e When MELSECPowerManager is disabled the personal computer may enter the power save mode hibernate sleep automatically depending on the settings on the personal computer Do not disable MELSECPowerManager because the CC Link Ver 2 board does not function normally if the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep For the behavior of the board when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled refer to Appendix 16 e f MELSECPowerManager is disabled accidentally right click MELSECPowerManager on the Services Local scre
137. 1 16S Windows 7 32 bit version Version 1 08J or later Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 64 bit version Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 1 1 When using SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 17 T or later apply Service Pack1 and Windows security update program KB3033929 Use SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 165 or earlier if Service Pack1 and KB3033929 cannot be applied SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 16S and its supported manual are stored on the CD ROM of this product Refer to Appendix 14 Operating system Version 1 11M or later Version 1 13P or later Version 1 15R or later b User authority Log on as a user having administrator authority Installation uninstallation and usage of utilities are available only by the administrator s authority c NET Framework 3 5 When using one of the following operating system NET Framework 3 5 is required e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel d Update Windows 8 1 Updating Windows 8 1 is not supported When updating Windows 8 1 install SW1DNC CCBD2 B with the software Version 1 15R or later after uninstalling the software package and updating Windows 8 1 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC The functions cannot be used The following functi
138. 1 system When changing the station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station or adding a Ver 2 compatible slave station between stations configure them in the remote net ver 2 mode 3 In the remote net additional mode I O station points setting and reserved station 0 point setting are not available 4 When there is a possibility of adding some Ver 1 compatible slave stations in the future in the remote net additional mode set reserved stations after the Ver 1 compatible slave station settings to make the system extension easy 5 The following operations are required to change the mode of the CC Link Ver 1 system including the standby master station to the remote net additional mode Changing the master station to a board or a module applicable to Ver 2 As a new standby master station add a board or a module applicable to Ver 2 Setting the new standby master station number to larger station number than the slave station applicable to Ver 1 Changing the conventional standby master station to local station set at the parameter CC Link system before change Standby Remote I O Remote Master station master station station station No 0 No 1 No 2 No 4 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible compatible TT CC Link system after change Remote net additional mode Master station Local station Remote I O Remote I O Standby Remote device station station master station station No 0 No 1 No 2 N
139. 10 or later because NET Framework 4 0 or NET Framework compatible with NET Framework 4 0 is required 5 Not supported by SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 17T or later When using one of these operating system use SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 16S or earlier SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 16S and its supported manual are stored on the CD ROM of this product Refer to Appendix 14 1 Instructions for personal computer a PCI standard When personal computer which is not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express standard is used troubles caused by failures such as a contact failure or operation error may occur For details on the number of boards that can be installed installation slot and occupied slots refer to Section 3 2 b The functions being added Operating environment Supported version Multiprocessor Version 1 06G or later 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 Instructions for operating system a Supported version of SW1DNC CCBD2 B Supported version Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Windows NT Version 1 12N or earlier Not supported Windows 2000 Version 1 12N or earlier Version 1 06G to 1 12N Windows XP Version 1 16S or earlier Version 1 06G to 1 16S Windows Vista Version 1 04E to 1 16S Windows Server 2003 R2 32 bit version Version 1 06G to 1 16S Windows Server 2003 R2 64 bit version Version 1 11M to 1 16S Windows Server 2008 32 bit version Version 1 08J to 1 16S Windows Server 2008 64 bit version Version 1 11M to
140. 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and remote device station setting parameter setting programming and operation check For details on remote device stations refer to the User s Manual for the remote device station 11 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 1 mode 11 1 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and only one remote I O station as shown below is used Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV L x Remote device station station No 1 Occupies 3 stations 11 1 Tisi 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 1 2 Setting the master station The following shows the master station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section E 3 O g e e 89 Channel No setting switch 1 OFF 2 OFF gt VE d EE Eg Bob L E SE BS as Seo T 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND
141. 12 Read Receive area from Receive area from Own station mdRecolve local station No 2 local station No 2 Automatic refresh i send area to to Receive area from local station No 2 to Remote output RY Send area to local station No 1 Send area to local station No 2 to Remote register to Remote register 7 Link scan 7 Link scan d Receive area from local station No 2 i to Remote input RX Receive area from master station Receive area from master station to Remote register to Remote register 7 Link scan Receive area from Own station station number 2 send area i to Remote input RX master station 7 Link scan Receive area from master station to Remote register to Remote register 8 Automatic refresh s Automatic refresh T Automatic refresh The master station only sends data to stations where datalink has been started The master station does not send any data to stations where datalink has not been started A 1 10 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system automatically starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility
142. 2 Select in the dialog box shown below to change the bit device status Select to cancel the change operation Device Monitor Utility Change the device Y 0017 to ON P All right Yes NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC MEMO 9 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC 9 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY This chapter explains an overview of the functions included in the MELSEC Data Link Library The functions provided by the MELSEC Data Link Library are used when creating a user program that communicates with a programmable controller CPU With these functions the user can perform communications without worrying about the hardware type of the destination device or the communication protocol The following table lists the functions that are provided by the MELSEC Data Link Library that comes with the utility software mdReceiveEx mdRandWEx Writes devices randomly Extended function mdRandREx mdDevSetEx mdDevRstEx mdTypeRead mdControl Remote operation of the programmable controller CPU RUN STOP PAUSE mdBdModSet mdBdModRead m BdLedRead mdBdSwRead mdBdVer
143. 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 4 7 Section 5 2 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 3 Section 8 4 4 Section 8 6 Section 8 7 2 Section 9 1 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 11 3 Section 12 1 Section 12 5 2 Section 13 1 1 Section 13 1 5 Section 13 2 1 Section 13 2 5 Section 14 1 1 Section 14 1 5 Section 14 2 1 Section 14 2 5 Section 15 1 Section 15 5 2 Section 16 1 Section 16 5 2 Section 17 1 3 Section 17 3 1 Section 17 3 2 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 3 Appendix 3 2 Addition Appendix 8 1 Appendix 8 2 Sep 2008 SH NA 080527ENG H Section 3 2 Oct 2008 SH NA 080527ENG I Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 3 3 Section 10 1 2 Jul 2009 SH NA 080527 ENG J Chapter 7 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 8 1 Appendix 8 2 Oct 2009 SH NA 080527 ENG K Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 11 4 Section 17 1 1 Section 17 2 1 Section 17 3 1 Appendix 4 1 Appendix 4 2 May 2010 SH NA 080527ENG L SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 Section 8 6 Section 10 2 1 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 9 Appendix 7 Section 1 3 Appendix 8 Appendix 8 to Appendix 9 Appendix 9 to Appendix 10 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Section 11 3 5 Section 11 3 6 The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print
144. 2 5 When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a standby master station Refer to Section 2 2 for combinations of modules when using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a standby master station When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a master station When using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a master station any of local modules cannot be used as a standby master station Restrictions on the CC Link Ver 2 board installation Installing the CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link Ver 1 board to the same computer and using both of them is not allowed Installation When a CC Link Ver 2 board is used on a personal computer in which SWnDNF CCLINK has been installed uninstall SWnDNF CCLINK first then install the SW1DNC CCBD2 B that is provided with the CC Link Ver 2 board Driver installation and updating Do not install or update the driver other than the way written in the troubleshooting in this manual The consistency between the driver and utility cannot be identified and CC Link Ver 2 board may not operate properly Software versions of the CC Link system master and local modules When reading writing data from to other stations using the transient transmission function in the CC Link system there is the restriction for the software version for the CC Link master and local modules in the following table AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 Not accessible if the software Version N or later eS AJ61BT11 version is M or earlier A1SJ61BT11 Transient transmissio
145. 2 start complete flag mdReceive RX04 axis 1 BUSY flag RX05 axis 2 BUSY flag i Remote outputs 5 10 _ RY10 RY10 axis 1 positioning start flag RY11 RY11 axis 2 positioning start flag mdSend RY20 RY20 axis 1 servo ON flag RY40 RY40 axis 2 servo ON flag 1 Remote registers RWw RWwO axis 1 positioning start No RWw 8 axis 2 positioning start No mdSend EA 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 14 9 14 9 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 User Program 1 Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 3 Writes start No to the Axis 1 positioning start No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning start No setting area RWw amp 5 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 9 Reads out the Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 and Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 10 With the Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 OFF turns OFF the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 With the Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 OFF turns OFF the Axis 2 positioning start flag RY11 13 Reads out the Axi
146. 3 3 Board installation The following flowchart shows the board installation procedure Start Power OFF Power OFF the personal computer Remove the terminal block e e Section 5 4 2 1 Mounting and removing a terminal block Remove the terminal block from the board Install the board Install the board to a slot on the personal computer Fix the board Fix the board to a slot on the personal computer using the board fixing screws L Power ON the personal computer L End For the installation method of the board to a slot refer to the instruction manual provided with the personal computer 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC NCAUTION Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Under tightening may cause malfunction Over tightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board If all power is not turned off not doing so may cause damage to the product Install the board to a personal compu
147. 400 Stations Sp wwe bsp a RWw 2 4402 number 1 4 Rwa f RWw3 44031 4 4 04 RWw 4 4404n i 4cob RWrS PR RETE 2 4C06 RWw6 44064 4acom 35 RWw7 4407 4 08 RWw 8 44081 aco RWS do ooa dod RWwA 440 Station _ COB RWw B 440B Station number 2 4C0C RWw C 440 number 2 VN RWwD 440Du s RWwE 440 4COF RWwF 440 4 10 RWw 10 44101 RW 4411n 4C12 RWw12 44126 RWw13 44134 i to to 53 RWw7FC 4BFC RWED Pt RWw7FD RWEE LO EUH RWw7FE s 11 o RWw FF 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 2 Link special relays SB and link special registers SW The status of the data link can be confirmed by bit information link special relays SB and word information link special registers SW Link special relay SB Buffer memory address 5E0H to 5FFH e Link special register SW Buffer memory address 600H to 7FFH Do not write any data to numbers not listed in the list of link special relays SBs and the list of link special registers SWs buffer memory address Doing so may cause the programmable controller systems malfunction Appendix 2 1 List of link
148. 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 6 62 61 60 TE 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 88 82 81 80 9F 9E 9D 9 9 94 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 AF AC AB A9 AB A7 A5 A2 A4 AO BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 BB B6 B5 BA B2 BO CF CD cB CA c9 C6 c5 C3 C2 C1 CO DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 DB D7 D6 D5 D4 D1 DO EF EE ED EC EB EA E9 EB E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 EO FF FE FD FC FB FA F8 F7 F5 FA F2 F1 FO 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11A 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164
149. 6 3 1 2 After restarting the personal computer check if there is any error Checking on Event Viewer screen Refer to Section 16 3 2 3 Install the board and restart the personal computer Checking the board installation status Refer to Section 5 3 3 Checking on Device Manager screen Refer to Section 16 3 3 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 16 7 After starting the personal computer on which the board is installed check the items following the procedure written in Basic checking procedure Refer to Section 16 1 1 The system shutdown occurred when driver is uninstalled or disabled Do not uninstall or disable the driver on the Device Manager screen when the board is normally recognized If itis uninstalled or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen 16 3 1 Checking personal computer and operating system Check if the personal computer or operating system has any problem Is the power supply ensured Check the power outlet and power cable of the personal computer Does the board operate normally if uninstall the other Change the installation location of the board Check the resource acquisition status of other board and optional boards change the resource on the BIOS setting screen or Device Manager screen Reinstall the driver of the other optional boards Replace the other optional boards Does the board operate normally on another personal Reinstal
150. 8 4 09 4 4COBu 4COCu 4C0Du 4C0En 4COFa 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 to 53FCu 53FDu 5 5 Station number 1 Station number 2 App 15 MELSEC APPENDIX b Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received e When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 MELSEC Example Remote device station Local station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Master station Expanded cyclic setting single Expanded cyclic setting quadruple ducit drca PER ROREM ionic dena di ur OMNE e E S siehe d NR Aadress Remote register RWw Address 4 00 RWw 0 4
151. 80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 is flashing Do the parameter settings and installed system configuration match correctly NO YES Are the master station link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 data link status of other stations turned on NO YES Are the master station link special registers SW0098 to SWO009B duplicate station number status turned on NO YES Check the module for which SW0098 to SW009B are on Check the module for which SW0080 to SW0083 on Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure Correct the parameter settings or installed system configuration Check the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 side Check the slave station side Turn on the power Are the station number NO An 5 NO Switches set correctly Sane powerzone YES Set the station number YES Switches correctly Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch d NO Is there Y a POWER LED on the Reset the master station module YES NO NO Doesn t it work normally Is the POWER LED YES YES Corresponding module failure NO Is the RD LED lit YES Is the communication cable wired correctly Is the supplied NO voltage within the specified range YES Set the supplied voltage within the specified range Corresponding module failure NO Correct
152. 9D 1 Matching error 69Du Loading paramete Example of matching error r consistency SWOO9E status 8 69 SWOO09F Remote device station Remote station 69 Remote station Intelligent device station Remote device station device station SWO009C SWO009D SWOO9E SWOO9F Installation Parameter Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on X6 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup App 27 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Availability Number Description xe um ome Master Local Offline Stores the line test 1 result SWO00B4 0 Normal 6B4u 1 Abnormal SWOOB5 b15 b14 b13 b12 6B5x Line test 1 SWOOB4 16 SWOOBG result SWOOBS 6B6x SWOOBG SWO00B7 SWO0B7 6B7u Stores the line test 1 line test 2 result Line test result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Indicates the slave stations compatible with CC Link Ver 2 510140 0 Ver 1 compatible slave station 7409 1 Ver 2 compatible slave station SWO0141 b15 b14 b13 b12 Compatible CC 7411 7411 swo14o 16 15 14 13 SW0142 information 5 141 32 31 29 7429 Swo142 48 47 46 45 SWOOB8 6B8 SW0143 SW0143 7434
153. APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 2 2 List of link special registers SWs The data link status can be checked by the word information link special registers SWs When the standby master station is controlling the data link availability is basically identical to that of the master station Multiple temporary SWO0003 error invalid 6034 station specification 00 Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to Default value 0 When the standby master station is operating as a local station availability is identical SW0007 01 to 64 Specifies a single station from 1 to 64 Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used SWO0009 Monitoring time Default value 10 seconds 6094 settin Setting range 0 to 360 seconds O 9 The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified to that of a local station The specified number indicates the station number of a Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed with a dedicated instruction SW000A CPU monitoring Default value 90 seconds 60 time setting Setting range 0 to 3600 seconds The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value Availability O Available x Not available Name Description Master Local Offline station station temporary error invalid station outside of the above setting range is specified Select whether multiple
154. Appendix 18 EMC and low voltage directive Compliance with the EMC Directive which is one of the EU directives has been mandatory for the products sold within EU member states since 1996 as well as compliance with the Low Voltage Directive since 1997 To prove the compliance manufactures must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity and the products must bear a CE marking 1 Sales representative in EU member states The authorized representative in EU member states will be Company name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer Strasse 8 40880 Ratingen Germany Appendix 18 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The final decision on the method for the EMC Directive conformance and the application must be made by the manufacturer of the machinery The EMC Directive sets two requirements for compliance emission conducted and radiated electromagnetic energy emitted by a product and immunity the ability of a product to not be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic energy This section summarizes the precautions for machinery constructed with the CC Link Ver 2 Board to comply with the EMC Directive These precautions are based on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the harmonized standards However they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive The manufacture of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and dec
155. C Link Ver 2 board Programs developed for the CC Link Ver 1 board can be used for the CC Link Ver 2 board Parameters set for the CC Link Ver 1 board can also be used for the CC Link Ver 2 board Parameters set for the CC Link Ver 1 board can be reused for the CC Link Ver 2 board Refer to Appendix 7 4 PCI PCI Express is applicable 5 6 7 For Q80BD J61BT11N PCI is applicable For Q81BD J61BT11 PCI Express is applicable Parameters can easily be set The parameters necessary for the operation of the CC Link system can easily be set with a CC Link Ver 2 utility program thus programming is simplified Test and monitoring information related to the CC Link system can be displayed The test and monitoring states in the CC Link system can be easily displayed on a personal computer Support for a multiple CPU system By specifying the logical station number via the CC Link Ver 2 utility a multiple CPU system can be accessed 8 It provides the functions that support user programming 9 It is possible to perform the remote control of remote I O stations remote device stations intelligent device stations and local stations as well as reading and writing of devices using the functions that support Microsoft Visual and Microsoft Visual Basic Thus user program can easily be created Example Control of the input signal X and output signal Y of a remote I O station Analogue voltage output co
156. CBD2 B are stored in the CD ROM of software package Install using Setup exe from the folders shown in the following table Version of SW1DNC CCBD2 B Stored folder Version 1 12N WinNT_2k Version 1 16S WinXP_7 2 Manual Refer to the corresponding manual for functions and handling methods of SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 12N and Version 1 16S The manual is stored in the following folder on the CD ROM of software package Version of Version 1 12N sh080527engq pdf WinNT 2kWManual Version 1 16S sh080527engu pdf WinXP 7WAanual App 73 App 73 APPENDIX Appendix 15 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 15 1 Overview of warning message App 74 MELSEC When using an operating system with the user account control function a warning message appears when you run the CC Link Ver 2 utility or the Device monitor utility Refer to Section 8 1 P User Account Control x up An unidentified program wants access to your computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before 7 CCBD2UTL exe Unidentified Publisher Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Allow DA i A i Itrust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before i Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer y User Account Control Do you want to allow the following prog
157. CDH 1 to 1 100 to 1D1H 102 to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 to 107 108 to 109 1DAu to 10 1DCu to 1DDH 1DEu to 1DFH number Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address to FBH to FDH FE to FFH 100 to 101H 102 to 103H 104 to 105 106 to 107 108 to 109 10 to 10BH 10Cu to 100 10EH to10FH 110H 111H 112 to 113u Station Buffer memory address 114 to 115H 116uto 117H 118 to 119H 11 to 11BH 11 to 11DH 11 to 11FH 120 to 121H 122u to 123H 124u to 125 126u to 127H 128 to 129H 12Au to 12BH 12 to 12DH Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12 130 to 131 132 133 134 to 135 136 to 137 138 to 139 13Au to 13 13 to 13DH 1 to 13FH 140 to 141 142 143 144 145 146 to 147 Station Buffer memory address 148 to 149u 14 to 14Bu 14 to 14DH 14 to 14FH 150 to 151H 152 to 153H 154 to 155u 156 to 157 158 159 15 to 15 15 150 15 to 15 App 4 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Remote registers RWw and RWr When the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of words indicated below is used a Master station RWw gt remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master stati
158. Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers 16 22 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot communicate from a local station remote output RY to the master station remote input RX Cannot communicate from the master station remote register RWw to a local station remote register RWr 16 23 Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding local station performing data local station link Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory of the master Check the user program station e Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station
159. ESHOOTING MELSEC 16 5 CC Link System Troubleshooting This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC Link System It presents a list of check items and procedures for possible problems 16 5 1 Verification of problem occurrence The following shows the details of check items and procedures for possible problems Description of problem Check item Check procedure Check the cable connection visually or with a line Are there any disconnected cables test e Check the line status SW0090 Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the terminal stations at both ends of the CC Link system Connect the terminal resistors that match the cable type used to the terminal stations located at both ends of the CC Link system Refer to The entire system cannot Section 3 3 perform data link Has an error occurred in the CC Link Ver 2 board Check theierror code oie Cc MIR Vere and take a necessary corrective action Are the CC Link parameters set for the CC Link Check the contents of the parameters for the CC Ver 2 board Link Ver 2 board Check the own station parameter status SW0068 e Check the switch setting status SW0064 e Check the loading status SWO0069 Check to see if the ERR LED on the master station is flashing Refer to Section 16 5 Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote I O station performing remote I O station data link Check
160. F to RX1FCO Cd MEE RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43 A1FD RX1FDF to RX1FDO RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FD RX1FEF to RX1FEO RY1FEF to RY1FEO 43 41FFu RX1FFF to RX1FFO o m m on RYTFFF to RY1FFO 4 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words 32 64 or 128 points are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote output RY Remote
161. Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board 2 6 12 16 RX78 initial data processing request flag RX79 mdReceive initial data setting complete flag 18 RX7B remote station ready 1 Remote outputs M 3 3h gt ni RY78 a a 8 RY78 initial dat i lete fl initial data processing complete flag H 9 13 ES 10 14 RY79 initial data setting request flag m C lo Onnnn n n 55B R5 S5S5 5S 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 14 5 14 5 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 User Program Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX78 With the initial data processing request flag RX78 gt ON turns ON the initial data processing complete flag RY78 Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX78 With the initial data processing request flag RX78 r OFF turns OFF the initial data processing complete flag RY78 Turn ON the initial data setting request flag RY79 12 Reads out the initial data settin
162. Link Ver 2 board 4 2 1 Communication with remote I O stations The following explains an overview of the communication between the master station and a remote I O station In the communication with the remote I O station the on off information of the switches and indicator lamps are communicated via the remote input RX and remote output RY Personal computer Master station Remote I O station CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Network parameters Program pP S 5 2 mdReceive lt Read et d Link scan 5 mies Wie gt femme Out Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Remote input 2 The input status of each of the remote I O stations is automatically stored for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory Remote I O station Remote I O station Personal xcu Mm Station number 1 Station number 2 CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 1 station occupies 1 station Program 3 i RX1F to RX10 mdReceive je d RX2F to RX20 XOF to X00 X1F to X10 RX7FF to RX7FO i 16 point module 32 point module Remote output 4 The program uses the mdSend
163. Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No 0 Other settings 11 Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time x 8ms 13 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station C Disable 14 Link refresh cycle C No setting ms 15 All connect count 2 Modules Station information settings 1 To set the CC Link system to the remote net Additional mode select Remote net Additional mode Table 12 5 Station Information Setting Check List Sto NS Sinton wes Expanded DECR Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word cyclic station points station select Game Ver 1 Intelligent device station single 4 stations 128 points No setting e Occupies Ver 2 Intelligent device station double 2 stations 96 points No setting e om 2 For the local station select an intelligent device station 12 11 12 11 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 2 3 Setting
164. No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this 12 section g e e 89 Channel No setting switch 1 OFF 2 OFF 4 EN z 5 5 ay SE BS as Seo T 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use ChannelNo 81 ChannelNo 82 ChannelNo 83 Channel No 84 Other settings 1 Channel No Channel No 81 zj Operational settings 8 Dei cout 353 2 9 Sta 053 Master station Ei E es Dther settings 5 9 Automatic reconnection station count 12d Cancel 3 Transmission rate 156kbps g Occupied Sta 6 10 standby master station N oz peek 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 7 Input for En Sta oieee 7 e ii wd Station information settings 11 Delay information setting OZ 50 micro sec 1 X Clear 15 Al connect coant 12 p Driver WDT monitoring time A E F Use driver WOT
165. O EU EO ERR RE 4 35 4 3 6 Station based block data assurance function ssssssssssseeeeeeeenen ene 4 36 4 4 Useful npe tige snnm reds 4 40 4 4 1 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future reserved station function iiid dtt dieit aita daba denas 4 40 4 4 2 Powering off a station in operation without detecting an error error invalid station setting function sese 4 41 4 4 3 Checking operations for each station data link stop restart 4 42 4 4 4 Station number duplicate check sse eene nnne 4 42 4 4 5 Multiple CPU system support sssssssssssssssssseeseeeeeeneee 4 43 4 4 6 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting 4 44 4 4 7 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode 4 45 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions ssssssssssseeeeeeeenenneennee nennen nennen nennen nenne 4 54 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission functions esseeeeeeennennen nennen 4 54 5 1 Procedures Before Operating the CC Link Ver 2 Board 5 1 5 2 Component Names and Settings erreian erririk ninna Pan KREIRATE TAREA nennen 5 2
166. Performance Logs and A O Sound video af em Device Manager 8 Storage volumes Uninstall m 3 System devices Scan for hardware changes Launches the Hardware Update Wizard for the selected device Properties Found New Hardware Wizard 2 Click Install from a list or specific location Advanced Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Olostallthe software automatics B ended iinstailiom a ist or Specific location Advanced Click Next to continue i 3 Insert the CD ROM of the software package to the CD ROM drive Found New Hardware Wizard 4 Specify the driver software for Search for driver software in ond int Fotion ey this location according to the following information and click the button lt For 32 bit version operating system gt Specify Drivers x86 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x86 Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D Drivers w86 m O Dont search w
167. R sw I M S J PAM TIME LUNE 2 Checking remote I O stations Be sure that the LED display shows the following status AJ65SBTC1 32D1 won AJ65SBTC1 32T PW LRUN LERR x e 24V DC is being supplied No error has occurred The data link is being executed normally 10 7 10 7 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program Using a user program confirm that the data link is being executed normally Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual With the sample program the following operations can be checked When the input RXO in 1 is turned on the output YO RY20 in 2 turns on When the input RXO in 1 is turned off the output YO RY20 in 2 turns off Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Remote I O station station No 1 AJ65SBTC1 32D1 Remote I O station station No 2 AJ65SBTC1 32T Output module Terminal resistor Lp 10 8 10 8 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC
168. R77 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
169. REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility lt Parameter settings screen gt lt Other settings screen gt Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use z V Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Other settings 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt z Operational settings EE 8 Retry count 3 Set Other settings 2 Sta No Type 0 5 Master station EIER EE Mg 5 9 Nae T um Automatic reconnection station count a 3 Transmission rate 156kbps Occupied Sta Set _ 6 Default Standby master station No 0 4 hode Remote net Ver 1 mode z Input for Er Sta Hot 7 thear Check 7 1 0 d E Station information settings 11 Delay information setting OZ 50 micro sec 15 12 9 Driver WDT monitoring time d a Use driver WDT functi No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic ccupied Sta abs EE 1 6 Remote device station ccupies 3 stations 1 3 Block data assurance per station Assure block dala This function use link refresh function 14 a Parameter settings The following sho
170. RTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 4 Wiring This section explains the cable wiring and precautions The following shows the wiring procedure Power OFF Power OFF the personal computer Wire the cables Wire the network cables to the terminal block Install the terminal block If the terminal block has been removed for wiring install the e e e Section 5 4 2 1 Mounting and removing terminal block a terminal block Power ON the personal computer L End 5 4 1 Preparation before wiring Before wiring check the cables and terminating resistors to be used 1 Cables that can be used The following cables can be used Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible These cables cannot be used together If used normal data transmission is not guaranteed 2 The order of connecting the cables The cables do not have to be connected in the order of station number 3 Terminating resistors to be used Connect the terminating resistors included with the stations at both ends of the stations in the CC Link system The terminating resistors to be used vary depending on the cable Cable type Terminating resistor to be used Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 1100 1 2W Brown Brown Brown CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link dedicated high performance cable 1300 1 2W Brown Orange Brown
171. Read mdinit mdSend mdReceive mdRandR Reads from devices randomly mdDevSet Sets a bit device mdDevRst Resets a bit device 4 A function in which the access range is extended according to the extension of the device points at the access target It is accessible to all device numbers Use extended functions when creating a new program For details of the functions refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 9 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC MEMO 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and remote I O station setting parameter setting programming and operation check 10 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and two remote I O stations as shown below is used Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Remote I O station station No 1 AJ65SBTC1 32D1 OO Remote I O station station No 2 AJ65SBTC1 32T O OO Output module Terminal resistor Input module 10 1 10 1 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 2 Setting up the master station This section e
172. Retry count communication error occurs Setting range 1 to 7 Default 3 Automatic Set the number of slave stations that can be returned to reconnection the network within 1 link scan station count Setting range 1 to 10 Default 1 Leu s c pr station No Setting range 0 to 64 Default 0 4 3 4 0 Delay information Set 0 to Delay information setting setting 11 Driver WDT Set the driver WDT monitoring time Unit 8ms Monitoring Time Select Use driver WDT function to enable this function 9 Setting range 1 to 32767 Default No setting 12 Block data Set the block data assurance per station to enable disable Section assurance per Select Assure block data to enable this function nu 4 3 6 station Default Disable Section 13 Link refresh Set the link refresh cycle Unit ms cycle Setting range 1 to 1000 Default No setting 1 When the driver WDT function is enabled the recommended value 250 will be displayed in the set value of driver WDT monitoring time irrespective of the previous set value 2 The link refresh cycle can be set only when block data assurance per station setting is enabled x3 When the block data assurance per station is enabled the recommended value 1 will be displayed in the set value of link refresh cycle irrespective of the previous set value 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Setting required X Setting not required Master Loc sialon Reference St
173. Sold separately CC Link System Master Local Module type AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 User s Manual This Manual explains system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting for AJ61BT11 and A1SJ61BT11 Sold separately IB 66721 13872 CC Link System Master Local Module type AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 User s Manual This Manual explains system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting for AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 Sold separately IB 66722 13873 MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080895 This Manual explains system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and 13741 troubleshooting for L series master local module Sold separately MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual SH 081035ENG This manual explains programming function specifications and sample programming for MELSEC data 13JV25 link library Sold separately MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual is stored on the CD ROM of the software package in a PDF file format Manuals in printed form are sold separately for a single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the above table HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The following lists the key items that represent the main usage of the CC Link Ver 2 board by the purpose Please use the following key items to refer to the appropriate sect
174. The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that X 4 a2 X 8 a4 X 16 a8 X 32 occupy 4 stations which are set to Double b X 8 b2 X 16 b4 X 32 b8 X 64 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that c X 12 c2 X 24 c4 X 48 c8 X 96 occupy 1 station which are set to Quadruple d X 16 d2 X 32 d4 X 64 d8 X 128 lt 2048 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Quadruple Condition 3 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Octuple A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 gt Condition 4 16 X 54 X B 88 X C lt 2304 B Number of remote stations x 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations
175. X2CO 24 RX2EO RX300 RX320 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 App 65 o RX2DF gt o RX2FF gt o RX31F gt o RX33F gt o RX35F gt o RX37F gt o RX39F gt o RX3BF gt o RX3DF gt o RX3FF gt o RX41F gt o RX43F gt o RX45F gt o RX47F gt o RX49F gt o RX4BF gt o RX4DF gt o RX4FF gt RX51F gt o RX53F gt o RX55F gt o RX57F gt RY100 to RY11F gt RWw20 to RWw23 gt RY120 to RY13F RWw24 to RWw27 gt RY140 to RY15F RWw28 to RWw2B gt o RY17F gt RWw2C to RWw2F gt RY180 to RY19F gt RWw30 to RWw33 RY1A0 to RY1BF gt RWw34 to RWw37 gt RY1CO to RY1DF gt RWw38 to RWw3B gt RY1E0 to RY1FF RWwsC to RWw3F gt RY200 to RY21F gt RWw40 to RWw43 gt RY220 to RY23F gt RWw44 to RWw47 gt RY240 to RY25F gt RWwA8 to RWw4B gt RY260 to RY27F gt RWwA4C to RWw4F gt RY280 to RY29F gt RWw50 to RWw53 RY2AO to RY2BF gt RWw54 to RWw57 gt RY2CO to RY2DF gt RWw58 to RWwsB gt RY2EO to RY2FF gt RWwSC to RWw5F gt RY300 to RY31F RWw60 to RWw63 RY320 to RY33F RWw64 to RWw67 RY340 to RY35F gt RWw68 to RWw6B gt RY360 to RY37F gt RWw6C to RWw6F gt RY380 to RY39F gt RWw70 to RWw73 RY3A0 to RY3BF gt RWw74 to RWw77 to RY3DF gt RWw78 to RWw7B gt RY3E0 to RYSFF gt RWw7C to RWw7F gt RY400 to RY41F gt RWw80 to RWw83 gt RY420 to RY43F gt RWw84 to RWw87 RY440 to RY45F gt RWw88 to RWw8B R
176. Y460 to RY47F gt RWw8C to RWw8F gt RY480 to RY49F gt RWw90 to RWw93 gt RY4A0 to RY4BF gt RWw94 to RWw97 gt RY4CO to RY4DF gt RWw98 to RWw9B RWrC to RWrF gt to RWr2F gt RWr34 to RWr37 gt RWr38 to RWr3B gt RWr40 to RWr43 gt RWr44 to RWr47 gt RWr48 to RWr4B gt RWr50 to RWr53 RWr54 to RWr57 gt RWr70 to RWI73 gt RWr74 to RWr77 gt RWr78 to RWr7B gt RWr80 to RWr83 gt RY4E0 to RY4FF gt RWw9C to RWw9F gt RWr9C to RWr9F gt RY500 to RYS1F gt RWwAO to RWwA3 gt RWTrAO to RWrA3 gt RY520 to RY53F gt RWwA4 to RWwA7 gt RWrA4 to RWrA7 gt RY540 to RY55F gt RWwAe to RWwAB gt RWrA8 to RWrAB gt RY560 to RYS7F RWwAC to RWwAF to RWrAF gt App 65 APPENDIX MELSEC 45 46 47 48 53 54 55 56 57 58 RX740 to RX75F gt o RX59F gt o RX5BF gt o RXSDF gt o RX5FF gt o RX61F gt o RX63F gt o RX65F gt o RX67F gt o RX69F gt o RX6BF gt o RX6DF gt o RX6FF gt o RX71F gt RX760 to RX77F gt RX780 to RX79F 62 63 64 App 66 o RX7BF gt o RX7DF gt o RX7FF gt RY580 to RYS9F gt RWwBO to RWwB3 RWrBO to RWrB3 gt RY5A0 to RYSBF gt RWwBA to RWwB7 gt RWrB4 to RWrB7 gt RY5CO to RYSDF gt RWwBS to RWwBB gt RWrB8 to RWrBB gt RYSEO to RYSFF gt RWwBC to RWwBF gt RWrBC to RWrBF gt RY600 to RY61F gt RWwCO to RWwC3 gt RWrCO to RWIC3 gt o RY63F gt RWwCA to RWwC7 RW
177. a Hold Retry count 3 Times 8 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No No 0 Other settings 11 Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time CNo setting x 8 ms 13 Block data assurance per station Disable Enable 14 Link refresh cycle CNo setting ms Station information settings 15 All connect count 2 Modules 1 To set the CC Link system to the remote net Additional mode select Remote net Additional mode Table 11 4 Station Information Setting Check List m TEN Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word PS yp cyclic Sta station points station select 16 1 Ver 1 Remote device station single Occupies 96 points No setting 3 stations 17 4 Ver 2 Remote device station quadruple piens 64 points Noseting 11 12 11 12 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 2 3 Setting the remote device station The following shows the remote device station switch settings AJ65VBTCU 68DAV WEISSRAIOSVETCU GSDAV CON A 1
178. a Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Remote station points 64 points 32 points 128 points 32 points Reserve invalid station select No setting No setting No setting No setting so Intelligent buffer F Receive a select word Automatic a Setting not required 6 5 6 5 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 2 2 Local station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 Station number 4 Station number 8 Station Station number 1 number 3 Local station Remote I O Q80BD Remote I O station J61BT11N station occupies occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations 1 station Master station QJ61BT11 Ver 1 compatible remote device station occupies 1 station Stano o co e Pe Type Local station Occupied Sta Input for Err Sta Operational Automatic reconnection station count settings Standby master station No Other 3 Delay information setting settings Driver WDT Monitoring Time 250 x 8 ms Block data assurance per station Link refresh cycle ens Station information All connect count LES settings Station information Po Station information setting items MEME Station Expanded cyclic
179. a remote device station Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 5 Station Number Setting Station number 0 Master station The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station local station standby master station remote station and intelligent device station For details on the station number settings refer to Section 8 2 3 Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions 1 Assign sequential station numbers Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are connected For a module occupying two or more stations specify the first station number 2 Specify unused station numbers as reserved stations If unused station numbers are not specified as reserved stations they will be handled as data link faulty stations can be checked with special link registers SW0080 to SW0083 3 Specify unique station numbers If duplicate station numbers are specified an installation error occurs Error codes are stored in SWO0069 Setting example One station was skipped when station numbers were specified Station Station number 5 number 10 3 5 Station Standby Station Local station master station number 9 occupies i 1 station ions 2 Remote device 4 Intelligent station device station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station 1 Rem
180. able type used to the terminal stations at both ends of the CC Link system 16 24 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure The remote device station is not Are there any errors in the initial settings of the Check the parameters operating normally remote device station Check the user program When multiple remote stations are powered off at the same time at 156 kbps the L RUN LED goes off temporarily The A80BD J61BT11 set to the local station does not operate The A80BD J61BT 13 does not operate 16 25 What is the setting for the number of retries ME ransmission rate Reduce the number of retries Is the CC Link Ver 2 compatible ABOBD J61BT11 ROM version or later used for the network Check the mode of the master station where the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 Check the ROM version of the ABOBD J61BT11 mode or remote net additional mode Is the CC Link Ver 2 compatible ABOBD J61BT13 ROM version Q or later used for the network Check the mode of the master station where the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 Check the ROM version of the ABOBD J61BT 13 mode or remote net additional mode 16 25 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 5 2 Troubleshooting flow when the ERR LED on the master station is flashing 1 When the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as the master board The ERR LED of the Q
181. aiaa App 70 Appendix 12 Mode Selection Method ccccccececceceeeeeeeeeeeceeseceeeaeeceaeescaeeeeaeeesaaeeseneeseaeessaeeesieesaeeetaas App 71 Appendix 13 New and Improved Functions App 72 Appendix 13 1 Change of hardware function essssssssssssssssseeeeeee nennen App 72 Appendix 13 2 Update of software package App 72 Appendix 14 Restrictions for Operating System sssssssssssssssssseseeeeeneeeenneenens App 73 Appendix 15 Warning Message Appears on Windows sssssssssssssseeeeeeeeneneenne nnns App 74 Appendix 15 1 Overview of warning message 2 ccescceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeeseneeseaeeesaeeeseeeseaeetsaees App 74 Appendix 15 2 Methods for preventing the warning message sssssssssseeen App 75 Appendix 16 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup App 81 Appendix 16 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate nissan destine serico evene crede end App 81 Appendix 16 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep ee App 82 Appendix 16 3 Behavior when the fast startup function is App 82 Appendix 17 MELSECPowerManagger 2 cccescecesceeesceeeeneeeen
182. ains the receive area from the local station having a communication error 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station The following table shows the status of the remote device stations local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations when an error occurred Remote device station Local station standby master station Intelligent device station Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote output register register i Remote output RY register RY RWw Treats the own station send area 32 5 with all O s 1 When the local station s programmable controller Wh t all CPU is stopped Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Sa S ORPOA Continue Continue 4 points of only the data link continues receive area from the local station are set to off Clears the receive Retains th When data link areas from other etains the for th ti Input for Err Sta of the All point stations receive or the entire CC Link Ver 2 utility areas from System is off Retains the receive th stopped for local station setting Gres rom other other stations stations Clears the receive When a area from the remo communication I O station having a error power off Input for Err Sta of the communication enor p _ CC Link Ver 2 utility Continue
183. aken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the remote I O station output turns on off Formula Normal value a1 LR X m LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 7 2 Maximum value a1 LR X m LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 2 a1 Request processing time of the personal computer LR Link refresh time LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 m LS LR However the decimal point is rounded up 2 When writing RY to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 39 App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Remote device station RX The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote device station until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off 1 Formula Normal value lu a1 LR X m LS X 1X 2Xn 1 Remote I O station response time ms 2 Maximum value lu a1 LR X m LS X 2X 2Xn 1 Remote I O station response time ms 2 lu Reading execution interval of the user program a1 Request processing time of the personal computer LR Link refresh time LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 m LS LR However the decimal
184. al Module User s Manual Detectability Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station B110 A line error has occurred Check the line EN messages B111 Message data receiving A line error has occurred Check the line ESEA order error B112 R data length A line error has occurred Check the line ESEJ Error code hexadecimal A line error has occurred or an Check the line power supply for B113 Message data ID error instantaneous power failure has the send station or power supply occurred in the send station module B114 A line error has occurred Check the line lo o B115 A line error has occurred Check the line eae B116 Abnormal head bit A line error has occurred Check the line Check the communication status A data link error occurred in the of other stations whether or not Corresponding station corresponding station during transient a temporary error invalid station error during sending us transmission is designated or if the own station is stopped 15 Transient target station A transient request was issued to other 205 than the intelligent device station Check tue targetstation rocessing request error A line test request was issued while Perform a line test during link B301 ATE gt during link stop the link was stopped startup The designated station number exceeded the maximum D
185. alfunction due to bad cable contacts Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed 1 As a countermeasure to power surge due to lightening connect a surge absorber for lightening as shown below o e 1 v Personal AC computer Surge absorber for lightening 1 Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening E1 from that of the personal computer E2 2 Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 4 4 T branch connection This section explains how to perform a T branch connection using the CC Link dedicated cable 1 T Branch system configuration The following shows a system configuration using T branch connection Main line Remote I O station Master remote device station station Branch line Terminal resistor between DA and DB Remote I O station remote device station Remote station remote device station Remote station remote device station A maximum of 6 stations can be connected T branch termi
186. ally performed with slave station No 64 2 3 2 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 2 3 Operating Environment The following table shows the operating environment for CC Link Ver 2 board For details on the personal computer and operating system refer to the instructions on the following pages Windows supported personal computer Required System requirements of the operating system must be met memory PCI bus For Q80BD J61BT11N specifications e Compliant with PCI standard Rev 2 2 5V DC 32 bit bus Basic clock 33MHz PCI Express For Q81BD J61BT11 bus e Compliant with PCI Express standard Rev 1 0a 3 3 V DC Link width 1lane Basic clock specifications 100MHz Personal computer Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Service Pack3 or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System 5 Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Operating System 2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System 3 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System
187. and intelligent device stations x 26 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 The relationship between the transmission speed and the maximum overall cable distance is described below 1 For a system consisting of only remote I O stations and remote device stations Remote I O station Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station or remote or remote or remote or remote device station device station device station device station 2 1 x1 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations x2 Cable length between the master station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Q ies Station to station cable length Transmission rate Maximum overall cable distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 2ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 5 Mbps 59 cm 23 23 110 m 360 9 ft 60 cm 23 62 in or more 1 m 3 28 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 59 23 23 in 50 m 164 1 ft 10 Mbps 60 cm 23 62 in to 99 cm 38 98 in 80 m 262 5 ft 1 m 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 Paus Station to station cable length Transmission rate Maximum overa
188. and write operations can be performed for the intelligent device station buffer memory at an arbitrary timing using the mdReceive and mdSend functions respectively Personal computer Master station Program CC Link Ver 2 board Intelligent device station 7 Write mdSend gt Transient transmission Buffer memory Read mdReceive Transient transmission 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 5 System down prevention Slave station disconnect function Even if a module system fails because of power failure or power off it will not affect the communication with other normal modules since the system employs the bus connection method Also for a module using a 2 piece terminal block the module can be replaced during data link Replace the module after turning its power off Also check that the switch setting on the replaced module is same as the one set on the module before replacement However if the cable is disconnected the data link to all stations is disabled Station number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station occupying occupying Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station occupying 2 stations Master station Remote station occupying 2 stations Remote station occupying 1 station Data link continues Station number 4 Station number 7 Faulty station Local station Local stat
189. andby station section master station Setting item Description Station information Settings Set the number of slave stations connected to the 14 connect count master station Including reserved stations Setting range 1 to 64 Default 64 Station information Set the type of the relevant station Setting range Ver 1 remote I O station Default 15 Station Ver 1 remote device station type Ver 1 intelligent device station Ver 2 remote device station Ver 2 intelligent device station Make the expanded cyclic setting of the relevant station Can be set in remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode Setting item single Default double quadruple octuple Set the number of stations occupied by the relevant station Setting item occupies 1 station Default occupies 2 stations occupies 3 stations occupies 4 stations Set the points of the relevant station Setting range 0 points Default 8 points 8 points 8 Refer to points 16 points 32 points Table 16 Expanded cyclic Section 4 4 7 17 Occupied Sta 18 Remote station points Section 4 4 6 6 2 19 Reserve Specify the reserved station error invalid station Dod Invalid Setting range No setting Default Reserved station x Section station select Invalid station 4 4 2 Assign the buffer memory size for transient transmission to the local station the intelligent device station and the standby master station S
190. ant Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration 5t084Hz 175mm Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y Z Shock resistance directions Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases Operating altitude 1 0 to 2000 m Installation location Inside a control panel Overvoltage category 2 Il or less Pollution degree 2 or less 1 Do not use or store the board under the environment where the atmospheric pressure is higher than the one at the altitude of 0 m Doing so may cause a malfunction 2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution degree 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally General specifications both CC Link Ver 2 board and a personal computer must be satisfied after installation 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 Performance Specifications Table 3 1 shows the performance specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 Table 3 1 Performance
191. ase the number of cyclic points 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 10 Reserve station function Stations that are not actually connected stations to be connected in the future will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserve stations Stations that will be connected in the future Reserve station Station number 4 r D S ERE A o Master i Local station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupying Reserve station Station number 8 Station number 10 I Remote station Remote station 4 stations Remote station Remote station 1 1 occupying occupying occupying occupying 2 stations 1 station Era E d 2 stations m EN 11 Error invalid station setting function By setting network parameters a module that is powered off in the system configuration will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master station and local station However exercise caution since errors are no longer detected Stations to be set as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 Master Local station Local station occupying occupying station Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station Remote station Remote station occupying occupying occupying 2 stations 1 station 2 stations This station does not become a data link faulty station Stati
192. assignment checklist App 65 Device Monitor Utility 8 20 Differences from the CC Link Ver 1 Board App 50 E EMC Directive App 86 Etror Codes x eee dime 15 1 Error invalid station setting function 4 41 External Dimensions App 92 F Function List sssssssssseeses 4 1 G General Specifications 3 1 Generic Terms and Abbreviations A 20 H Hardware 8 16 Help Scre n 222 ren aset eher 8 21 Host line status SB0090 App 21 Host master standby master operation status SBOO B 2 2 20 Host mode SB0060 App 19 Host parameter status SW0068 App 24 Host standby master station setting status SB0062 sene App 19 Host station number SW 0061 App 24 Host station operation status SBOO6E App 20 Host type SB0061 App 19 How to Use this Manual A 19 1 Increasing number of cyclic points 4 45 Index 1 Input data status setting from a data link faulty L M N Station eee ete ed eh eR 1 6 Installatio
193. aster station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored Two words 32points are used per station 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored Two words 32points are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Remote I O station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations 1 1 1 1 1 1 Address Remote output RY 1 1 1 For station i YOF to YOO E04 number 1 Y1F to Y10 1 For station i 2 number 2 For station 4 number 3 E5 a 1 1 For station E64 number 4 E74 For station i number 5 E9 MEN For station number 63 i 1 1 1 For station number 64 ipe RY7FF to RY7FO 1 1 1 Address For station number 1 For station number 2 For station number 3 For station number 4 For station number 5 15C4 For station 15p number63 15 For station 15F number 64 App 3 APPENDIX S number S t t EN 8 I ation Buffer memory address 160
194. aster station and one intelligent device station AJ65BT D75P2 S3 as shown below is used Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 4 station Intelligent device station station No 1 AJ65BT D75P2 S3 2000 C Servo amplifier d we 01 E Le amplifier Positioning module Terminal resistor 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 2 Setting the Master Station The following shows the master station setting 14 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section Channel No setting switch 1 OFF 2 OFF 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 2 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use V ChannelNo 81 ChannelNo 82 ChannelNa83 Channel No 84 Other settings Ex 1 gt Channel No Chan
195. ata reception The following illustrates the relation between the intelligent device station s I O operations and the user program on the PC in data reception The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 Personal computer Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board i x1 Remote inputs 2 59 __maReceive 2 7 RX2 reception normal read request RX3 reception error read request H4 RY2 reception read complete Buffer memory 400H reception data size designation area to reception data designation area i 5FFH prr cr 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 2 Reads out the reception normal read request 1 When the AJ65BT R2 receives data from external signal RX2 and the reception error read request equipment the reception normal read request signal signal RX3 RX2 or reception error read request signal RX3 is turned ON 3 With the reception normal read request signal RX2 ON reads out the received data 4 Turns ON the reception read complete signal 5 Turns ON the reception read complete signal RY2 of the AJ65BT R2 6 The AJ65BT R2
196. ation Buffer memory address 2 0 to 2B3H 2 4 to 2 7 2B8u to 2BBH 2BCn to 2BFH 2 0 to 2C3H 2 4 to 2C7H 2 8 to 2CBH 2CCu to 2 200 to 2D3H 204 to 2D7H 208 to 2DBH 2DCu to 2DFH number App 7 APPENDIX Address 1 2 4 5 5E7H 5 8 9 5ECH 5EDH 1 2 4 5 6 5F7H 5F8H 9 5FDH 8 MELSEC 3 Link special relays SB The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON OFF data Buffer memory addresses 5EO0n to 5FFH correspond to link special relays 5 0000 to SBO1FF For details on the link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF refer to Appendix 2 1 The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5E0H to SFFH and link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF b15 b14 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b5 bB b2 bi bO F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 3D 3C 3B 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 5F 5D 5C 5B 5A
197. ation number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote device station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being
198. ation setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time C No setting x 8ms 13 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station 14 Link refresh cycle C No setting ms 15 All connect count 2 Modules Station information settings Table 10 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Station tvpe Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word Eu cyclic Sta station points station select station 17 2 Remote I O station piss 32 points No setting fF pe 10 3 10 3 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 3 Setting up the remote I O stations The settings of the remote I O station switches are shown below Station No setting switch Transmission speed setting switch 0 156 kbps Transmission speed Setting Setting switch status value 156 kbps No of tens No of units 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 AJ65SBTC1 32D1 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON AJ65SBTC1 32T 4 2 4 A Y X0 XF STATION NO B RATE PW LRUNLERR X012345 67 X89ABCDEF X10111213141516 17 X18191A1B1C1D1E1F ON o j ollel iP GB jo fo jo fc fo jo fo 7 402010184 2 1 4 2 1 A
199. ations Remote input RX Handshaking signals Personal computer Master station Such as positioning Remote input RX complete RXOF to RX00 RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX2F to RX20 f 3 RX3F to RX30 2 RX3F to RX30 mdReceive RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 to RX7FF to RX7FO Remote input RX when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Device No RX00 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Remote output 4 The program uses the mdSend function to write the on off information to the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote input RX Handshaking zy Personal computer Master station such as positioning Remote input RX complete Program RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 to RY30 moet RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY4F to RY40 to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY8F
200. aximum value LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 3 2 1 5 7 5 ms x2 When writing RY to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 33 App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Remote device station RX The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote device station until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off 1 Formula Normal value LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to refer to Appendix 3 1 n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 5 13 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote device station processing time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to refer to Appendix 3 1
201. based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 Station numbers Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 Local station Remote I O Q80BD Remote I O station J61BT11N station occupies occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations 1 station Master station QU61BT11N Ver 2 compatible remote device station occupies 1 station Type Local station Occupied Sta Input for Err Sta Operational Automatic reconnection station count settings Standby master station No Other 3 Delay information setting settings Driver WDT Monitoring Time 250 x 8 ms Block data assurance per station Link refresh cycle ens Station information All connect count LES settings Station information Po Station information setting items MEME Station Expanded cyclic Reserve invalid station select Sees Sees eee a ee eee E ee ee sen eee en m uM a ee ae ee Intelligent buffer select word Setting not required 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 4 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Additional Mode This section explains the parameter settings using the CC Link Ver 2 utility 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following syste
202. become high 2 If the link refresh cycle is prolonged the transmission delay time of the cyclic data may increase 3 Depending on the following causes the link refresh may not be executed as per link refresh cycle set in the Parameter settings Other settings screen Performance of a personal computer CPU is low Too many link refresh points Too many CC Link Ver 2 boards has been installed Overloading due to the other running applications Overloading due to the other running boards 4 When the link refresh time checked on the Board information screen Board detail information screen is longer than the set link refresh cycle take any of the following actions Extend the link refresh cycle Decrease the remote station points of the whole network 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 Useful Functions This section explains some useful functions for the CC Link Ver 2 board 4 4 1 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future reserved station function This function prevents any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that is not actually connected but that will be connected in the future from being treated as a data link faulty station by the master and local stations When the master station is in the Remote net ver 2 mode the number of points for a reserved station can be set to 0 Station that will be connected in the future
203. button Saves the settings and closes the Other settings screen 9 button Closes the Other settings screen without saving the settings 10 Default button Set default values as parameters in the Other settings Refer to Table 6 1 in Section 6 1 1 The link refresh cycle can be set only when block data assurance per station setting is enabled For details of the parameter settings refer to Chapter 6 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE 8 2 6 Operating the Target settings screen Set the logical station number to access a multiple CPU system Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 120 test Test 1 _ gt Channel No 2 gt Logical Sta No 5 Sta No 0 e 3 Target CPU v 4 4 Set Eid 5 CC Link 6 Target setting list Logical Sta No Sta No Target CPU 7 8 v Description 1 Channel No Select the channel for setting the Target Enter the logical station number to be set or modified Setting range 65 to 239 Enter the station No of the CC Link module that is controlled by the multiple CPU system Setting range 0 to 63 2 Logical Sta No 3 Sta No 4 Target CPU Select the target multi CPU to be accessed 5 button Registers the settings and or their changes into the Target Setting List 6 Ta
204. cannot continue data link because Slave station disconnect arms of power off etc and continues the data link with only the Section 4 3 1 normal modules When a module which has been disconnected from data link Auto return function because of power off etc returns to the normal status it Section 4 3 2 automatically joins the data link Sets the status clear latch of the input reception data from Input data status setting f a station that became data link faulty because of power off Section 4 3 3 from data link faulty station cio Standby master function Continues data link by switching to the standby master station when a problem occurs the master station Driver WDT function Monitors operation of the software operating system Section 4 3 5 driver inside the hardware Station based block data Prevent separation of cyclic data to new data and old data Section 4 3 6 assurance function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 3 Table 4 3 lists the useful functions Table 4 3 List of the useful functions By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as reserved stations these will not be treated as data link faulty stations Reserved station function Section 4 4 1 The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points If any of the connected modules is designated as a reserved station it cannot perform data link Prevents modules that will be powered off in the system configuration fr
205. ck list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 13 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 4 Channel No lt Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type lt Master statio Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mod p Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No 0 Other settings 11 Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time CNo setting x 8 ms 13 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station 14 Link refresh cycle CNo setting ms 15 All connect count 1 Modules Station information settings Table 13 2 Station Information Setting Check List Sta No Bata type Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word cod cyclic Sta station points station select 16 1 Intelligent device station prin 32 points No setting cn T r T DL S O Pp o p op op op 13 3
206. creen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board settina Check all the Channel No that you use ChannelNo 81 ChannelNo 82 ChannelNo 83 Channel No 84 Other settings ese 1 gt Channel No Channel No 81 T Operational settings 8 Fety count 3 Set 2 3 Sta No Type o Master station ler Other settings 5 9 p Automatic reconnection station count 1 Cancel 3 d Transmission rate 156kbps xi Occupied Sta Default 6 21 z Default Standb ter station oss 4 Remote net Ver 1 mode v Input for Er Sta amp Hoid etea Theck 7 10 ee ee eo a Station information settings 11 Delay information setting 0 50 micro sec 1 Clear 1 5 All connect count I 1 2 Driver WDT monitoring time Use driver WDT functi No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta albos Tep 16 TA Intelligent device station single Occupies 1 station 1 3 p Block data assurance per station Assure block dala This function use link refresh function 14 gt c 1 Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting che
207. cts hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the us
208. d as the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 type CC Link system master local interface board supporting the extended cyclic points 3 How to check the version The following logo is not shown on the Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link board On the side of the Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link board the CC Link logo is marked The Ver 2 compatible CC Link board has CCuinkEZI logos in the positions shown below RUN ERR OO OO e amp C9 69 App 70 APPENDIX Appendix 12 Mode Selection Method MELSEC Three different modes are available for CC Link system to be applicable to various Systems The following flowchart explains the points of mode selection Do you use CC Link YES for the first time Does the system completely utilize the previous System YES Select the remote net ver 1 mode Is a ver 2 compatible station added to the previous system Are the sequence programs for ver 1 stations utilized Are modules to be connected only local stations NO of points used per station 32 points for RX RY and 4 points for RWw RWr without lem NO Y Select the remote net Select the remote net ver 2 mode ver 1 mode Do the modules to be connected include a ver 2 compatible station YES
209. dant CPU specify To access the Redundant CPU directly specify the station number of the CC Link module mounted on the station of the target Redundant CPU b Action to be taken at occurrence of system switching After system switching the Redundant CPU in the same system control System or standby system can also be accessed by directly specifying the 1 station number that was specified before system switching 1 When system switching occurs in the Redundant CPU system to be accessed the station number of the CC Link module mounted on the station of each Redundant CPU is also changed internally Example When the Redundant CPU in the control system is accessed Master station Standby master station el s 2 Standby Master local Before system switchin Control E E System interface board B d B E lel E El m F E 8 Station 0 I Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 CC Link Terminal resistor Terminal resistor Standby master station Master station i Control Standby Control Standby Master local t
210. de 0 points can be set for a reserved station 2 In the remote net ver 2 mode RWw and RWr of the remote I O station are set to O points Care must be taken to calculate the word points for the programmable controller CPU side 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Remote net additional mode This mode is designed to be used when a CC Link Ver 2 compatible slave station is added to the existing CC Link Ver 1 system The program of the existing system can be used as is Remote device station Local station Remote device station f Remote station Ver 1 compatible additional mode Ver 2 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 8 additional mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Remote input RX Ver 1 Station number 1 compatible Station number 2 Station number 2 remote Station number 3 output RY output RY Station number 4 Station number 7 Station number 8 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 1 Set Ver 1 compatible slave stations to the smaller station numbers and Ver 2 compatible slave stations to greater station numbers In the previous page example the Ver 2 compatible slave stations are added to after station No 4 since the existing CC Link Ver 1 system uses up to No 3 2 The remote net additional mode assumes that the Ver 2 compatible slave stations are added to the existing CC Link Ver
211. dix 3 Appendix 6 changed 4 Appendix 1 to 3 changed Appendix 5 to 7 Appendix 14 changed 8 Appendix 8 changed 9 Appendix 9 changed 10 Appendix 5 changed 12 Appendix 7 changed 15 Appendix 12 changed 16 Appendix 13 changed 17 Appendix 10 changed 18 Appendix 11 changed 19 Addition Section 5 3 3 Section 5 3 4 Section 5 4 3 Section 5 7 Section 6 5 Chapter 16 Section 16 2 Section 16 2 1 Section 16 2 2 Section 16 3 Section 16 3 3 Section 16 4 Section 16 4 1 Section 16 4 2 Appendix 13 Appendix 13 1 Appendix 13 2 Appendix 14 Appendix 16 3 Section 2 2 3 Section 5 2 1 to 5 2 4 Section 8 1 3 to 8 1 6 Section 15 1 Section 15 1 3 Section 15 2 Section 15 2 1 Section 15 3 3 to 15 3 5 Section 15 4 Section 15 5 Jan 2014 The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print date SH NA 080527ENG S Correction Section 16 3 2 Appendix 2 Jun 2014 SH NA 080527ENG T Correction PRECAUTIONS FOR USE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Section 3 2 1 Section 4 3 4 Section 4 3 5 Section 4 3 7 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 2 8 Section 8 3 1 Section 8 3 2 Section 8 3 3 Section 8 3 5 Section 8 3 6 Section 8 3 8 Section 8 3 10 Section 16 1 Section 16 2 2 Section 16 2 3 Section 16 3 2 Appendix 13 2 Appendix 15 2 Appendix 16 2 Appendix 16 3 Appendix 17 Section 8 3 8 to Section 8 3 11 Section 8 3 7 to Section 8 3
212. dule has a different terminal block layout Exercise caution when wiring the system 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC NCAUTION Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board and wiring Not doing so may cause damage to the product When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring always attach the computer s main cover Failure to do so may cause an electric shock Always ground the SLD terminal of the board and the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Not doing so can cause a malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as swarf or wire chips from being attached onto the board Failure to do so may cause fires failure or malfunction Be sure to fix the wires or cables connected to the board by placing them in a duct or clamping them If not fixed cables may be dangled and accidentally pulled causing damage to the board and cables and malfunction due to bad cable contacts Do not install the control lines together with the communication cables or bring them close to each other Doing so may cause malfunctions due to noise When removing the communication cable or power supply cables from the board do not pull the cable First loosen the screws where the cable is connected to the board and then remove the cable Pulling the cable that is connected to the board may cause damage to the board and cable or m
213. e 6 1 Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 Operational settings 1 9 Sta No Type 0 H Master station res Other settings 2 Transmission rate 10Mbps xl Occupied Sta hi Default 3 gt Mode Remote netVer 2 mode Input for En Sta roe rhe Station information settings 1 4 gt All connect count 64 Ej Clear a No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta 1 1 Remote 1 0 station single Occupies 1 station 2 2 Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station single ccupies 1 station 33 Ver Remote 1 0 station v Occupies 1 station 4 4 Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station v single Occupies 1 station 5 5 Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station v single Occupies 1 station 6 6 Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station v single Occupies 1 station Y LLI A A A 15 16 17 18 19 20 Other settings a 7 Ret count 32 8 Automatic reconnection station count Ted Cancel 9 gt Standby master station No 10 Delay information setting 0 50 micro sec 11 Driver WOT monitoring time Use driver WDT function zen
214. e I O station Remote I O station Master station intelligent device intelligent device or remote or remote i p Y station station device station device station Eme d tation to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 1100 used Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance 156kbps 1200m 3937 2 ft 625kbps 900m 2952 9 ft A ft 2 5Mbps 20 cm 7 88 in or longer 400m 1312 4 ft 5Mbps 160m 524 96ft 10Mbps 100m 328 1 ft 3 3 CC Link Dedicated Cable Specifications Use the CC Link dedicated cable for the CC Link system If a cable other than the CC Link dedicated cable is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed If you have any questions regarding the CC Link dedicated cable or if you wish to see its specifications refer to the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org For details refer to the CC Link cable wiring manual issued by CC Link Partner Association 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 4 Buffer Memory List Buffer memory is a memory area used for data transfer between the user program and the CC Link Ver 2 board The data of the buffer memory return to their defaults when the CC Link Ver 2 board is reset by powering OFF the PC or resetting the CC Link Ver 2 Utility The buffer memory list is shown Avai
215. e controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Med
216. e number of remote device B38B Aa setting error parameter station information parameter stations to 42 stations or less addresses 20u to 5 The number of intelligent device inteligent device station stations including local stations was Set the number of intelligent B38C 2 9 set to 27 stations or more with a device stations to 26 stations or setting error parameter MATE station information parameter less addresses 20 to 5 The invalid station designation parameter addresses 14H to 17H was set to a value other than board module s head station number or Set the head station number of Invalid station station number not specified in the the target station B38D designation error parameter Do not designate any of the parameter Example of other than head station stations not specified with a number parameter A bit other than for station number 5 was on for a module occupying 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 15 2 15 2 15 ERROR CODE Error code hexadecimal 15 3 Error description Communication buffer assignment error Automatic update buffer assignment error Standby master station designation error parameter Number of retries setting error parameter Number of auto return stations setting error parameter Station number duplicate error parameter Station data setting error parameter Number of occupied stations setting error paramet
217. e package 7 1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions MELSEC The following are the precautions when installing and uninstalling the software package e Log on as a user having administrator authority e Make sure to close other applications running on Windows including resident software such as antivirus software before installation and uninstallation e The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies software such as Windows Update and Java update may start automatically Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically e Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct and install an appropriate display driver Or update the Windows operating system e The language switching function of the operation system set by Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel screen is not supported The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is changed Install SW1DNC CCBD2 B after uninstalling SWnDNF CCLINK e When using Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 or Windows 8 1 NET Framework 3 5 is required Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel e A network drive cannot be specified as the installation destination Whe
218. e per station This function use link refresh function Link refresh cycle 1 ms 3 Select the Ver 1 Intelligent device station or Ver 2 Intelligent device station for Type of the station information Make a selection according to the mode set in Mode setting 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC b Setting the standby master station Set the same Standby master station number as the one set in the master station to Sta No in Parameter settings gt gt and set Standby master station for Type For Mode setting select the same mode as the one set in Mode setting of the master station Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 120 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 perational settings Other settings Sta 124 Standby master station v Transmission rate 10Mbps E Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Default Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode E Input for Err Sta C Hold Clear Check Station information settings connect count No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 3 Notes on using the standby master function a Only one standby master station is allowed in a single data li
219. e personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode standby hibernate e Windows XP e Windows Server 2003 R2 2 Behavior when entering the standby mode hibernation mode When the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate the following message appears and the power save mode standby hibernate is disabled The CC Link Ver 2 board continues its operation and the data link remains normal lt When entering the standby mode gt System Standby Failed The device driver For the PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller device is preventing the machine from entering standby Please close all applications and try again If the t problem persists you may need to update this driver When entering the hibernation mode System Hibernation Failed The device driver For the PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller device is preventing the machine from entering hibernation Please close all applications and try again If the problem persists you may need to update this driver 3 Countermeasure When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode standby hibernate check and change the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed or the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS on the control panel App 81 App 81 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 16 2
220. e signed and validated User Account Control Only elevate UlAccess applications that are installed in secure locations User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when prompting for elevation User Account Controk Virtualize file and registry write failures to per user locations Prompt for credentials Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled m m App 80 l User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for ad 8 Local Securty Setting Explain User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for credentials Prompt for consent uU Setting completion MELSEC 7 Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent 8 Select Elevate without prompting on the Local Security Setting gt gt and click the OK button App 80 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 16 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup CC Link Ver 2 board does not support the power save mode standby hibernate sleep and the fast startup function The following explains the behavior of the personal computer when the personal computer enters each mode Appendix 16 1 Behavior when th
221. e status of the data link startup switching SBO0043 master station direction from the standby master station to the master station 5E4u b3 switching and data link Off Not complete startup On Switching complete Shows the data link status SB0070 Master station BE74 b0 information Off Data link control by the master station On Data link control by standby master station SBO074 Standby master Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station 5E7Tub1 station information Off No standby master station O O Standby master station exists b Special link registers SW The following explains the special link registers SW related to the standby master function The numeric values in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses Table 4 6 List of special link registers related to the standby master function Applicability O Applicable lt Not licabl Number Name Description ot applicable Master Standby master station station The execution result of the master station switching and data Result of master link startup direction by the SB0001 is stored SW0043 By 6434 station switching and 0 Normal x data link startup Other than 0 An error code is stored Refer to Chapter 15 SWO0073 Standby master Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 station number 1 to 64 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 5 Program example w
222. eck the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check if the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote device station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of the programi remote register RWr buffer memory pregam Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote device station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Check the parameter information SW0067 e Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station nu
223. ection 10 1 2 Section 11 2 Section 11 4 Section 11 8 Addition Section 11 3 5 Section 11 3 6 Section 11 7 Correction Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 Section 1 3 Section 2 2 1 Section 4 2 3 Chapter 7 Section 8 4 1 Section 9 1 Section 11 3 Section 17 1 4 Section 17 2 1 Section 17 3 1 Appendix 3 2 Section 8 4 2 to Section 8 4 3 Section 8 4 3 to Section 8 4 4 Addition Section 8 4 2 Appendix 7 Correction Precautions for use Generic Terms and Abbreviations Chapter 1 Section 2 2 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 3 1 Section 4 2 1 Section 4 2 2 Section 4 2 3 Section 4 2 4 Section 4 4 5 Section 5 2 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 2 3 Section 5 2 4 Section 5 3 Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 2 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 2 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 6 Section 9 3 6 Section 9 3 7 Section 9 3 8 Section 9 3 11 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 1 2 Section 12 2 1 Section 12 5 1 Section 13 1 2 Section 13 2 2 Section 14 1 2 Section 14 2 2 Section 15 2 1 Section 16 2 1 Section 17 1 4 Section 17 2 1 Section 17 6 Appendix 3 1 2 Appendix 3 1 3 The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print date May 2008 SH NA 080527ENG G Model addition Q81BD J61BT11 Correction Precautions for use Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product List Section 1 1 Section 1 3 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 2
224. ection explains how to check serial number the function version and ROM version of the CC Link Ver 2 board and the SW1DNC CCBD2 B version 1 Checking serial number function version and ROM version of the The function version of the CC Link Ver 2 board can be checked at Serial section as shown below KKK kk CUR Serial No Function version CH EA Ub oj b Checking ROM version The ROM version of the CC Link Ver 2 board is shown on Board detail information screen in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Board detail information Channel No 84 f Data link status In data link Error status Normal Board type QS80BD J61BT11N Product information 140720000000000 B IRQ No 19 ROM version 2D Memory F1300000 F137FFFFH 1 0 port E000 E OFFH Present Error No Error Link scan time ms Max 2 Min 2 Current 2 Link refresh time ms 3 Min 1 Current m LED information RUN I MST SMST LOCAL ERR sw T Ms T TIME f UNE T Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate f OMbps App 68 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Checking the SW1DNC CCBD2 B version Select Version information from the system menu displayed by clicking on the al gm icon E on the title bar of CC Link Ver 2 utility Move itor Online ope Minimi
225. ed When the remote output RYO 2 turns ON the remote input RXO 1 turns ON When the remote output RYO 3 turns ON the remote input RXO 4 turns ON When data are set to the remote register RWwO 6 values are written to the remote register RWr0 5 When data are set to the remote register RWw0 7 values are written to the remote register RWr0 8 Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 12 8 Terminal resistor 1 Master station RWrO Receive RXO RX 2 Local station RYO Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 3 Master station Send RYO RY Terminal resistor 4 Local station RXO Occupies 4 stations Local station station 1 5 Master station n2 5555 Receive RWr0 RWr 6 Local station n1 5555 Personal RWwO computer 7 Master station m2 X 55554 Send RWwO g AS RWw 8 Local station m1 X 5555H 12 8 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 2 mode or the remote net additional mode 12 2 1 Configuring the system 12 9 In this system 2 local stations shall be connected Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 4 stations J
226. ed 03h There was no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board 04h Handshaking with the shared memory area Restart If the error persists replace the 21h has failed board 66h There was no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board DUMP value Value of the first 1 byte in the detailed data description area 1 When this event error occurs on the event viewer of the operating system change the BIOS Setup setting as follows and reboot the PC BIOS Setup items Plug amp Play O S YES No Reset Configuration Data No YES 2 This event error may occur when the PCI bus controller is not functioning correctly This error may also occur if the USB driver is not functioning correctly In this case reinstall the USB driver and make sure that it functions correctly 3 This event error occurs on the event viewer by setting the hardware test mode using mdBdModSet function or executing hardware test with CC Link Ver 2 utility 16 15 16 15 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 3 3 Checking on Device Manager screen Check if the board is displayed on the Windows Device Manager screen Item Corrective action Is the driver name of the board not displayed on the The board or driver is not installed Device Manager screen If the board is not installed install the board If the board is already installed check the board installation status and reinstall the
227. ed station r Description 1 All stations 1 64 Select this when performing the line test on all stations 2 Selected station Select this when performing the line test on a single station Setting range 1 to 64 3 button Executes the test 4 button Cancels the test Line test result screen For All stations 1 64 only 5 Each station information fe ofa 6 gt Test result Normal It completed successfully Error code 0 B Eror 5 7 Display when 4 stations are connected Displays the information of each station pkEachstationiniormation White Normal station Red Error station 6 Test result Displays the status of each station In the event of an error the error code is displayed 7 button Closes the line test result screen 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC d Network test This is used to test the start or stop of the data link after connecting CC Link cables or after establishing the data link 1 When the data link of the master station is stopped the data link of the entire CC Link system is stopped 2 The Network test is executable only when the Data link status of the CC Link Ver 2 board is In data link Suspend data link or During Auto Returning Operation Procedure After selecting Network test in the Test item click the Start button The Network test screen appears Network test Stop data link Cancel 1
228. eeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeseceeseneeseaeeesneeeeaeees App 22 Appendix Data link processing time ce cccescceeecceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeecaeeeeaceeseaeeceaeeecaeeecaeeeseneseeaeesseenaees App 30 Appendix 3 1 Link scan time sssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeenne nennen rentrer tht sentent t nnn nennen App 30 Appendix 3 2 Cyclic transmission processing time sssssssssssseeeeenee App 32 Appendix 3 3 Transient transmission processing time ssesssssssssssseeeeee App 44 Appendix 4 Communication with the Redundant App 47 Appendix 5 Comparisons with CC Link Ver 1 Board and CC Link App 50 Appendix 5 1 Differences from the CC Link Ver 1 board sse App 50 Appendix 5 2 Functional comparisons with CC Link module sse App 52 Appendix 6 Replacing the CC Link Board nennen eene nnns App 53 Appendix 6 1 Replacing a CC Link Ver 1 board with a CC Link Ver 2 App 53 Appendix 6 2 Replacing a CC Link Ver 2 board with a CC Link Ver 1 board or a CC Link board with another of the same version App 54 6 9 6 amp App 55 Appendix 7 About Parameter backup restore tool
229. eeeeaeeceaeeceaneeseneesneeseaeeseacessneseaneeesaeennees App 83 Appendix 17 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager essssssssseseeeeeeeeeene nennen App 83 Appendix 17 2 Uninstalling 5 App 83 Appendix 17 3 Checking 5 App 84 Appendix 18 EMC and low voltage directive sess App 86 Appendix 18 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive ssssssssssses App 86 Appendix 18 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive App 91 Appendix 19 External Dimensions 92 Appendix 19 1 Q80BD J61BT 11N ssssssssssssssseseeeeeeneeeneen enne nnne t nnne ene App 92 Appendix 19 2 Q81BD J61BT 11 ssssssssssssssssesseeeeeee nennen nente ennt eterni ntn rnnt enne App 93 INDEX Index 1 to Index MANUALS The following are the manuals related to this product Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals Relevant Manuals Manual Name Manual Number Model Code MELSEC Q CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080394 This Manual explains system configuration Performance specifications functions handling wiring and 13JR64 troubleshooting for Q series master local module
230. el No 84 Sta No D Master station Ver 2 mode UN Save SB SW Transmission rate 10Mbps Data link status In data link Error status Nomi S Board type BBOBDJEIBTIIN Product information 07200000000008 IRO No BE E ROM version D Memory FI300000F13FFFFH 1 0 port Present Error NoEmr 7 Link scan time ms Max 2 Min 2 Current 2 Link refresh time ms 3 Min 1 Current 1 In data link Normal data link is being performed Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally RUN e LOCAL OFF No error has occurred ERR Sw M S PRM TIME LINE 11 7 11 7 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC b Checking remote device stations Check that the LED status are as shown below AJ65VBTCU 68DAV On O Off 24V DC is being supplied Module is normal The data link is being performed normally No error has occurred 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Confirming the operation with a user program With the user program check whether digital values are being output to remote device stations through normal data link Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration Fo
231. eld You can also specify the backup destination in the Open File dialog box by clicking the button File path C MELSEC PARAM Param bdp Browse Exit Read parameter settings from board driver and back up them to parameter file 3 After specifying the backup destination click the 7 button The confirmation dialog box is r Parameter informatio displayed PEI Click the button The parameters are backed up to the specified file Parameter backup Parameter restore Browse Backup Exit 4 When the backup ends successfully the dialog box on the left is displayed Read parameter settings from board driver and back up them to parameter file Click the button to end the backup Parameter backed Parameter backup Parameter restore p bdp Browse Backup Exit End App 57 App 57 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 1 3 Restoring parameters The following describes the procedure for restoring parameters 1 Activate the Parameter backup restore tool Refer to Type the name of a program Folder document or Ap pe nd ix T 2 Internet resource and Windows will open it For you G Tool US Prmbkup exe OK Cancel Browse A 2 Select the Parameter restore gt gt in the Parameter eT backup restore tool dialog box Refer to Appendix Read parameter settings from parameter file
232. emote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station no setting is required Master Down Local Local station station station Remote station NS E E A Terminal Terminal Lb resistor resistor Continues data link excluding faulty station Remote station In the event of a cable breakdown the data link cannot be performed because there is no terminal resistor Master Local Local station station station Remote station Remote station EFA pu E WR MED Terminal Breakdown Terminal resistor resistor 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal auto return function This function allows any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that has been disconnected from the data link due to power off or other cause to automatically reconnect to the data link when it returns to the normal status Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility For more details on the setting refer to Section 8 2 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 3 3 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station setting the input data status from a data link faulty station This function sets the input reception data status from a data link faulty station 1 Targe
233. en essssssssseeeneeennenen emnes 8 4 8 2 3 Operating the Other station monitor screen 8 7 8 2 4 Operating the Online operation screen ssssssssssssssssssseeeeeneenneeneee nennen nnne 8 9 8 2 5 Operating the Parameter Settings screen sssssssssssseseeeeeeeenee eene 8 10 8 2 6 Operating the Target settings screen ssssssssssssneeeeeennennen nennen 8 12 8 2 7 Operating the Memory I O test screen sssssssssssesseeeeneeeenee nennen rennen nnns 8 13 8 2 8 Operating the Test screen EAE 8 14 83 Davita UMi e Deep epi reta 8 19 Bi Sl OMEN nenir a A LL n R A A A 8 19 8 3 2 Setting the batch monitoring esssseeeneenenneneene nen 8 21 8 3 3 Setting the 16 point register monitor ssssssssseeseeeeeneeeenneneeeneeeneene nennen 8 22 8 3 4 Setting the monitoring destination sssseeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeenneenen nennen 8 23 8 3 5 Setting the device to be monitored ssssssssesseneeeeneneneee nene 8 24 8 3 6 Changing word device double word device values sese 8 26 8 3 7 Switching a bit device on off 8 27 9 3 8 Switching Display Format
234. en a programmable controller is set as the master station a CC Link Ver 2 board cannot be specified as a standby master station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 Special link relays registers SB and SW related to the standby master function The following explains the special link relays and registers related to the standby master function They are stored in the buffer memory a Special link relays SB The special link relays SB relating to the standby master function are as follows The numeric values in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses and bit locations Example When the buffer memory address is 5EOH and the bit location is 0 5EOH 60 Table 4 5 List of special link relays related to the standby master function Applicability OApplicable lt Not applicable Number Description T Master Standby master station station Switches the output information from the standby master station SB0001 Master station to the master station and starts up the data link Off Without switching direction On With switching direction Acknowledge status of Shows the acknowledge status of the data link startup switching SB0042 master station direction from the standby master station to the master station 4 62 switching and data link Off Not acknowledged startup On Direction acknowledged 1 and data link startup Complete status of Shows the complet
235. en and select Start from the menu File Action View Help l 5sslHrmi wwnnv Services Loca Services Local MELSECPowerManager Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As Media Center Extender S Allows Med Disabled Local Service Microsoft FramewA Disabled Local System Microsoft Framew ise Automatic D Local System Microsoft Framew Automatic D Local System Microsoft iSCSI Initiator EE Manual Local System Microsoft Software Sha Manual Local System j Multimedia Class Sched All Tasks Automatic Local System C Net Msmg Listener Ada Disabled Network Servic Refresh Net Pipe Listener Adapter Disabled Local Service Net Tep Listener Adapter Properties Disabled Local Service Net Tcp Port Sharing Se Disabled Local Service Netlogon Help Manual Local System Network Access Protecti The Networ Manual Network Servic Network Connections Manageso Started Manual Local System Network List Service Identifies th Started Manual Local Service Network Location Awar Collects an Started Automatic Network Servic 4 Network Store Interface This service Started Automatic Local Service A Office Source Engine Manual Local System 3 Offline Files The Offline Started Automatic Local System Parental Controls This service Manual Local Service X Extended Standard App 85 App 85 APPENDIX MELSEC
236. ending on other installed software packages the manuals shown above may also be displayed In this case refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 6 2 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SWODNC MNETH B Version 27D or later 53 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later 4 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 17T or later F5 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later k6 When SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 02C or later is installed MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference is deleted c Driver When installing the board on the personal computer after the installation of the software package the driver is installed automatically T 1 For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the driver is required to be specified on the Found New Hardware Wizard screen Refer to 16 2 4 When the driver installation is completed normally the following driver is displayed on the Device Manager screen of Windows MELSEC CC Link Device PCI MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Controller d Service application To prevent a personal computer entering the power save mode hibernate sleep MELSECPowerManager is installed automatical
237. entary power failure The remote I O module hardware uses the power by internally converting the module power 24 V DC to 5 V DC When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I O module the following situation occurs Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I O module to turn off gt Response time for input module on gt off Thus an erroneous input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time indicated by 1 in the figure below 1 Mm Remote I O module module power supply and input external supply power Remote I O module internal 5 V DC Input Xn 1 1 N i When the input external power supply turns off the input Xn turns off after the response time for the input module changes from on to off When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I O modules select the proper type of cable and perform wiring by considering the voltage drop Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I O module is within the specified range of the remote I O module to be used Stabilized power supply Remote module Remote module 4 Access to slave station No 64 When the CC Link Ver 2 board is used transient transmission to slave station No 64 is not allowed 1 Access to slave station No 64 is not possible even from GX Developer GX Works2 or GOT on any other station 2 Cyclic transmission can be norm
238. er Number of connected modules setting error parameter Standby master station designation error installation status Reserved station designation error parameter Standby master station setting error Parameter change error Response error Transient target station error RY simultaneous on error Cause of error details The total size of the communication buffer set with a station information parameter addresses 20 to 5Fx exceeded 4 k words The total size of the automatic update buffer set with a station information parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu exceeded 4 k words The standby master station designation parameter address 4u was set to a value other than 1 to 64 The number of retries setting parameter address 2 was set to a value other than 1 to 7 The number of auto return stations setting parameter address 3 was set to a value other than 1 to 10 A duplicate station number was set with a station information parameter addresses 20H to 5Fu The station information parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu setting does not satisfy the following condition 16 4 54 x 88 lt 2304 A Number of remote I O stations B Number of remote device stations C Number of intelligent device stations including local stations The number of occupied stations in station information parameter addresses 20 to 5Fu was set to a value other than 1 to 4 The number of connected
239. er may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista Windows Server Visual Basic Visual C Visual Studio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark or registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States Oracle and Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies SH NA 080527ENG V 1509 KWIX MODEL Q80BD BT11N SW1 U E MODEL CODE 13J
240. er s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Cent
241. ero point return Positioning identifier setting 0x200 INC linear 1 M code setting 0 Dwell time 0 Command speed 0x30D40 20000 Positioning address 1000 Arc address 0 Positioning identifier setting 0x200 INC linear 1 M code setting 0 Dwell time 0 Command speed 0x30D40 20000 Positioning address 1000 Arc address 0 14 10 14 10 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 4 4 JOG operation control The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and jog operation control The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 Personal computer Intelligent device station station No 1 TP CC Link Ver 2 board gezrsditdagizeutesaeeRReRuumRinenid T Remote outputs RY 1 9 13 10 14 zie RY16 J12 16 axis 1 forward run JOG start flag 11 15 i 12 16 18 16 RY18 axis 2 forward JOG start flag ENS 1 17 2 18 RY20 RY20 axis 1 servo ON flag 2 3 19 i 4 20 rd RY40 RY40 axis 2 servo ON flag Remote registers n RWw RWw6 axis 1 JOG speed RWw7 mdSend RWw14 axis 2 JOG speed RWw15 fr A erect ciphers cle eat x1
242. ersion of user application 16 3 16 3 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 2 Troubleshooting for Installation and Uninstallation The following explains the troubleshooting for error at installation and uninstallation 16 2 1 Installation failed When the installation is aborted or failed reinstall the utility by the following procedure 1 Check the installation and uninstallation precautions Refer to Section 7 1 2 Restart the personal computer 3 If the utility can be uninstalled uninstall it After the uninstallation restart the personal computer 4 Install the utility again by following the installation procedure Refer to Section 7 2 When the instruction displayed on the screen is not effective refer to Section 16 2 3 5 If the personal computer does not operate normally after the reinstallaion check if the personal computer has any problem Operating Environment Refer to Section 2 3 Checking personal computer and operating system Refer to Section 16 3 1 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 16 7 16 2 2 Uninstallation failed When the uninstallation is failed uninstall the utility after the reinstallation by the following procedure 1 Check the installation and uninstallation precautions Refer to Section 7 1 If the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled perform the operation 1 in this section 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 3 Display the Run screen from the S
243. eseaeseneeeaeeeaes 11 13 11 2 4 Creating a program sssssssssseeeeeneneneneeneen rennen enr enne nnns 11 14 11 2 5 Executing the data link ite te teta E 11 15 1 Checking the data link status nanenane ERRE nnne 11 15 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sssseeeeenenemenenn 11 16 12 1 When Using the Remote Net Ver 1 Mode sssssssssseeneenenneneen nennen rennen nnns 12 1 12 1 1 Configuring the system 2 n ici pd Ale ce p c d AH LH LE E E ed 12 1 12 1 2 Setting the master station sssssssssssesneeneenenee nennen nennen nnne 12 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting nennen 12 2 2 Parameter settings 1 eene neat ne nnn 12 3 12 1 3 Setting the local station acest ennt tnnt nhe tr np i ns 12 4 1 Switch setting channel No setting 12 4 2 Parameter settings eto ease nn boe era a eee aui eer nis 12 4 12 1 4 Creating a program 12 5 12 1 5 Executing the data nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne 12 7 1 Checking the data link status sssssssesseeeeeeeneeeeneenen emen rennen 12 7 2 Confirming the operation with a user program
244. esignated station communication station number during number setting error temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request The designated station numbers were Designated station not set during temporary error invalid number not set error request temporary error invalid cancel request Designate a station number that is no greater than the maximum communication station number Set station numbers to designate SW0003 SW0004 to 510007 Check whether the remote An error was detected a remote Line test error station station and the intelligent device station or an intelligent device station detected station are started and the cable while executing a line test is connected properly A station number other than the head Designate the head station by a Designated station station was designated by a temporary temporary error invalid number setting error error invalid request temporary error request temporary error invalid invalid cancel request cancel request All stations were in data link error status when either of the following requests was made SB0000 data link restart SB0002 data link stop All stations data link error Request again after the data link becomes normal x Station number settin The station number of the slave station Set the station number of the B308 9 is outside of the range between 1 and slave station within the
245. eters Program Buffer memory 3 Remote input 2 RX Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote input 5 RY Handshaking signals Remote output RY such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote register 7 RWw Remote register Numeric data such RWw Link scan gt as for averaging processing setting i and A D conversion 1 1 1 6 9 enable disable setting Remote register RWr Remote register Link scan Numeric data such RWr as digital output values and detected temperature value 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility Remote input 2 The remote input RX of each of the remote device stations is automatically stored for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory Remote device station Remote device station Personal computer Master station Station number 1 Station number 3 MUNI AUD ENS UE CC Link Ver2 board occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as initial
246. eters Save to file Removing the CC Link Ver 1 board currently in use Uninstall the software package for the CC Link Ver 1 board Turn OFF the personal computer and remove the CC Link Ver 1 board Mounting a CC Link Ver 2 board to be used Install the software package for the CC Link Ver 2 board e e Section 7 2 Installation Install the board to a slot on a personal computer e Section 5 3 3 Board Installation Set and check the channel number by the switch e e Section 5 3 4 Channel No settings Test the CC Link Ver 2 board if there is an error in the hardware of Section 5 7 Test the installed board Restoring parameters Activate Parameter backup restore tool and restore the Appendix 7 1 3 Restoring parameters parameters Reading them from files and saving them to the board End App 53 App 53 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 6 2 Replacing a CC Link Ver 2 board with a CC Link Ver 1 board or a CC Link board with another of the same version The following describes how to replace a CC Link Ver 2 board with a CC Link Ver 1 board or a CC Link board with another of the same version 1 When replacing a CC Link Ver 2 board with a CC Link Ver 1 board change the terms shown in Appendix 6 as follows Changing a CC Link Ver 1 board to a CC Link Ver 2 board Changing a CC Link Ver 2 board to a CC Link Ver 1 board 2 When replacing a CC Link board with another of the same version the
247. etries information SWO0065 6654 SW0066 6664 No of automatic return stations SW0067 6674 Parameter information SWO068 6681 Host parameter status MELSEC Availability Description um ome Master Local Offline Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration instruction with SBOOOB 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Stores the mode setting status 0 Online with automatic return 2 Offline 3 Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test Stores the station number of the host that is currently in operation 0 Master station 1 to 64 Local station Stores the operation setting status of the CC Link Ver 2 board b15 612611610 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO el ii Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station Valid only when b1 is 0 Master station duplex function 0 Master station duplex function invalid 1 Master station duplex function valid gt Input status from the data link faulty station 0 Clear 1 Hold Number of occupied stations 00 Occupies 1 station 10 Occupies 2 stations 11 Occupies 3 stations 01 Occupies 4 stations Slave station refresh forced clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP 0 Refresh 1 Clears compulsorily gt Expanded cyclic setting 00 single 01 double 10 quadruple 11 octuple Indica
248. etting range Per station Send receive buffer size 0 64 to 4096 words Default 64 Note that when it is set to multiple stations the total send receive buffer size for all slave stations must be within 4096 words Automatic automatic update buffer size 0 64 to 4096 words Default 128 Note that when it is set to multiple stations the total automatic buffer size for all slave stations must be within 4096 words 20 Intelligent buffer select word x1 Select the intelligent device station when using the local station When changing parameters and or settings of the master station or slave station perform the operation after stopping the data link at the master station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Table 6 2 Availability of station information setting only when selecting the master station Setting required Setting not required Reserve Intelligent Expanded Occupied Remote station invalid buffer points station select Setting item Number of connected Station type modules Lo Sst e 3159 1595 meses x 0 points Reserved station 8 points Ver 1 Remote I O station x 8 points x Remote net ver 2 8 phon UNIT 32 points o x o o x o jVetmeiendmkesa x o o7 OQ jVe2Rewedwesa o o o o Ver2 inistigent device staion o o o msm x x Oo ver
249. excludes reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 nw j ea 2 a o 4b s amp N Number of connected stations excluding reserved stations ni a b c excluding reserved stations nw b excluding reserved stations ST Constant Must be the largest value among 1 to 3 below However 2 is disregarded when b 0 and 3 is disregarded when c 0 1 800 a X 15 2 900 b X 50 3 When c 26 1200 c X 100 When c gt 26 3700 c 26 X 25 F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 48 X BT X retry count App 30 App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Example Using the following system configuration example when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station or transient transmission Station 3 Station Station Station Station number 1 1 number 2 number 4 3 number 12 1 Master Local station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote I O station device station device station station 1 Occupies 1 station 2 Occupies 2 stations 3 Occupies 4 stations BT 0 8 ST 2000 NI 1216 1 800 2 X 15 830 NW 1116 2 900 2 X 50 1000 N 5 3 1200 8 X 100 2000 ni 12 a 2 b 2 c 8 nw 10 LS 0 8 29 4 16 X 4 8 16 X 9 6 5 X 32 4 12 X 4 8 10 X 9 6 200
250. executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on 16 20 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot turn on off the remote output RY of a remote device station Data cannot be received by the remote register RWr of a remote device station 16 21 Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link Is data read from the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default parameters being used Is the corresponding remote device station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Is the remote device station initialization procedure registration being executed Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link Check the LED displays on the corresponding remote device station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Ch
251. f occupied stations 1 Remote i Remote I O station output RY Station number 2 X00 to XOF to YOF Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 1 X00 to XOF YOO to YOF Y10 to Y1F The master station data sent to the remote input RX in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as the output information when the master station becomes faulty thus it should be transferred to another device using a sequence program In addition when the master station becomes faulty the transferred data is transferred to the remote output RY of the standby master station using a sequence program b Master station input while the master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 The remote I O station data sent to the remote output RY of the standby master station is being used by the standby master station as the input information when the standby station operates as a local station thus it does not need to be transferred to another device 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC c Standby master station output when the master stati
252. f the AJ65BT R2 shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used 1 In the AJ65BT R2 initialization default values are used for settings other than those indicated in the buffer memory section of the illustration below Master station station No 0 Personal computer Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board 1 RXA initialization normal completion mdReceive 1 RXG5 initialization abnormal completion i Remote outputs RY mdSend i RY4 initialization request Buffer memory OH transmission area head address designation 1H transmission area size designation 2H reception area head address designation 3H reception area size designation 102H word byte unit designation 111H 112H 11AH reception end data size designation reception timeout time designation alala transmission timeout time designation 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 13 5 13 5 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Writes the initial
253. following steps shown in Appendix 6 are not required Backup and restoration of CC Link board parameters Uninstallation and reinstallation of software packages App 54 App 54 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 6 3 Precautions This section provides the precautions for CC Link board replacement 1 When multiple CC Link boards are mounted on the same PC all the boards must be of the same version Example When replacing a CC Link Ver 1 board with a CC Link Ver 2 board Replace all CC Link Ver 1 boards currently mounted on the PC with CC Link Ver 2 boards 2 To re use the parameters back up them before uninstall the CC Link Utility Example When replacing a CC Link Ver 1 board with a CC Link Ver 2 board Back up the parameters of the CC Link Ver 1 board and then uninstall the CC Link Ver 1 Utility 3 Install only the software package of the same version as the CC Link board currently mounted Uninstall the software packages utility and driver which are not supported by the installed CC Link board Example When a CC Link Ver 2 board is mounted Uninstall the CC Link Ver 1 board software package and then install the CC Link Ver 2 board software package Compatibility between CC Link boards and software packages CC Link Ver 1 Board CC Link Ver 2 Board Software Package Software Package CCLinkVertboard x CCLinkVer2board x O Compatible x Not compatible 1 The following conditions are found when the
254. g complete flag RX79 13 With the initial data setting complete flag RX79 ON turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY79 16 Reads out the initial data setting complete flag 18 Reads out the remote station READY flag RX7B 14 6 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board When the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is turned ON or reset by the reset switch the initial data processing request flag RX78 is turned ON Turns ON the initial data processing complete flag RY78 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data processing request flag RX78 Turns OFF the initial data processing complete flag RY78 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 10 Turn ON the initial data setting request flag RY79 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 11 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns ON the initial data setting complete flag RX79 14 Turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY79 of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 15 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the initial data setting complete flag RX79 17 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns ON the remote station READY flag RX7B 14 6 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 4 2 Zero point return control The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and the zero point return control The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Mas
255. g so may cause malfunctions due to noise e When removing the communication cable or power supply cables from the board do not pull the cable First loosen the screws where the cable is connected to the board and then remove the cable Pulling the cable that is connected to the board may cause damage to the board and cable or malfunction due to bad cable contacts e Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed WIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed e Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws within a tightening torque range 0 66 to 0 89N m Failure to
256. g the master station 1 Set the Sta No and Type in Parameter settings Sta No 0 Type Master station Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 perational settings xi Other settings Sta No Type 0 Master station pi Transmission rate 10Mbps xi Occupied Sta Default Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode v InputforEm Sta Hold Clear Check Station information settings All connect count 3 Clear a No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic ccupied Sta 1 1 Intelligent device station i 1 station 2 2 Remote 1 0 station i ccupies 1 station 33 Remote 1 0 station ccupies 1 station _ 2 Set the Standby master station with the Other settings button Setting range 1 to 64 No standby master station specified for blank Default 0 No standby master station specified Other settings Ex Retry count om Automatic reconnection station count 1 Cancel Standby master station No 0 Default Delay information setting 0 50 micro sec m Driver WDT monitoring time Use driver WDT function zu 8r Block data assuranc
257. ges to your computer System standby or hibernate error is displayed The power save mode standby hibernate of When entering standby operating system is not supported for CC Link Ver 2 board The device driver For the PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller device is preventing the Configure the settings of the Power Options in the AN machine from entering standby Please close all applications and try again IF the x problem persists you may need to update this driver control panel to avoid the computer from activating the power save mode stand by hibernate Check the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed and the settings of the When entering hibernate gt uninterruptible power supply system UPS System Hibernation Failed X machine from entering hibernation Please close all applications and try again If the A The device driver For the PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller device is preventing the problem persists you may need to update this driver 16 2 16 2 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Error detail Cause determination method Corrective action 1 Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct and install an appropriate display driver The utility screen is not displayed properly Or update the Windows operating system The operations of utility cannot be performed T te 2 Close the other applications 3 C
258. gram CC Link Ver 2 board transmission normal complete mdReceive E RX4 transmission error complete Remote outputs RYO transmission request Buffer memory 200H transmission data size designation area 2014 to transmission data designation area 3FFH 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Writes the send data to the transmission area of the AJ65BT R2 buffer memory 2 Turn ON the transmission request signal RYO 3 Turn ON the transmission request signal RYO of the AJ65BT R2 4 The AJ65BT R2 sends data to external equipment and if the transmission is normal it turns ON the 5 Reads out the transmission normal complete transmission normal complete signal RXO signal and the transmission error If an error is identified in the transmission the AJ65BT complete signal RX1 R2 turns ON the transmission error complete signal 6 Turns OFF the transmission request signal 7 Turns OFF the transmission request signal RYO of the AJ65BT R2 8 The AJ65BT R2 turns OFF the transmission normal complete signal RXO or transmission error complete signal RX1 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 4 3 D
259. gs Target settings Memory 140 test Test Channel No Channel No 81 vj Logical Sta No 65 Sta No 5 E Target CPU PLC No 4 CC Link Sta No Target CPU Change 5 PLC No 4 Delete Target setting list Logical Sta No 65 Use a RJ61BT11 LJ61BT11 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT QJ61BT11 N of functional version B or later in order to access a multiple CPU system A QJ61BT11 N of functional version A cannot be used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 6 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting The points of each remote I O station can be set to 8 16 or 32 points Therefore only the points used for I O need to be allocated for the remote devices in the CC Link system and unused points can be reduced It is effective for saving device points The remote I O station points setting can be used in the remote net ver 2 mode only Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Personal Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 computer p Master Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Program Remote output RY i M Station Station i i 0 1 number 21 number 1 1 1 1 mdSend i Seen Mayers JE Staton 1 MES number 4
260. gs for the initial setting and analog outputs controls the system The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Default values are used for the initial settings except the analog output Master station station No 0 Personal computer enable disable setting User program mdReceive mdSend mdSend mdSend Remote inputs RX 2 8 8 RX18 14 18 RX19 48 RX1B Remote outputs RY 19 L 3 RYOO 5 9 AS RY18 11 15 t RY19 Remote registers i RWw 19 L 3 3 H 11 5 Remote device station station No 1 X18 initial data processing request flag X19 initial data setting completion flag X1B remote READY Y00 CH1 analogue output enable flag Y18 initial data processing completion flag Y19 initial data setting request flag RWwO CH1 digital value setting area RWw 8 analogue output enable disable setting area 11 5 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION User Program 2 Reads out the initial data processing request flag RX18 3 With the initial data processing request flag RX18 gt ON writes data to the analog output enable disable setting area RWw8 5 Turns ON the initial data processing completion flag RY18 8 Reads
261. hange desktop background Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods 7 Hardware and Sound ices and printers Change display lenguage 22 Programs 1 eorrx CEST JO GEE n 2 Select Administrative Tools Control Pane System and Security Network and Internet T Hardware and Sound Allow a program through W Programs E User Accounts and Family Safety Appearance and Personalization amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Allowremcteaccess See the name of this computer Bj Device Manager Windows Update Ad Tum automatic updating on Checkfor updates 1 installed updates P Power Options sleeps Mp Backup and Res DP Bact up your compu Clock Language and Region Ease of Access Restore files from backup ption yoting data on your disk Manage BitLocker ntyourherd drive Create and format hard disk partitions Schedule tasks 1 eS SE 3 Double click Services umm me Date modifed Type FE Desitop di Component Services Shortcut J Downloads d Computer Management Shortcut E Recent Places By Data Sources 0080 Shortcut E Event Viewer Short Si libraries 8 iscsthitator Shortcut 2 Documents Local Security Policy Shortcut d Music 4 Pestormance Monitor Shortcut E Pictures ment 11 18 2
262. hange the Hardware accelerator setting of the display setting Measures for Slow Personal Computer Operation Response of mouse or keyboard is slow APP Refer to Section 16 6 Operating speed of another application is slow CPU utilization of personal computer is high 1 If only one user account with administrator authority is available the User Account Control screen requests the password entry of its user only 2 For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Appendix 15 3 Problem for a board and driver 1 Install the board 2 Check if the board is recognized normally on the Device Manager screen refer to section 16 3 3 he driver does not start 3 When the board is recognized normally on the Device Manager screen check if an error has been occurred on the Event Viewer screen Refer to Section 16 3 2 ea Board WDT error has occurred Refer to Section 16 4 1 Ea Driver WDT error has occurred Refer to Section 16 4 2 RUN LED has been flashing Refer to Section 16 4 3 4 Problem for network access Error detail Cause determination method Corrective action The data link cannot be performed normally as CC Link Refer to Section 16 5 1 system ERR LED of the master station has been flashing Refer to Section 16 5 2 CPU modules other than QCPU Q mode cannot CPU modules other than QCPU cannot be accessed be accessed to the 64 bit version of user application Use 32 bit v
263. he external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board and wiring Not doing so may cause damage to the product When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring always attach the computer s main cover Failure to do so may cause an electric shock When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached e Always ground the SLD terminal of the board and the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Not doing so can cause a malfunction e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the board resulting in short circuits or malfunction e Prevent foreign matter such as swarf or wire chips from being attached onto the board Failure to do so may cause fires failure or malfunction e Be sure to fix the wires or cables connected to the board by placing them in a duct or clamping them If not fixed cables may be dangled and accidentally pulled causing damage to the board and cables and malfunction due to bad cable contacts e Do not install the control lines together with the communication cables or bring them close to each other Doin
264. he personal computer increases and the operation of the personal computer becomes slow The link refresh cycle is short There are many remote station points of the whole network The processing capacity of a personal computer is low 2 Corrective measures The following shows the measures when the operation of a personal computer becomes slow e Extend the link refresh cycle at Parameter settings Other settings screen in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Disable the block data assurance per station Decrease the remote station points on the master station s parameter settings Decrease the number of boards to be installed on the personal computer Increase the processing capacity of the personal computer If any of the above corrective actions do not help refer to Section 16 7 16 30 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 7 Information Required for Inquiries When the troubleshooting cannot solve the problem or a board failure occurs please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Inform the following conditions and situations when inquiring the problems 1 Product information 2 16 31 a b Product version Inform the model name and version of the board and utility Personal computer Inform the following descriptions Name of the personal computer manufacturer CPU Memory size Operating system c Other option board Inform the following desc
265. he product is immersed in the EN61000 4 8 Power frequency magnetic field immunity coil EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips and interruption Power voltage is momentarily interrupted immunity An electrostatic discharge is applied to the enclosure of the Burst noise is applied to power lines and signal lines Lightning surge is applied to power lines and signal lines magnetic field of an induction 8kV Air discharge 4kV Contact discharge 80 AM modulation 1kHz 80 to 1000MHz 10V m 1 4 to 2 0GHz 3V m 2 0 to 2 7GHz 1V m AC DC power I O power and AC I O unshielded lines 2kV DC I O analog and communication lines 1kV AC power AC I O power and AC I O unshielded lines 2kV CM 1kV DM DC power and DC I O power lines 0 5kV CM 0 5kV DM DC I O AC I O shielded analog and communication lines 1kV CM 0 15 to 80MHz 80 AM modulation 1kHz 10Vrms 50 60Hz 30A m 0 0 5 period starting at zerocrossing 0 250 300 period 50 60Hz 40 10 12 period 50 60Hz 7096 25 30 period 50 60Hz 1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel App 87 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Installing devices in the control panel Installing devices in the control panel has a considerable effect not only securing safety but also shielding the noise generated from the personal computer in the control panel x Also each network remote station needs to be
266. he remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of each of the remote device stations is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the remote register RWr data of the remote device stations stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory Remote device station Remote device station No Uu NERIS Master station Station number 1 Station number 3 i CC Link Ver 2 board occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations qummmmmmIIIMLlI1 lTI M mL44 eaten eee eee eee eee ered Remote register RWr Numerical data such as set value check codes Program Remote register RWr Numerical data Such as set value check codes i mdReceive Remote register RWr when the AJ65BT 64DAV is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT 64DAV Master module Not used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations The following explains an overview of the communication between the master station and the local stations 1 Communication between the master station and the local stations by cyclic transmission The data communication between programmable controller CPUs and personal computers can be performed in n n mode using the remote input RX and remote output RY bit information used in local sta
267. he word information set with automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of a local station However it can only be stored in the area corresponding to the station number of the own station 13 The information in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote register RWr of the master station and the remote register RWw of another local station 14 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the word information stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 15 The word information stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Personal computer Master station _ Station number 1 Station number 2 CC Link Ver 2 board i occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU 14 4 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Communication between the master station and the local station by transient transmission The transient transmission is a transmission method that sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by designating the opposite station at an arbitrary timing When writing data to the buffer memory of the local station and the CPU device using the mdSend function 1 The program uses the mdSend function to write data from the master station to the designated
268. hen the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of words indicated below is used a Master station RWw gt remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote 2 Master station Address 44001 44011 44024 44034 44041 44054 4406n 4407n 4408n 4409n 440 440Bu 440C 440D 440 440 4410 4411 4412 4413 M to 4BFC 4BFD ABFEn ABFFu Remote register RWw device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count refer to Section 3 2 Remote device station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic setting single Local station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Remote register RWr to Address 4 00 4 02 4 03 4C04u 4 05 4C06n 4 07 4 0
269. hen the standby master function is used The following shows a program example when the standby master function is used void Change StanbyMaster short Counter General counter short StNo Station number unsigned short DevType II Device type short DevNo Device number short Size 11 Sending data size short RecvBuf 10 1 Buffer for receiving unsigned short ret Return value on SB1 switching request StNo OxFF Set the station number DevType 5 Set the device type SB equivalent to special M DevNo 0x1 Set the device number mdDevSet path StNo DevType DevNo if ret 0 printf SBI ON processing failed error code x n ret printf Press any key n getch mdcClose path exit 0 for Counter 0 Counter lt 100 Counter 11 Confirm completion of switching Read SB equivalent to special SM 43 Size 2 1 Set the size of sending data StNo OxFF Set the station number DevType 5 11 Set the device type SB equivalent to special M DevNo 0x20 Set the device number ret mdReceive path StNo DevType DevNo amp Size amp RecvBuf 0 if ret 0 printf mdReceive SB43 read processing failed error code xYn ret printf Press any key n getch mdClose path exit 0 if RecvBuf 0 amp 0x0800 0 II Exit from the loop if SB43 is on break Sleep 100 II Wait for 100ms 11 Confirm the time out if Counter gt 100 printf SB43 ON co
270. ibute definition or transient the target station does not support transient transmission Attribute definition error Specification error of the transmission was executed although B804 station not supported transit transmission B805 Number of data error B80D Setting range error The number of data is out of rage The combination of the set address and number of points exceeded the valid processing range MELSEC Detectability Master Local station station Corrective action Check if the target station is an intelligent device station Check the requested module and cables Set the target station in the intelligent mode Access code setting An access code attribute that does not Set the correct access code error exist was set attribute Use the correct access code Set the number of data points to a value in the range from 1 to 960 bytes Review the attribute definition Review the specified content of the target station number Or check the function version and Software version of the target local station Set the number of data to a value in the range from 1 to 100 when writing and 1 to 160 when reading B807 Address demnitiam arr The address was not a multiple of 16 Set the address to a multiple of when a bit device was accessed 16 when accessing a bit device 2 Set so that the number of processing points does not exceed the device range B814 File register capac
271. ical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print date Jun 2005 SH NA 080527ENG A First Printing Nov 2005 Jun 2006 Mar 2007 Oct 2007 aa Jan 2008 SH NA 080527ENG B SH NA 080527ENG C SH NA 080527ENG D SH NA 080527ENG E SH NA 080527ENG F Correction Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 3 Chapter 9 Section 17 1 1 Correction Section 2 2 4 Section 3 2 Section 8 6 Section 17 2 1 Correction Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 2 1 Section 8 4 1 S
272. icated using the remote register RWw and remote register RWr Personal computer Master station Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Network parameters Program Buffer memory Remote input 3 2 RX Remote input Handshaking signals mdReceive lt Read Bx lt Link scan such as initial data processing request and positioning complete Remote input 5 RY Remote output ksn Handshaking signals RY such as initial data processing complete and positioning start 4 Remote register 6 RWw Write Remote register Numeric data such L Wee 7 RWw as positioning start number and speed change value Remote register 9 8 RWr Read Remote register Link scan Numeric data such RWr as present feed value and send speed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Data link startup 1 When the personal computer is powered on the CC Link system automatically starts up in accordance with the network parameters set by the CC Link Ver 2 utility Remote input 2 The remote input RX of the intelligent device station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station 3 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 st
273. ice 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Quadruple station station station station station 64 points 64 points 192 points 320 points 448 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Octuple station station station station station 128 points 128 points 384 points 640 points 896 points No setting 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 2 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 1 Mode This section explains the parameter settings using the CC Link Ver 2 utility 6 2 1 Master station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 Station number 4 Station number 8 Station Station number 1 number 3 Local station Remote I O QJ61BT11 Remote I O station occupies station occupies 4 stations occupies 1 station 1 station Master station Q80BD J61BT11N Ver 1 compatible remote device station occupies 2 stations Stano o 0 Occupied Sta Occupies 1 station Operational settings 250 x 8 ms lLinkrefreshoycle settings Station information setting items Setting item Setting value No Sta No Remote device gt Intelligent device Station type Remote station Remote station Expanded cyclic Occupied St
274. igent device station The following formula indicates the time taken from instruction execution at the master station CC Link Ver 2 board to receive processing result from the intelligent device station Formula Maximum value 1 Read OT LS X BC Read points 16 16 1 1 067 ms OT Data transmission time between the personal computer and the CC Link Ver 2 board The processing time varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following table shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with a Pentium II 233MHz Taam AGREES Pos e12 oyes 1024 be Balch read mdRecelve Batch write mdSend 0 4ms 0 5ms 0 6ms LS Link scan time Refer to Appendix 3 1 BC Constant a ee s x1 Round up decimals 2 Write OT LS X BC Write points 16 72 1 X 1 13 ms OT Data transmission time between the personal computer and the CC Link Ver 2 board The processing time varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following table shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with a Pentium II 233MHz Taam SF ones S12 bres 1024 be Balch read mdRecove Batch write mdSend LS Link scan time Refer to Appendix 3 1 BC Constant e cop ue o us x1 Round up decimals When performing a transient transmission using the md functions the t
275. ill choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware For 64 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used lt Back JL Net Example D Drivers x64 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 i End If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 16 7 If Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected under Control Panel System Hardware Driver Signing the driver may not be installed Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action and install the driver 16 11 16 11 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 3 Troubleshooting When Personal Computer cannot be Startup or System Down Occurred When the personal computer on which the board is installed is not started or the system shut down or system reset is occurred check the items following the procedure shown below 1 Uninstall the board and check if the personal computer is started Checking personal computer and operating system Refer to Section 1
276. ine OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master station to master station is complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been acknowledged OFF Not acknowledged ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure OFF Not executed ON Being executed Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure execution OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates the mode setting status of the host OFF Online ON Other than online Indicates the station type of the host OFF Master station station number 0 ON Local station station numbers 1 to 64 Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for the host OFF No setting ON Setting exists 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only App 19 App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC PRENNE Number Name Description Online eel Master Local Offline 580065 5E6x b5 580066 5 6 66 80067 5E6x b7 SB006A 5E6x b10 580060 BE64 b13 SBOO6E 5E6x b14 580070 E74 60 80071 E74 b1 SB0072 E74 b2 80073 E74 b3 SB0074 E74 b4 SB0075 E74 b5
277. ine filter Noise filter is effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10MHz or less frequency Use of a noise filter can suppress noise The installation precautions are described below e Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter If bundled the output side noise will be induced into the filtered cable on the input side Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction Filter Output side device side Output side device side Noise will be induced when the input Separately install the input and and output cables are bundled output cables e Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control panel using as short wiring as possible approximately 10cm Appendix 18 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive The CC Link Ver 2 board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000V AC and 75 to 1500V DC App 91 App 91 APPENDIX Appendix 19 External Dimensions Appendix 19 1 Q80BD J61BT11N 153 6 02 147 5 79 m un e MELSEC Co 158 6 22 141 5 55 121 4 76 App 92 af zm m 2 OO sOO Geo 00
278. ing Station information settings 15 All connect count 1 Modules Table 12 2 Station Information Setting Check List Kis No Station Noe Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word cyclic Sta station points station select 16 1 Intelligent device station Pr dad 128 points No setting JF 01 p LJ j 1 For the local station select an intelligent device station 12 3 12 3 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 1 3 Setting the local station The following shows the local station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section For the setting refer to Section 12 1 2 1 2 Parameter settings The following shows the local station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Other settings 1 Channel No Channel No 81 x Operational settings Retry count 3c 2 5ta No Type 1 5 Local station F
279. ing the data link Turn ON the remote device stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and remote device stations under normal data link condition a Checking the master station How to check the master station is the same as in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 11 1 5 1 a b Checking remote device stations How to check the remote device stations is the same as in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 11 1 5 1 b For the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN check the identical location as the LEDs on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 11 15 11 15 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 2 Confirming the operation with a user program With the user program check whether digital values are being output to remote device stations through normal data link Use of the sample program allows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual On the sample program setting a digital value of 300 enables analog voltages to be output from remote device stations Analogue output of the AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN CH1 Digital output value Digital value 300 Master station b Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD
280. ings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 for setting details 1 Precautions for remote I O station points setting Set the points not less than I O points of the actually installed remote I O station with the parameter Otherwise the I O operations corresponding to the exceeded points will not function normally 4 44 4 44 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 7 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode This function increases the number of cyclic points in the CC Link system When increasing the number of cyclic points select one from the following two modes e Remote net ver 2 mode Mode used for configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Mode used for incorporating an additional Ver 2 compatible slave station into the existing Ver 1 system The number of cyclic points per station can be increased as indicated in the following table Table 4 7 single double quadruple octuple Remote I O RX RY 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Remote register RWw RWr 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points Remote I O RX 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points Occupies 2 stations OH DEDE Semen Remote register RWw RWr 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points Remote RX 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Remote register RWw RWr 12 poi
281. input RX Address Station Station number 74420 _RY F to RYO __xoF_to xo H H RXF to RKO 4000 J ber 1 RX1FDF to RX1FDO 41FD RX1FEF to RX1FEO 41 43FE 4 RYTFEF to RY1FEO 4 RY1FFF to RY1FFO 42014 RY 4F to RY 10 Cd og RX4F to RX10 4001s 4202 RY 2F to RY 20 E ME RX 2F to RX20 4002 42034 RY 3F to RY 30 i to RX30 4003 i 4204n RY 4F to RY 40 ME MEE RX4F to RX40 4004 42051 RY 5F to RY 50 ME ME RX 5F to RX50 4005 4206 RY 6F to RY 60 i RX6F to RX60 40064 Station 4207 to RY7O mE RX 7F to RX70 4007 Station number 2 4208 RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX80 4008 number 2 42091 RY 9F to RY 90 EO RX9F to RX90 4009 420An RY AF to RY AO MEE ME RX AF to RX AO 400A 420B RY BF to RY BO MEE RX BF to RXBO 400B 420 RYCF to RY CO r oq i RX CF to RXCO 400 4200 to RY DO MEE D oH RX DF to RXDO 400D 42E RYED to RYEO te RxEo 400E to to to to RY1FCF to RY1FCO d EE RX1FCF to RX1FCO 41FC 43FDa RYTFDF to RY1FDO MEE RX4FDF to RX1FDO RX1FFF to RX1FFO 41FFu App 14 App 14 APPENDIX Example Station number 1 Station number 2 App 15 9 Ver 2 compatible remote registers RWw and RWr W
282. installed inside the control panel However the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel a Control panel e Use a conductive control panel e Mask off the area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate to the control panel using bolts To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and the control panel mask off the bolt installation areas of an inner plate so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest possible area e Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies e Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less If the diameter is larger than 10cm electromagnetic wave may be emitted In addition because electromagnetic wave leaks through a clearance between the control panel and its door reduce the clearance as much as possible Use of EMI gaskets sealing the clearance can suppress undesired radiated emissions The tests by Mitsubishi were conducted using a control panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB maximum and 30dB average measured at 3m distance 30 to 300MHz b Wiring power and ground cables The power supply cable and ground cable for a personal computer should be laid out as follows e Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module Ground the FG terminal of the personal computer and the SLD terminal of the CC Link Ver 2 board to
283. installed software package is not compatible with the CC Link board currently mounted Conditions parameter error occurs when the CC Link system is started up The information of the CC Link Ver 2 board is displayed on the CC Link Ver 1 Utility parameter read error occurs when the CC Link Ver 1 Utility is started up The CC Link Ver 1 Utility does not run correctly An error such as a display error or an application error occurs The message An attempt to link a device name has failed is displayed in the event viewer App 55 App 55 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 7 About Parameter backup restore tool This section describes the Parameter backup restore tool that is used for re using existing parameters The Parameter backup restore tool is a dedicated tool for backing up and restoring CC Link board parameters and is stored in the SW1DNC CCBD2 B CD ROM Backup Stores parameters of the CC Link board that is currently mounted to the PC into files Restore Reads the backed up parameters and stores them into a CC Link board By using this dedicated tool the user can re use existing parameters without being aware of the version of the CC Link board Appendix 7 1 Operation procedure The following explains the operations of Parameter backup restore tool Appendix 7 1 1 Starting and exiting the tool 1 Starting the tool The following describes how to start Parameter backup restore tool
284. ion Master occupying occupying station Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station Remote station Remote station occupyin occupying occupying B sta ione 1 station 2 stations 6 Auto return function When a module that has been disconnected from the link due to power off recovers and returns to the normal status it will join the data link automatically 7 Input data status setting from a data link faulty station The data entered received from a data link faulty station can be cleared or the status immediately before the error can be restored 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 8 Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station backup station for the master station if a malfunction occurs in the master station The personal computer can be set as a standby master station only when the master station is also a personal computer If the master station is a programmable controller CPU the personal computer cannot be set as a standby master station Data link control Standby master station by the master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote I O station Bata Station number 2 Station number 3 ala ink contro Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby in progress N Cyclic communication Cyclic comm
285. ion of this manual 1 2 6 7 8 9 To learn about the features of the CC Link Ver 2 board Chapter 1 The features are described in Chapter 1 To learn about the system configuration Chapter 2 The system configuration using the CC Link Ver 2 board is described in Chapter 2 To learn about specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board Chapter 3 The specifications of the CC Link Ver 2 board are described in Chapter 3 To learn about the functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board Chapter 4 The functions of the CC Link Ver 2 board are described in Chapter 4 To learn about the settings and procedures up to operation of CC Link Ver 2 board Chapter 5 The settings and procedures up to operation of the CC Link Ver 2 board is described in Chapter 5 To learn about how to set parameters Chapter 6 How to set parameters is described in Chapter 6 To learn about how to install and uninstall utility software Chapter 7 How to install and uninstall utility software is described in Chapter 7 To learn about the utility software operating procedures Chapter 8 The utility software operating procedures are described in Chapter 8 To learn about MELSEC data link library Chapter 9 The overview of MELSEC data link library is described in Chapter 9 10 To learn about how to communicate with each station Chapters 10 to 14 Some examples of communication between the master board and each station are described i
286. ischarge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board While handling the board be sure to keep it free of static electricity Static electric charges may damage the board or result in malfunction Be careful not to let foreign objects such as swarf or wire chips get inside the personal computer They may cause fires failure or malfunction Do not drop the board and the terminal block or subject it to any excessive shock It may damage the board and the terminal block or result in malfunction Do not disassemble or modify board Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste 5 3 2 Installation environment Refer to the instruction manual provided with the personal computer for information on how to install the personal computer in which the CC Link Ver 2 board has been mounted NCAUTION e Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this user s manual Using this board in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e Always ground the SLD terminal of the board and the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Not doing so can cause a malfunction 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5
287. ite data from the master station to the designated buffer memory of the intelligent device station 2 When writing is completed 0 is stored as a return value Personal computer Master station Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board 1st station Program 1 mdSend Buffer memory 2 Return value When reading data from the buffer memory of the intelligent device station using the mdReceive function 1 The program uses the mdReceive function to read data from the designated buffer memory of the intelligent device station to the variables of the program in the master station 2 When reading is completed 0 is stored as a return value Personal computer Master station Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board 1st station Program mdReceive Buffer memory Value return value 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability This section explains how to use the functions for improving the reliability of the CC Link system 4 3 1 Disconnecting a data link faulty station and continuing the data link with only normal stations slave station disconnect function This function disconnects any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station if it has become data link faulty due to power off or other cause and continues the data link among normal r
288. ity The file register capacity was not set Set the file register capacity setting error B815 Module mode setting error B901 EPROM error Data link startup error B902 with E PPROM parameters B903 Transient request error B904 Communication buffer Size setting error B905 Transient data length error 19 Corresponding station error 15 5 A transient transmission was executed even though the target station was set in the I O mode When parameter registration request YnA to E7PROM was executed the E PROM was faulty or the write limit 10 000 times was exceeded A data link startup request Yn8 using an E PROM parameter was executed even though the parameter has not been registered in the EPPROM A transient request was issued to a station that has not allocated a communication buffer area The communication buffer size of the corresponding station was out of range when a dedicated instruction was executed The transient data was longer than the communication buffer size of the corresponding station when a dedicated instruction was executed The corresponding station that is being tested stopped communication during line test Change it to the intelligent mode Replace the module Register the parameter to E PROM with a parameter registration request YnA Allocate a communication buffer area with a parameter Set the communication buffer size of the corresponding station within the range
289. iver WDT Monitoring Time No setting x 8 ms Block dat s ata assurance per Disable Enable station Link refresh cycle No setting ms Station information i All connect count Modules settings App 62 App 62 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 8 2 Station information setting checklist Station information setting checklist UR Station type Expanded Occupied Sta Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word NS cyclic points station select App 63 App 63 APPENDIX MELSEC i i i Intelligent buffer select word buffer select word Sta No Station type Expanded Occupied Sta Remote station Reserve invalid cyclic points station select Send Receive Automatic App 64 App 64 APPENDIX Appendix 8 3 Device assignment checklist Device assignment checklist MELSEC RY60 to RY7F gt RWwC to RWwF gt RX80 to RX9F RY80 to RY9F RWw10 to RWw13 6 RXA0 to RXBF gt RYAO to RYBF RWw14 to RWw17 gt RXCO to RXDF gt RYCO to RYDF RWw18 to RWw1B gt RXEO to RXFF gt RYEO to RYFF RWw1C to RWw1F gt RX60 to RX7F Rxt00to RX11F gt 10 RX120 to RX13F gt 11 RX140 to RX15F gt o RX17F gt 13 Rx180 to RX19F gt RX1A0 to RXIBF gt 15 _ RX1C0 to RX1DF gt 16 RX1E0 to RXtFF 17 RX200 to RX21F gt 18 _ RX220 to RX23F gt 19 RX240 to RX25F gt RX260 to RX27F gt 21 Rx280 to RX29F gt 22 _ RX2A0 to RX2BF gt 23 R
290. k control when the link to the master station is disconnected due to a programmable controller CPU Master board or power supply problem Local station A station that has a CPU and can communication with the master station and local station Remote station A remote station that can only handle bit information AJ65BTBO O0 AJ65BTCO O0 Remote device station Remote station that can use bit data and word data Performs input and output with external devices and analog data conversion AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI Remote station Generic term for the remote I O station and remote device station Intelligent device station A slave station such as the AJ65BT R2 in the CC Link system that can perform transient transmission Slave station Generic term for remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Ver 1 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 2 mode Master and local modules Generic term for the AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 LJ61BT11 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT and RJ61BT11 Master module Generic term for the Master and local modules when they are used as master stations Local module Generic term for the Master and local modules when they are used a
291. k the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers 16 23 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot communicate from a local station remote register RWw to the master station remote register RWr The local station does not operate with the specified number of occupied stations Cannot stop data link Cannot restart data link The remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station does not start up The local station or standby master station does not start up and the ERR LED turns on Faulty stations cannot be detected Faulty stations are generated depending on the transmission rate 16 24 Is the corresponding local station performing data link Is data written to the correct address of the remote register RWw buffer memory of the local station Is data read from the correct address of the remote register RWr buffer memory of the master s
292. king personal computer and operating system ssse 16 12 16 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer screen sssssssssssseseeneeeeneeenneennee nennen nnne nennen nnne 16 14 16 3 3 Checking on Device Manager screen ssssssssseeneeeennneenenneennee nennen nnne 16 16 16 4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver eene rennen 16 17 16 4 1 Board WDT error onn etie e I Hee e ce e T iue dea Ede ue di 16 17 16 4 2 Driver WDT erfor iere t ed ee ee 16 17 16 4 3 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is flashing 16 18 16 5 CC Link System Troubleshooting seen nre 16 19 16 5 1 Verification of problem occurrence ssssssssssssssssseeeeee nennen nennen 16 19 16 5 2 Troubleshooting flow when the ERR LED on the master station is flashing 16 26 16 6 Measures for Slow Personal Computer Operation 16 30 16 7 Information Required for Inquiries nennen 16 31 Appendix 1 Buffer memory details App 1 Appendix 2 Link special relays SB and link special registers 5 App 17 Appendix 2 1 List of link special relays SBs ssssssssssssssssseeeeeenenneeneee nennen App 17 Appendix 2 2 List of link special registers SWS c cccescceeeee
293. l increase and the shield will be ineffective Shielded cable Wire Y Crimp terminal App 89 App 89 APPENDIX MELSEC b CC Link dedicated cable e Always ground the CC Link dedicated cable connected to the CC Link System master station local station and remote station Since the CC Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable remove a part of the outer sheath Then ground the exposed part of the shield indicated in the figure below using as wide a surface area as possible Bm Control panel _CC Link dedicated All of this area should be grounded bl Mn wmm Always use the designated cable for Shield this cable Remote station Remote station Local station Control panel Furthermore the grounding should be made within 30 cm 11 81 in of the CC Link Ver 2 board terminal area and at the position closest to the exit of the control panel e Always use the specified CC Link dedicated cable e Do not use a ferrite core for the CC Link dedicated cable coming from each module and the CC Link Ver 2 board e Ground the SLD terminal of the CC Link Ver 2 board Ground the FG terminal of each module Master board Remote module Local module Terminal resister Terminal resister CC Link CC Link dedicated cable dedicated cable App 90 App 90 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 Noise filter power supply l
294. l No setting nennen nennen 13 2 13 2 2 Parameter settings ees de nde A 13 3 13 3 Setting up the intelligent device station sssseeeneeenenneneneem emnes 13 4 19 4 Creating Program 3 5 0 0x Jeudi endi hh deci E 13 5 13 4 1 Initialization of the AJ65BT R2 ssssssssssseeseeeeeeeeneen nennen nnne nennen nennen nnns 13 5 13 4 2 Data transmission nennen a n iea nnne inneren nnne nennen 13 7 13 4 3 iio tette ba tetur det EE 13 8 13 5 Executing the Data Link ri eere c re C te o eL e t e E P e te e 13 9 13 5 1 Checking the data link StatuS n eene he rte Eee e te deo de de e de 13 9 13 5 2 Confirming the operation with a user program sesseeeeneeee 13 11 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 14 1to 14 16 14 1 Configuring System iiec tede a evi oed eed de va e a o e ea e es 14 1 14 2 Setting the Master Station ssssssssssssseeeenennennenneennennnen rennen trennen enne nnns 14 2 14 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting nennen 14 2 14 2 2 Parameter settings cecccecccecceecccecceecceesceecenscencensccescenseesceneeessensaessseneeesaesneeseeenteeenateeeeneeties 14 3 14 3 Setting up the intelligent device station 5 075 2 53
295. l the operating system after formatting HD computer Repair or replace the personal computer For the problem of the personal computer or operating system contact the personal computer or operating system manufacturer 16 12 16 12 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 1 Precautions for installing other optional board Executing user program including the device monitor utility for each board simultaneously under the following condition may cause an error When an error occurs in the user program take the action shown below Condition A personal computer into which the CC Link Ver 2 board and other optional board are installed and where the resources were allocated automatically by Plug and Play is used Action Change the positions where the CC Link Ver 2 board and other optional board are installed In the BIOS setup exchange the IRQs between the CC Link Ver 2 board and other optional board or change their IRQs 16 13 16 13 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer screen Event logs related to the CC Link Ver 2 board are displayed as Mccbd2 in the Source field on the Event Viewer screen The following table shows the error messages that are displayed in event viewer Event ID Error message Corrective action HEX 9 256 Because the error had occurred the during starting of the Reinstall the software package If the error persists reinstall 1004 device the device was n
296. lability Item Description Master Local Reference ipti e aster Loca Hexadecimal Decimal possibility station station 0000 Use prohibited 1 OODFx For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local telligent d standb Remote input RX intelligent device standby Read is master stations For the local station Stores the peers status peers the master station For the master station Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent mS 1 Write only device standby master stations Remote output RY 2 For the local station Stores the output status to the master station Also stores the receive Read write data from the remote other enabled local intelligent device standby master stations O Available Not available x1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors 2 Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Availability Description Readius Master Local Reference ipti o5 aster Loca Hexadecimal Decimal P possibility station station For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local intelligent device standby Remote register master stations RWw 2 For the local station Stores the send data to Master station master other local Appendix 1 intelligent device standby For sending 2 master stati
297. lare conformity to the EMC Directive 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below All test items were tested by installing each device on a personal computer bearing a CE certification logo a Emission requirements Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61131 2 2007 App 86 CISPR16 2 3 Radiated emission CISPR16 2 1 The noise level which the CISPR16 1 2 product emits to the power line Conducted emission is measured 30 to 230MHz QP 40dBuV m measured at 10m distance 230 to 1000MHz QP 47dByuV m The electromagnetic wave which the product emits to the external space is measured measured at 10m distance 0 15 to 0 5MHz QP 79dB Mean 66dB 0 5 to 30MHz 73dB Mean 60dB 1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Mean value App 86 APPENDIX b Immunity requirements MELSEC Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61131 2 2007 App 87 EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge immunity equipment EN61000 4 3 Radiated radio frequency An electric field is radiated to the n product electromagnetic field immunity EN61000 4 4 Fast transient burst immunity EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity EN61000 4 6 High frequency noise is applied Conducted RF immunity to power lines and signal lines T
298. le compatible Cyclic transmission enabled X Cyclic transmission disabled Prohibited 1 The additional mode is not supported 4 52 4 52 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC The following table indicates whether send receive of transient data is enabled or not Intelligent device station 1 Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Send station mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode eea a Master station Additional mode Receive station Master station Local station Ver 1 mode 5 1 Local station Additional mode E eee Intelligent device station E E Transient transmission enabled X Transient transmission disabled Prohibited 4 Mismatch between parameter settings and points for the stations actually mounted If the extended cyclic parameter setting on the master station is not consistent with the link points for each station that is actually connected an error code is stored into SW0069 of the Q80BD J61T11N at the master station Also consistency status of each station is stored into SWOO9C When an error code is stored into SWO0069 reexamine the parameter settings POINT For details of link special register refer to Appendix 2 2 5 Precautions for modes between the master and local standby master stations At any of the following settings an error error code will occur at the local station standby master station The mode set a
299. leep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Invalidating the fast startup settings Appendix 17 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically when the software package is installed to a personal computer The operation starts after the personal computer is restarted Appendix 17 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is uninstalled automatically when the software package is uninstalled However it is not uninstalled when another software package of MELSEC interface board is installed to the personal computer Uninstall all software packages for MELSEC interface board installed on the personal computer to uninstall MELSECPowerManager App 83 App 83 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 17 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager The following explains how to check the installation and operating status of MELSECPowerManager The following is a setting example when using Windows 7 E 1 Open Control Panel System and Security 53 gt Control Panel gt aS Adjust your computer s settings View by Category System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any us Review your computers status Backup your computer Find and fs problems GW View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Appearance and Personalizatior Change the theme C
300. licies Account Policies Password and account lockout policies gt Local Policies Local Pol Auditing user rights and security options polici Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec Windows Firewall with Adv Windows Firewall with Advanced Securi gt Public Key Policies i I Software Restriction Policies Pubsc Key Pokcies i b IP Security Policies on Local Compute Software Restriction Policies gt Security Policies on Local Internet Protocol Security Psec Administratio L Se ES 6 Select Security Options Ele Action View B Security Settings Name E Description EE Audit Policy Audit Policy Frewall with Advanced Sec AUser Rights Assignment _ UserRights Assignment 1 Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec T Public Key Policies gt 29 Software Restriction Policies b amp IP Security Policies on Local Compute J To next page App 79 App 79 APPENDIX File Action View Help 9 B Security Settings Account Policies 4 T Local Policies Audit Policy User Rights Assigr Security Options Windows Firewall wit Public Key Policies F Software Restriction F 8 P Security Policies or From preceding page L Policy Network security LDAP client signing requirements Network security Minimum
301. lid station setting function Hardware Test function Automatic return function o F Slave station cut off function o RAS function Temporary error invalid station setting function Slave station refresh forced clear setting function for programmable Ex UP CPU STOP Automatic CC Link JAutomaticCC Link startup Improved Eventissuefunction EK usability Multiple CPU system support o Remote VO station points seting TO Opoint setting tothe reserved station o Supported Not supported x1 This function is newly provided to the CC Link Ver 2 board in addition to the CC Link Ver 1 board functions 2 Separation is a condition that link data with double words 32 bits such as the current value of the positioning module are separated to new data and old data in units of one word 16 bits due to the refresh timing of cyclic transmission App 52 App 52 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 6 Replacing the CC Link Board This appendix describes the CC Link board replacement procedure and precautions Appendix 6 1 Replacing a CC Link Ver 1 board with a CC Link Ver 2 board This section describes how to replace the CC Link Ver 1 board currently mounted to the PC with a CC Link Ver 2 board and precautions to be observed l Back up the parameters Activate the Parameter backup restoration tool and back up the Appendix 7 1 2 Backing up parameters current param
302. line SWO090 Stores the line status 690 Line status 0 Normal 1 Data link cannot be performed disconnected Indicates the occurrence status of a transient transmission error SW0094 0 No transient transmission error 694v 1 Transient transmission error occurrence SW0095 b15 b14 b13 to b3 Transient 6951 transmission SW0096 status SW0095 6961 SW0096 SW0097 SW0097 697 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each swo098 module is not overlapped 698 0 Normal 1 Overlap station number first station number only b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 SWO0099 699v Station number SW009A overlap status 69 SW009B 69 SWO009B 6 510098 510099 SWO009A Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the parameter settings A matching error occurs in any of the following cases 1 Station type mismatch 2 Number of occupied stations mismatch 3 Expanded cyclic setting mismatch 4 CC Link compatible version mismatch A matching error will not occur when installation lt parameter For example a matching error will not occur when a remote device station is installed and the parameter setting is an SWOO09C intelligent device station 69Cu 0 Normal SWO00
303. lity This section explains how to operate the CC Link Ver 2 Utility 8 2 1 Screen configuration and basic operations The following explains the screen configuration displayed at starting the CC Link Ver 2 utility CC Link Ver 2 utility 1 Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Slot Channel No 81 LED information Sta No 1 Local station Ver 1 mode Link scan time ms _ RUN ERR ERR m Data link status Waiting for receiving parameters Error status Normal Details Device Monitor Load file Save file Manual xi New Boa intoitation Displays the various information station No transmission rate data SEHR BAD link status etc of the CC Link Ver 2 board Sed Displays the status of other stations currently connected to the CC Link Other station monitor Section 8 2 3 system Performs read write and verification of parameters on the CC Link Online operation Section 8 2 4 Ver 2 board swns te Porce nonora emsetmeneemen Essi Edu meme _ 1 The files which were created in Version 1 17T or later cannot be read in Version 1 165 or earlier 2 Adobe Reader is required Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 2 Operating the B
304. ll cable distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 900 m 2952 9 ft 2 5 Mbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more SOT HAUTE 5 Mbps 160 m 524 96 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 1 3 28 ft Number fcomected saom 15 in m 284 ormor com 262 5 ions 40 cm 15 75 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 39 15 35 in 20 m 65 52 ft Number of connected stations 49 to 64 Number of connected stations 1 to 32 100 m 328 1 ft 40 cm 15 75 in to 69 cm 27 17 in X 30 m 98 43 ft 70 cm 27 56 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft x3 The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Example When the transmission rate is 10 Mbps and 43 remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using the CC Link dedicated high performance cable because the cable connecting the second and third stations is 35 cm 13 78 in the maximum overall cable distance will be 80 cm 31 5 in First Second Third 4th 43th Mater station Remote I O station Remote device Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote device station station rs y DE NC 1 3 28 ft 50 19 69 in 5 13 78 in 50 19 69 in 2 For a system consisting of remote I O stations remote device stations l
305. llle LINE ERROR Cable is disconnected or the transmission path is affected by noise TIME ERROR Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being disconnected or the transmission path being affected by noise PRM ERROR Invalid parameter value M S ERROR Duplicate station on the same line L SW ERROR LL s I MST L Setting Error Operating as a local station Operating as the standby master station Operating as the master station Error occurrence SW0059 6594 Transmission rate setting Forced master Switching instruction result SWO05D 65D gt RUN The module is operating normally Stores the contents of the transmission rate setting 0 Cancel 1 Set b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO e e TTTLIIgelel 10 Mbps 5 Mbps 2 5 Mbps 625 kbps 156 kbps Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 x2 Can be used for the standby master station only App 23 App 23 APPENDIX Number Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SWO05F 65 SWO0060 6601 Mode setting status swo061 6614 Host station number SWO0062 6624 Module operating status SW0064 6641 No of r
306. lly regardless of the SB Updated individually regardless of the SB Updated after each station reaches a SW0045 SW0072 stable condition SW0060 When the SB0074 changes SW0061 When the SB0075 changes SW0062 When the SB0080 changes SW0067 Updated individually regardless of the SB SW0068 When the SB0090 changes SWO006A Updated individually regardless of the SB SWO006D Updated individually regardless of the SB SW0070 App 29 App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 3 Data link processing time This chapter explains the data link processing times such as the link scan time and transmission delay time Appendix 3 1 Link scan time This section shows the CC Link scan time calculation method Link scan time LS LS BT 29 4 NI X 4 8 NW X 9 6 X 32 4 ni X 4 8 nw X 9 6 ST F us BT Constant transmission rate 156 kbps 625kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps su 8 32 16 os NI The final station number among a b and c This value includes the number of occupied stations but excludes reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 a Total number of occupied stations for remote I O stations b Total number of occupied stations for remote device stations c Total number of occupied stations for local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations NW The final station number between b and c This value includes the number of occupied stations but
307. lows the operation check in the following system configuration For details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual With the sample program initialization transmission and reception are available Sending Sending data ABCD Master station J e Personal computer Receiving Receiving data ABCD Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 1 station Remote device station station No 1 AJ65BT R2 Fooo Co RS 232C module Terminal resistor Receiving Receiving data ABCD External device Sending TE Sending data ABCD 13 11 13 11 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC MEMO 13 12 13 12 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 This section gives a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and intelligent device station setting parameter setting programming and operation check For details on intelligent device stations refer to the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Positioning Module User s Manual 14 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a m
308. lting in short circuits or malfunction Do not touch the terminal while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 2 Solderless terminal Use an applicable solderless terminal 1 25 3 for wiring and tighten a solderless terminal within the specified torque range Use a UL listed solderless terminal and a tool recommended by the manufacturer of the solderless terminal for processing Solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used NCAUTION e Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws within a tightening torque range 0 66 to 0 89N m Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal 3 Screws and tightening torque Tighten the terminal block mounting screws and terminal block terminal screws of the CC Link Ve
309. ly under the specific operating system For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to Appendix 17 3 When installation is aborted or failed When the installation is aborted or failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting Refer to Section 16 2 1 7 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE 7 3 Uninstallation MELSEC This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package 1 Uninstallation procedure Uninstall the software package from the control panel of Windows If the dialog box confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation make the setting to keep all common files If deleting common files other applications may not operate normally MELSECPowerManager may not be uninstalled depending on the installation state which affects the other installed software packages For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to Appendix 17 2 When uninstallation is completed normally When the uninstallation is completed normally the icons registered in the Windows Start are deleted 3 When uninstallation is failed When the installation is aborted or failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting Refer to Section 16 2 2 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE 8 1 Starting and Ending Utility This section explains the operating method to start end the utility 8 1 1 Starting a utility Start the utili
310. m configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 Station 4 Ver 2 compatible slave station Station Station number 3 added to the existing system number 1 number 2 Station number 7 Local station QJ61BT11N occupies 4 stations Master station Q80BD Remote I O Remote I O Ver 2 compatible remote device J61BT11N station station occupies occupies 1 station station occupies 1 station 1 station Stano o 0 Remote net Additional mode Operational settings ae Delay information setting lLinkrefreshoycle settings Station information setting items station station device station device station Remote station points 32 points 32 points 224 points 128 points Reserve invalid station select No setting No setting No setting No setting soa I iii 92 seed wore autonatic a Setting not required 6 9 6 9 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 4 2 Local station network parameter settings The descriptions in this section are based on the following system configuration example For details of the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 Station 14 Ver 2 compatible slave station number 3 Station number 7 Station Station number 1 number 2 1 1 i Local station Q80BD Ver 2 compatible 1
311. master station side is required to operate the CC Link system For the master station setting refer to the user s manual of the board module which is used as the master station 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 2 Component Names and Settings This section explains the component names and settings of the CC Link Ver 2 board Indicator LED Shows the CC Link Ver 2 board status or communication status Refer to 1 in this section Connects CC Link dedicated cables for data link Terminal block 2 piece terminal block for data link Master board Q81BD J61BT11 Local module Remote module Board top Terminal DA Terminal O DA resister m e DB ES 4 resister DB DG SLD Channel No Sets the board No corresponding to the channel No used for accessing the CC Link Ver 2 setting switch board from the user program Factory default Channel No 81 Set unique board Nos when installing more than one CC Link Ver 2 board Refer to Section 5 3 4 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 1 Indicator LED Display the operating status of the CC Link Ver 2 board status RN ERR Gee One FD a When the RUN LED is ON or OFF The same LED display as a network module Operating normall
312. master station CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable Auto return function RAS function Slave station disconnect function Error detection by the link special relay register Number of boards that may be used in 3 Maximum 4 one system Loading slot PC PCI bus slot half size PC PCI Express X1 X2 X4 X8 X16 slot half size PCI bus PCI Express Bus width 32 bits Link width 1 lane Bus performance Bus clock frequency 0 to 33MHz Transmission speed 2 5Gb s 5V DC 5 3 3V DC 9 PCI standard Rev 2 2 PCI Express standard Rev 1 0a Maximum number of link points per system Connection cable 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 1 The link points shown above apply to the use in the remote net ver 1 mode Refer to Table 3 2 for those in the remote net ver 2 mode remote additional mode x2 Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables CC Link dedicated cables Ver 1 00 and CC Link dedicated high performance cables cannot be used together If used together correct data transmission will not be guaranteed Also attach the terminating resister which matches the kind of the cable Refer to Section 5 4 1 3 Using the CC Link Ver 2 board and the CC Link Ver 1 board the same computer is not allowed Table 3 2 Number of link points for remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode Specifications Remote I O RX RY 8192 poin
313. match the settings of the modules that do not start up Check the cable connection visually or with a line test Check the parameters for local station Check the operation status of the programmable controller CPU in the corresponding station Check the parameters Are there any duplicate station numbers Check the station number setting Is 65 or larger station No set to the local station Check the station No setting and parameters of including the number of occupied stations the local station or standby master station Does the mode of the master station match that of Check the parameters of the master station and the local station or standby master station local station or standby master station Has the parameter of the master station that will return to the system by the standby master function been rewritten Is the station set as an error invalid station Check the parameters of the master station Check the parameters Are there any duplicate station numbers Check the station number setting Can the faulty station be identified using the communication status of other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Can communication be performed normally if the transmission rate is reduced to a lower speed Such as 156 kbps Check the switch settings for the faulty station Check that the cable is properly wired Check that the shield of the cable is grounded Connect the terminal resistors that match the c
314. mber duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F 5 the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on 16 21 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of problem Check item Check procedure Cannot write data to the remote register RWw of a remote device station Cannot communicate from the master station remote output RY to a local station remote input RX 16 22 Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of the remote register RWw buffer memory Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default Check the parameter information SW0067 parameters being used e Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station Check the maximum communication station number recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the paramete
315. mber of remote I O stations lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 Condition 1 1 X a 2 X b 3 X c 4 X d x64 Condition 2 16 x A 54 X B 88 X C lt 2304 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 2 Remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode a2 a4 a8 The total number of ver 1 compatible slave b b2 b4 b8 2 PA E Wand and Ms Condition 1 C c2 o4 08 X 3 compatible slave stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Single d d2 d4 d8 X 4 lt 64 The total number of ver 1 compatible slave X 32 a2 32 a4 x 64 a8 x 128 stations that occupy 2 stations and ver 2 b X 64 b2 X 96 b4 x 192 b8 x 384 compatible slave stations that occupy 2 stations Condition 2 which are set to Single The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Single The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Single X 96 c2 160 c4 320 c8 x 640 X 128 d2 224 d4 X 448 d8 x 896 lt 8192 82 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Double
316. md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function When writing RY and RWw to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors App 43 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 3 3 Transient transmission processing time This indicates the transient transmission processing time the time required to execute an instruction and receive the processing result The own station access processing time by the md function varies depending on the performance of the personal computer load status and other factors The following shows an example of the processing time for a personal computer with Pentium II 233MHZ Own station access processing time personal computer with Pentium II 233MHz Batch read mdReceive 12ms 2ms Batch write mdSend 1 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board local station programmable controller a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Local station programmable controller The following formula indicates the time taken from instruction execution at the master station CC Link Ver 2 board to receive processing result from the local station programmable controller Formula Maximum value 1 Read LS X BC Read points
317. me SWOO6D App 25 Maximum number of link points 3 2 Maximum overall cable distance 3 6 3 8 MELSEC Data Link Library 9 1 Memory I O Test screen 8 14 Mode Selection Method App 71 Mode selection according to the system 1 7 Mode settings 5 15 Mode setting status SWO0060 App 24 Multiple CPU system support 4 43 Multiple temporary error invalid station specification SWO003 App 22 Network test sss 8 19 Notes on the system configuration 2 2 Index 2 Number of occupied stations Number of connected stations Number of link points per link No of retries information SW0064 Numerical pad Online operation screen 8 10 Operating the Utility Software Starting a 8 1 Quitting a utility 8 2 Other settings 8 12 Other station data link status SB0080 App 21 Other station data link status SW0080 App 26 P R Other station monitor screen 8 8 Other station watchdog timer error occurre
318. memory address 348 to 34BH 34Cu to 34FH 350H to 353H 354 to 357H 358H to 35BH 35CH to 35FH 360H to 363H 364H to 367H 368H to 36BH 36CH to 36FH 370H to 373H 374u to 377H number 378H to 37BH Station Buffer memory address 37CH to 37FH 380H to 383H 384H to 387H 388 to 38BH 38CH to 38FH 390H to 393H 394 to 397H 398H to 39Bu 39CH to 39FH 3A0H to 3A3H 4 to 3A7H 3A8H to 3ABH number to 3AFH Station Buffer memory address 3BO0h to 3B3H 3B4nu to 3B7H to to 3CO0H to 3C3H 3C4H to 3C7H 3C8H to 3CBH 3CCH to 3D0 to 3D3H 3D4nu to 3D7H 3D8H to 3DBH 3DCu to 3DFH number Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 214 to 217H 218 to 21BH 21 to 21FH 220 to 223H 2244 to 227H 228 to 22BH 22 to 22FH 230H to 233H 234 to 237H 238 to 23BH 23CH to 23FH 240 to 243H 244 to 247H Station Buffer memory address 248u to 24BH 24 to 24FH 250 to 253 254 to 257H 258u to 25BH 25 to 25FH 260 to 263H 264 to 267H 268u to 26BH 26 to 26FH 270 273H 274 to 277H 278 to 27BH Station Buffer memory address 27 to 27FH 280 to 283H 284 to 287H 288u to 28BH 28 to 28FH 290 to 293H 294 to 297H 298u to 29BH 29CH to 29 2A0H to 2A3H 2 4 to 2A7H 2A8u to 2 2 to 2 St
319. modules parameter address 14 was set to a value other than 1 to 64 The condition setting switch for the station number not specified with a parameter is designated for the standby master station All stations were set as reserved stations with a parameter A station number specified as a standby master station is set to a station other than an intelligent device station A parameter change was executed during a transient request A response from the requesting station was not returned within the monitor time period A transient request was issued to a remote I O station or remote device station A request was issued without turning RY on RY off before the response is completed MELSEC Detectability Master Local station station Corrective action Set the total size of the communication buffer to 4 k words or less Set the total size of the automatic update buffer to 4 k words or less Set the standby master station to a value within the range from 1 to 64 Set a value within the range from 4 to 7 Set a value within the range from 1 to 10 Set the parameter so that station numbers are not duplicated Set the parameter so that it satisfies the condition shown at the left Set a value within the range from 1 to 4 Set a value within the range from 1 to 64 Check the parameter or condition setting switch Check the parameter s reserved station setting Specify the s
320. mory address 4018H is the corresponding size for station No 4 RY however because a value less than one word is rounded up 1 is stored Station No 1 RWw offset 4400H Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RWw 0 Station No 3 RWw offset Station No 3 RWw size Station No 4 RWw offset Station No 4 RWw size O Default Buffer memory size of station No 4 RWw Station No 1 RWr offset 4CO00H Head buffer memory address of station No 1 RWr Station No 1 RWr size 64 40H 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC 6 Random access buffer The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission 7 Automatic update buffer The automatic update buffer stores automatic update data when performing transient transmission communication using the automatic update buffer with the AJ65BT R2 Set the automatic update buffer size for the AJ65BT R2 in the Parameter settings of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility For more details on the automatic update buffer size settings refer to Section 6 1 Communication example using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 first module Buffer memory Automatic Automatic Automatic update update update buffer buffer for memory the first module 1 Data are written to the automatic
321. mula indicates the time taken from the moment a signal is input to the remote I O station until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 1 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 3 1 1 5 4 5 ms Maximum value LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 81 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 3 2 1 5 7 5 ms 1 When reading RX from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 32 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY gt Remote I O station output The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the remote I O station output turns on off Formula Normal value LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 2 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 3XxX1 1 5 4 5 ms M
322. n retener 5 4 Installation environment 5 4 Intelligent module A 20 Installing the software package 7 1 Intelligent device station A 20 Intelligent device station communication 1 5 Internal current consumption 3 2 Line status 5 0090 App 27 Link refreshi i iine 4 39 Link Scan App 30 Link special registers SWS App 22 Link special relays SBs App 17 Line test hardware 8 16 Line test software sess 8 18 Local A 20 Eocal module 2 d BU A 20 Local station 20 Local station communication 1 4 amp a 18 Master and local modules A 20 Master 20 Master 20 Master station A 20 Master station information SBO0070 App 20 Master station transient transmission status 580095 cts 21 Max link scan ti
323. n 16 7 16 17 16 17 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 4 3 When the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is flashing The following table shows how to identify the error according to the ERR SD or RD LED status when the RUN LED on the CC Link Ver 2 board is flashing Corrective Action Check if the CC Link Ver 2 board driver is Breakdown or malfunction of the installed computer in use x Remove the CC Link Ver 2 board and check OS CC Link Ver 2 board failure if the OS starts up normally startup CC Link Ver 2 board driver is not Replace other optional board s or change error installed installation positions for board s Competition or fault with other optional Reinstall other optional board driver s or board s reset the IRQ and memory addresses Reinstall the OS or replace the computer CC Link Ver 2 board driver is not Check if the CC Link Ver 2 board driver is installed installed Driver WDT error has occurred Take corrective action for driver WDT Refer CC Link Ver 2 board failure to Section 16 4 2 Poor contact on the CC Link Ver 2 board PCI bus CC Link Ver 2 board failure Check if the CC Link Ver 2 board is firmly error inserted into the PCI slot Malfunction of the PC in use Driver WDT error 1 The error frequency may depend on the condition of the computer or OS If any of the above corrective actions do not help refer to Section 16 7 16 18 16 18 16 TROUBL
324. n 3 2 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote I O station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote input RX Remote output RY Address MELSEC NAR notation 4000 RX F to 0 p HL xF to x H RF te RYO 4200 amber 1 40014 RX1F to RX 10 ie 8 RY 1F to RY10 4201 40024 RX2F to RX 20 mE RY 2F to RY20 42025 40034 to RX30 RY to RY30 4203 40044 RX 4F to 40 MEE ME 4 to RY40 4204 4005 RX5F to 50 E RY 5F to RY50 4205 40064 RX6F to RX 60 RY 6F to RY 60 4206 Station 40074 RX7F to RX70 mE RY 7F to RY7O 4207 Station number 2 4008 RX8F to RX 80 RY to RY 80 42084 number 2 40094 RX9F to RX 90 RY 9F to RY 90 4209 400A4 RX AF to RX AO EE cd AF to RYAO 420A 400B4 RX BF to RX BO NET RY BF to RY BO 420B 400C4 RXCF to RX CO RY CF to RY 420 400D RXDF to RX DO RE RY DF to RY DO 420D 400En RXED to RXEO p di RY ED to Rv E0 42054 to to to to 41FCu RX1FC
325. n Chapters 10 to 14 11 To learn about the error descriptions Chapter 15 The descriptions of errors are described in Chapter 15 12 To learn about the corrective actions to take when the system does not operate Chapter 16 The troubleshooting procedures are described in Chapter 16 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Model Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board unless otherwise specified Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation CC Link Ver 1 board Generic term for the Type ASOBDE J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board and the Type A80BDE J61BT13 Control amp Communication Link System Local Interface Board CC Link Ver 2 board Abbreviation for the Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board Master board Abbreviation for the CC Link board when used as a master station Local board Abbreviation for the CC Link board when used as a local station QJ61BT11 N Generic term for QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module and QJ61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Module SW1DNC CCBD2 B Product name of the software package for CC Link Ver 2 board Master station The station controlling the remote station local station and intelligent device station Standby master station Backup station for data lin
326. n functions of the CC Link board Transient transmission is not allowed to slave station No 64 on the CC Link system Performance The system performance using the CC Link Ver 2 board differs according to the performance loaded condition of the personal computer the processing contents of the application software and the type of the interface board Use the product after reviewing the system configuration and processing contents of the software in advance For details of the CC Link Ver 2 board performance refer to Appendix 3 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIMES 10 Combination of ROM version and S W version When using CC Link Ver 2 board ROM version 2B or later use S W package version 1 06G or later INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board Please read this manual and related manuals thoroughly to fully understand the functions and performances of the Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board in order to use the product properly Please be sure to deliver this manual to the end users CONTENTS NA dzaB diuisio Uo C A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT a ae a aa ea eae a aa e aa ae a A 5 REVISIONS 6 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE nite udiatutead aeneo au A 11 INTRODUCTION ecc A 12 CONTENT Sian ainntalanini dein daniel deeded lide vie eile eal ie eed odin ede td eed A 12 MANUALS tiet tote Ho eode tie t
327. n illegal error Error code FFDFH Examples of errors that will occur in CC Link Ver 2 board or module e Response timeout Error code 778 e Corresponding station error during sending Error code 201 e Transient target station error Error code 205 When an error has occurred confirm the error code and create a user program for retry processing as necessary a The following indicates the functions that will result in error if executed during system switching 6 Functions that will result in error by system switching oo mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW MELSEC data link library mdReceive mdSend mdTypeRead App 48 App 48 APPENDIX MELSEC b The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence at batch write START Write processing mdSend instruction etc Has error occurred NO 1 Error code is checked Does the error require retry processing NO Normal processing is executed Error handling is executed Wait processing is executed END YES Retry processing 1 Refer to the following manual for the details of and corrective action for the error code When a Redundant CPU error occurs e Error code returned to request source during communication with CPU module in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection When a CC Link Ver 2 board error or module error occurs e Section 15 3 5 in this manual Error codes
328. n or off correctly For critical I O signals that may cause a serious accident establish a circuit to externally monitor them DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 94 in or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this user s manual Using this board in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the board e Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Under tightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Over tightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the board Failure to do so may cause a failure or malf
329. n the parameters have been set with the utility installed the parameters T are initialized at installation Save the parameters with the save file function before installing the utility e When the software package has been installed in the environment that the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled the software package may not be uninstalled Enable the creation of 8 3 filename before installing the software package For the method on how to check and change the status of 8 3 filename creation to enable disable refer to the website of Microsoft Corporation e When using SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 17 T or later apply Service Pack1 and Windows security update program KB3033929 in Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 7 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE 7 2 Installation MELSEC This section explains a procedure for installing software package 1 Installation 1 Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the Setup exe file on the CD ROM 3 By following the on screen instructions select or enter the necessary information When the instruction displayed on the screen is not effective refer to 16 2 3 4 Restart the personal computer 2 When installation is completed normally When the installation is completed normally the following utilities are registered a Utility When the installation is completed normally the utilities shown below are registered in the Start 1 of Windows
330. nal block connector Local station Remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station Branch line Branch line Branch line Terminal resistor between DA and DB Remote I O station remote device station Local station intelligent device station ANE Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Local station intelligent device station maximum of 6 stations can be connected The number of branch lines is determined bythe branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK Transmission rate MELSEC 2 T Branch communication specifications list The following explains the communication specifications for T branch connection For communication specifications not listed below refer to Section 3 2 Performance Specifications Specification Remarks 625 kbps 156 kbps 10 5 M 2 5 Mbps are not allowed to use Maximum length of the main line Indicates the length of the cable between terminal resistors The length of the T branch cable branch line length is not included 100 328 1 ft 500 1640 5 ft Maximum length of the main line 8 m 26 25 ft Indicates the overall cable length per branch Overall branch line length 50 m 164 05 ft 200 m 656 2 ft Indicates the overall length of the enti
331. nce status SW0084 App 26 Other station watchdog timer error status 5 0081 21 Parameter backup restore tool App 56 Parameter receive status 5 0077 App 20 Parameter Settings 6 1 Parameter setting checklist App 61 Parameter Setting Examples Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 6 5 Remote Net Ver 2 Mode 6 7 Remote Net Additional 6 9 Parameter Setting Items 6 1 Parameter settings 8 11 Parameter setting status SBOO6D App 20 Parameter setting test result SWOOAF App 23 Performance Specifications 3 2 Precautions for installing other optional board eere 16 12 Precautions on handling the CC Link Ver 2 board c 5 4 Procedure Before Starting The Data Link 5 1 Remote device A 20 Remote device station communication 1 3 Re mote input 5 needles 4 4 Remote I O A 20 Remote I O station communication 1 3 Remote I O station points setting 4 44 Remote
332. nd the remote register RWw10 8 When a value is set to the remote register RWwO 10 the value is written to the remote registers RWr0 11 and 12 12 14 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 4 stations Local station station No 1 Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Occupies 2 stations Local station station No 5 Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 12 15 Terminal resistor Receive RX Send RY Receive Send RWw 10 11 12 Master station RX80 Local station No RY80 Local station No RY80 Master station RYO Local station No RXO Local station No RXO Master station RWrO Local station No RWw10 Local station No RWw10 Master station RWwO Local station No RWrO Local station No RWrO MELSEC m1 m2 m3 12 15 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC MEMO 12 16 12 16 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 This section give
333. nel No 81 v perational settings 8 M Retty count 32 Set 2 Sta No Type 0 2 Master station i e iiem 5 A 9 gt Automatic reconnection station count 1 a Cancel 3 9M Transmission rate 156kbps c Occupied sta Mec Default 6 a Default 4 Mode Remote netVer 1 mode y Input for Err Sta Hoiere 7 10 Standby master station No Station information settings 11 Delay information setting o M e Ee gt All connect count 1 Clear 15 12 9 p Driver WDT monitoring time a No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta T Use driver WDT function i 1 6 1 1 1 Intelligent device station single ccupies 4 stations 1 3 5 Block data assurance per station Assure block dala This function use link refresh function 1 Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 14 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type C Master statio Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4
334. nformation timed out n 4 FUNCTIONS printf Press any key getch mdClose path exit 0 Set the station number Set the device type SB equivalent to special M Set the device number retzmdDevRst path StNo DevT ype DevNo on SB1 switching request StNo OxFF DevType 5 DevNo 0 1 if ret 0 printf SBI ON processing failed error code x n ret printf Press any key getch mdClose path exit 0 11 Read SW equivalent to special SD 43 switching result MELSEC Size 2 1 Set the size of sending data StNo OxFF Set the station number DevType 14 1 Set the device type SD equivalent to special D DevNo 43 Set the device number retzmdReceive path StNo DevType DevNo amp Size amp RecvBuf 0 if ret 0 printf mdReceive SW43 read processing failed error code x n ret printf Press any key n getch mdClose path exit 0 if RecvBuf 0 amp 0x0800 0 1 Exit from the loop if SB43 is on break Sleep 100 I Wait for 100ms if RecvBuf 0 0 Exit when the switching result is abnormal printf Failed to switch to the standby master station n printf Press any key n getch mdClose path exit 0 Use the paths that are already obtained in other processing for the path parameters in the standby master switching sample program They correspond to the path values obtained by mdOpen 4 34 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC
335. ng explains how to change the device 1 Double click the number of the device to be changed 2 When the following Data Changing dialog box appears set a desired value and then click the button Data Changing Device Ww 0017 C HEX DEC 123 When the display format is 32 bit Data changing 32 bit is displayed on the title Data changing2bit E Device LTN 2 HEX DEC 00000000 4 When the display format is decimal unsigned 16 bits or decimal unsigned 32 bits the value same as the display format can be set 3 Select in the dialog box shown below to change the word device Select to cancel the change operation Device Monitor Utility Change the device Ww 0017 to 123 T All right Yes 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so that the entire system works safely at all times when controlling the data change to the programmable controller during operation Also determine which corrective actions to take in the event of a data communication error between the personal computer and programmable controller CPU in use 2 Bit device The following explains how to switch the bit device on off Note that this operation is enabled only when the data format is Vertical Indication 1 Double click the number of the bit device to be changed
336. ngle station Setting range 1 to 64 3 button Executes the test 4 button Cancels the test Line test result screen For All stations 1 64 only 5 Each station information eii TT E E E E E BEHEHEBHEEHEEHEEHH 6 gt Test result Normal It completed successfully Error code Ox B Eror Display when 4 stations are connected Displays the information of each station 5 Each station information i White Normal station Red Error station Displays the status of each station 6 Test result p In the event of an error the error code is displayed 7 button Closes the line test result screen 8 16 8 16 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC c Line test Software This test is used to check the connection with all modules of station No 1 to 64 All stations or a specific module Selected station with parameters set and the data link being performed 1 The Line test Software is executable only when the data link status of the CC Link Ver 2 board is In data link or During Auto Returning 2 Use Station Specification on the Circuit test screen for any of the error stations detected in the All stations 1 to 64 test Operation Procedure After selecting Line test Software in the Test item click the Start button The line test screen appears Line test screen Line test C Select
337. ninstallation is not executed normally Refer to Section 16 2 2 The driver is not normally installed Refer to Section 16 3 3 A mark is displayed next to the icon of the driver on the Device Manager screen 2 Problem for a personal computer and utility Error detail Cause determination method Corrective action The personal computer does not start down Refer to Section 16 3 2 Error message An error occurred in writing is displayed in Logon as a user with administrator authority and utility execute utility or reinstall the operating system The password is requested on the User Account Control When the utility is activated and if the screen when the utility is activated User Account Control screen is displayed Using Windows Vista Windows 2008 requesting a selection of user with administrator Windows 7 gt authority and password entry the user who is r 3 logging on to the system does not have an sa es administrator authority Y An unidentified program wants access to your computer Log off the system and login again as a user with administrator authority and activate the utility 2 Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before ET CCBD2UTL exe Unidentified Publisher To continue type an administrator password and then click OK 5 AdministratorA 0 D Caps Lock is on Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized chan
338. nk refer to Section 6 5 of this manual e If a cable dedicated to the CC Link is disconnected this may destabilize the line and a data link communication error may occur in multiple stations Make sure to create an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the system will operate safely even if the above error occurs Failure to do so may result in a serous accident due to faulty output or malfunctions e When performing the control of the personal computer in operation changing data configure an interlock circuit in a user program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained When performing other controls of the personal computer in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote personal computer from an external device problems that have occurred on the personal computer side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the personal computer for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the user program e Do not write any data from the user program into the system area of the board buffer memory Writing data into the system area may cause a CC Link system malfunction e A failure the board may cause remote I O not to turn o
339. nk system b The total number of stations can be no more than 64 including the standby master station The number of stations that can be occupied by the standby master station is one or four c Do not specify station number 64 for a system in which a standby master station exists If it is specified station number 64 cannot communicate normally d If any abnormality is detected at the master station in the initial status before parameter communication starts the switch to the standby master station will not be executed e When the master station becomes faulty the data link control will automatically be transferred to the standby master station but the cyclic transmission data will not be transferred Instructs to perform the switching direction SB0001 is ON with a user program After switching the data link startup 8B0043 from the standby master station to the master station is completed the information before the detection of abnormality at the master station will be output to each station Note that a transient transmission to the master station cannot be performed until switching the data link startup SB0043 from the standby master station to the master station is completed If the transient transmission is performed before the switching is completed a timeout error will occur in the request source Perform transient transmission to the master station after instructing to perform the switching direction of the c
340. no responses are received from all stations Operating as the master Operating as other than the master station Switch setting error No switch setting error LINE Red Cable disconnection error No cabieidisconnegton Operating as other than S MST Green Operating standby the standby master master station station i OCAL Green Operating as a local Operating as other than station the local station PRM Red Parameter error No parameter error Closes the Board detail information screen S MS Red Station duplicated error Station not duplicated PR 17 Save SB SW button ur the of all the CC Link Ver 2 board SB SW areas selected on this screen in ormat 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 3 Operating the Other station monitor screen This screen shows the line status of other stations all stations that are currently connected to the CC Link system Other station monitor screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test 1 ChannelNo Channel No 81 _ 2 Self station information Sta No 0 Master station Ver 2 mode All stations view 3 No Sta No Reserved station information Error invalid station information
341. ntrol of a remote device station analogue module Communication control of an intelligent device station RS 232C module It provides the drivers for various operating systems Various drivers are provided for easy system configuration according to the user environment For details on the compatible operating system refer to Section 2 3 10 Prevent separation of cyclic data by each station In the CC Link Ver 2 utility cyclic data can be assured only by enabling the parameter of block data assurance per station setting 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 1 2 Features of the CC Link System This section explains the features of the CC Link System 1 Remote I O station communication The on off status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Personal computer Master station Remote I O station Program CC Link Ver 2 board f Link scan PA mdReceive Remoteinput Input o L RX Write Link scan 4 scq Output 2 Remote device station communication Handshaking signals with the remote device station initial request error occurred flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using the remote registers RWw and RWr Personal computer Master station
342. nts 24 points 48 points 96 points Occupies 4 stations Remote I O RX RY 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points Remote register RWw RWr 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points In the remote net ver 1 mode the number of cyclic points cannot be increased 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 1 Remote net ver 2 mode This mode is designed to configure a new system The number of cyclic points can be increased as indicated below Per station Max RX RY 128 points RWw RWr 32 points In the case of 1 station occupied with octuple setting Per CC Link system Max RX RY 8192 points RWw RWr 2048 points Remote device station Local station Remote device station z Remote station Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 mode Ver 2 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station i Ver 2 Station number 1 Output compatible remote Station number 2 output RY Remote output R Station number 3 Station number 6 Station number 6 i Station number 7 Station number 7 Remote output RY to quadruple double NE octupe Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 for setting details 1 In the remote net ver 2 mo
343. number of connected modules All connect count and station Station information settings information of each module Clears the parameters within the Station information settings area to the default button values 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 2 Other settings screen Other settings 1 Retry count 34 se e 8 2 Automatic reconnection station count 12d Cancel 4 9 3 Standby master station No od Default 1 0 4 Delay information setting 024 5 micro sec gt Diver WDT monitoring time 25021 Bms 6 b r Block data assurance per station Assure block data This function use link refresh function 7 Link refresh cycle 12 ms Set the retry count for the case of a communication error when a transient 1 Retry count transmission error occurs 2 Automatic reconnection station Set the number of modules that can be automatically returned in one link scan 3 Standby master station No Set the station No of the standby master station 4 Delay information setting Set 0 to Delay information setting Select Use driver WDT function to enable the function 5 Driver WDT monitoring time Set the driver WDT monitoring time 6 Block data assurance per station Select Assure block data to enable this function 7 Link refresh cycle Set the link refresh cycle 1 to 1000 1 8
344. o 4 No 5 No 6 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 2 compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible ee itional jare mode mode Changed from standby master Remote device station to local station station added Changed to Ver 2 Standby master station compatible board module added Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 for setting details 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 3 Precautions for cyclic points increase setting a Whether system can be configured or not The following table indicates whether cyclic transmission can be made or not in each station RJ61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 LJ61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 L26CPU BT QJ61BT11 L26CPU PBT AJ61BT11 Remote station Q80BD J61BT11N A1SJ61BT11 Intelligent device Q81BD J61BT11 AJ61QBT11 station QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 Standby master Local Standby Remote device Remote Local station tati station master tati sraton station stanon station Master station d 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 1 mode mode mode mode mode mode mode compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible Ver 2 mode Additional mode Ver 1 mode d n Ver 1 mode Cyclic transmission enabled A Cyclic transmission enabled on condition X Cyclic transmission disabled Slave station L26CPU PBT Q80BD J61BT11N LJ61BT11
345. o SW0007 as temporary error invalid stations The execution result of the request is stored to SW0049 OFF Not requested ON Requested Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by Temporary error SW0003 to SW0007 invalid canceling The execution result of the request is stored to SWO004B request OFF Not requested ON Requested Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008 580008 Line test request The execution result of the request is stored to SWO004D 5E0n b8 OFF Not requested ON Requested SB0002 b2 580004 Temporary error 5E0n b4 invalid request SB0005 5 0 b5 App 17 App 17 APPENDIX SB0009 b9 SBO00C 5 b12 SBOO0D 5E0n b13 SB0020 2 SB0040 4 SB0041 5E4n b1 SB0042 5E4n b2 SB0043 5E4n b3 SB0044 4 b4 580045 4 b5 580046 4 06 580048 5E4n b8 580049 5E4n b9 SBO04A 5E4n b10 Parameter information read request Forced master switching Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction Board status Data link restart acceptance Data link restart complete Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching Data link stop acceptance Data link stop complete Forced master switching
346. oard information screen This screen displays the various information of the CC Link Ver 2 board currently mounted on the PC 1 Board information screen B Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test 1 gt 5101 Channel No 81 3 LED information 4 4 2 gt Sta No O Master station Ver 2 mode Link scan time 14 ms RUM ERR 5 gt Data link status In data link Error status Normal Details 4 7 6 8 pal E E Ex pe 1 Slot1 board Displays the information of the Slot1 CC Link Ver 2 board Displays the station No station type and operation mode of the CC Link Ver 2 board Example 0 Master station Ver 2 mode 2 Sta No T i Station No Operation mode Station type Displays the Board detail information screen where the details of the CC Link Ver 2 7 button board can be verified For more information about the Board detail information screen refer to 2 Board detail information screen Displays the information of the Slot2 to Slot4 CC Link Ver 2 boards 8 Slot2 to Slot4 board For the display details refer to the Slot1 board above 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 2 Board detail information screen Board detail information 1 gt Channel No bic c en 2 P Sta No
347. ocal stations and intelligent device stations Local station Local station or Intelligent or Intelligent device station device station Remote I O station Remote I O station or remote or remote device station device station Master station 2 x1 x2 2 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations x2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Transmission rate Maximum overall cable distance 156 Kops 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 30 cm 11 81 in to 59 cm 23 23 in dni 60 cm 23 62 in or more CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 Transmission rate Maximum overall cable distance 156 Kbps 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 25 Mbps TES 2 m 6 56 ft or more EET 3 The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 2 3 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when configuring the entire system with Version 1 10 modules and cable is shown below Local station or Local station or Remot
348. ocessing time of the md function App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC 3 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt local station programmable controller Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RX Local station programmable controller RY The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment a local station s CPU device turns on off until RX of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off 1 Formula Normal value lu a1 LR X m LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL X k 1 ms 2 Maximum value lu a1 LR X m LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL X k 1 ms 2 lu Reading execution interval of the user program a1 Request processing time of the personal computer LR Link refresh time LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time k LS SL However the decimal point is rounded up m LS LR However the decimal point is rounded up n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RX RY but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWr RWw 2 When reading RX from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 42 App 42 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station CC Link Ver 2 board
349. ococococococcsc 81 CC Link 1 slot Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display 4 5 Network No 0 Station No 255 2362082 Vertical indication _ Display the current device status 1 Device Information To change the data format refer to Section 8 3 8 Display the status of the network that is currently set 2 Network Status To set up the network refer to Section 8 3 4 Show the data format and the type of the device being displayed word device double word device and bit device To change the device type refer to Section 8 3 5 To change the data format refer to section 8 3 8 3 Data Format 1 The number of displayed columns will differ depending on the settings of a connection target CPU and display format 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 3 Setting the 16 point register monitor Set the Device Monitor Utility so that it monitors up to five bit devices and one word device double word device simultaneously 1 Menu selection Select Menu 16 point register monitor on the menu bar Selectable for batch monitoring only 2 Display screen Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help 1 gt lt Slo alo roa alraliaqa ala ala aia a a lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Oloo i
350. of network board Driver WDT Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the communication status between a network board and a personal computer or operating status of a personal computer PACKING LIST The following shows the product list of the CC Link Ver 2 board Item name Quantity CC Link system master local interface board Terminal resistor 1100 1 2 W brown brown brown Software package CD ROM ii Before Using the Product Software License Agreement 1 1 The manual is stored on the CD ROM in a PDF file format 1 2 Terminal resistor 1300 1 2 W brown orange brown 2 1 1 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 1 OVERVIEW The CC Link system connects distributed modules such as an I O module and a special functional module using CC Link dedicated cables so that these modules can be controlled by the programmable controller CPU 1 By distributing each module to facility equipment such as a conveyor line and a machine device the entire system can be connected in the most efficient manner 2 The on off information of input output and numeric data handled by modules can easily be sent and received at high speed 3 A simple distributed system can be configured by connecting multiple personal computers and programmable controller CPUs 4 By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi s partner manufacturers the system that can provide flexible solutions to meet a wide range of
351. om being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4 4 2 setting network parameters Data link stop restart Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed Section 4 4 3 Error invalid station setting function Station number duplicate Checks for duplicate modules having the same station i A check function number in the system Allows access to any CPU of a multiple CPU system via a Multiple CPU syst rt Section 4 4 5 upie oe System SUPPOr OC Ver 2 board EIUS Allows the I O points of the remote I O stations to be selected from among 8 points 16 points and 32 points reducing the Section 4 4 6 number of reserved points Remote station point setting Allows the number of cyclic points per module to be increased from 128 points for RX RY and 16 points for RWr RWw in the ver 1 mode to up to 896 points for RX RY and 128 points for RWr RWw in the ver 2 mode Cyclic points increase Section 4 4 7 4 Table 4 4 lists the transient transmission function Table 4 4 List of the transient transmission function Designates an opposite station and communicates at an Transient transmission 519 Ab pposi i Section 4 5 1 arbitrary timing Refer to Section 4 4 7 3 b Whether send receive is enabled or not for the availability of cyclic data communication with the CC Link Ver 2 compatible stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 2 Basic Functions This section explains the basic functions of the CC
352. omparable product is recommended When wiring cables for the main line side try not to remove the covering as much as possible Maximum length of main line distance between T branches and length of cable between stations The CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 110 used Distance Length of cable between Length of cable between the master between remote I O stations or local station or intelligent device station of main line T branches remote device stations and the adjacent station s Terminal 625 kbps 100 m 328 1 ft No limit 30 cm 11 8 in or longer 1 m 3 28 ft or longer 156 kbps 500 1640 5 ft 2 m 6 56 ft or longer x 1 The cable length of 1 m 3 28 ft or longer is for a system configured only with remote I O stations and remote device stations 2 The cable length of 2 m 6 56 ft or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent device stations Maximum length of main line not including the branch line length Terminal resistor ARM L IR Length of branch line 8 m 26 25 ft or shorter Distance between T branches resistor x2 2 pure ex x1 EN 1 2 Ls 2 LI R R IR Length of branch line 8 m 26 25 ft or shorter L I L I Master station 2 2 1 1 1 N R Indicates a remote I O station or
353. on The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Address 1 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 2 For station 1E 1 RWw1 TP Rwa eoo RWr1 2E1 For station number1 RWw2 RWw2 RW 2 2E2 number RWw3 Rwwa8 tt 2 3 1E4 RWw 4 RWr 4 2E4n 1 For station 1 5 RWw 5 RWr 5 2 5 For station number2 i RWw6 do E RW 6 7 2E6 f number2 RW 7 2 7 1 8 RWw 8 RWr 8 2 8 For station 1 9 RWw 9 RWr 9 2 9 For station inumber3 1EAn Rwa Jo ro 7 2 number 3 l RWB oW 5 5 5 5 5 ch RW B 2 1 RWw C RWr C 2EC Forstaion 1ED RWD j ro RW D 7 2 For station jnumber4 4EE t RWwE RW E 7 2EE number4 1EFn Tf 2EFu 1 0 RWw 10 RWr 10 2 0 For station 1 1 RWw 11 RWr 11 2F1 For station number5 7
354. on Executes the selected test 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 1 About tests The following describes each of the tests a Hardware test This test is used to check the hardware operation before configuring the system or to check whether or not the CC Link Ver 2 board is operating properly when the data link is not performed correctly 1 Before starting the hardware test disconnect the CC Link cable Also connect a terminating resistor between terminals DA and DB 2 The transmission rate during the hardware test execution is equal to the current parameter setting value 3 The CC Link Ver 2 board is automatically reset before and after execution of the hardware test 4 WDT error message is registered to Event viewer to perform WDT test Operation Procedure After selecting Hardware test in the Test item click the Start button Test result will be displayed after hardware test execution Test result monitor at normal completed CC Link Ver 2 utility X 1 It completed successfully ET b Line test Hardware For slave stations connected to the master station this test is used to check whether or not all modules of station No 1 to 64 All stations or a specific module Selected Station is connected correctly with the CC Link cable s and the data link is enabled This test is effective when the data link is not available due to an error for example 1 Executing this test during data
355. on is down and the standby master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote Remote Master station Remote Remote Remote input RX Remote output RY to RYOF IRY20 to RY2F IRY30 to IRY40 to RY4F IRY10 to RY1F Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 The data sent to the remote output RY of the standby master station by a sequence program is sent to the remote I O stations as output information standby master station is controlling the data link Standby master station Station number 1 0 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 d Standby master station input when the master station is down and the Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 X00 to XOF X10 to X1F The data shown in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or retained according to the Data link faulty station setting in network parameters 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 for details a Settin
356. on number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station Master occupying occupying station Station number 1 Station number 3 1 station Station number 5 4 stations Remote station Remote station Remote station occupying occupying occupying 2 stations 1 station 2 stations Em m E 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 12 Data link stop restart function The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used 13 Duplicate station number check function This is a transmission method by which data communications are available between 1 1stations at any given timing by specifying a target station 14 Transient transmission In this method of transmission a counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is performed at an arbitrary timing Personal computer Master station Local station CC Link Ver 2 board 1st station Program Buffer memory C mdSend as Read L mdReceive H 15 Backward compatibility By setting the Remote net ver 1 mode the user program of the CC Link Ver 1 board can be used on the CC Link Ver 2 board Select the remote net ver 1 mode when the cyclic points increasing is not required or when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as substitute for the CC Link Ver 1 board 16 Cyclic points increase function When the Remote net ver 2 mode or Remote net additional mode is selected the number of cyclic points can be increased up to 8192
357. ons 10 1 Communication with the remote device stations Idm aiuti dei tnit buts 4 5 Communication with the local stations 4 10 Communication between the Master station and Local 12 1 Communication with the intelligent device station Poa Fins etate iai sdte te heathens hi ud tiat 4 16 Communication between the Master station and Intelligent device station 13 1 14 1 Communication with the Redundant CPU v der eU eee E App 47 Component Names and Settings 5 2 Connection 3 2 Current link scan time SWOOGE 8 5 Cyclic A 20 Cyclic Transmission Processing 32 Index 1 D Data link restart SB0000 App 17 Data link restart acceptance SB0040 App 17 Data link restart complete SB0041 App 17 Data link restart result SW0041 App 22 Data link stop result SW0O045 App 23 Data link stop 5 0002 App 17 Data link stop acceptance SB0044 App 17 Data link stop complete 5 0045 App 17 Data link 4 42 Detailed LED display status SW0058 App 23 Device
358. ons Local station Read write Also stores the receive For sending receiving data from the remote enabled device other local intelligent device standby master stations Write only Remote register For the master station Stores the receive data RWr 2 from the remote device Master station local intelligent device Appendix 1 For receiving standby master stations 2 Local station For the local station Stores the receive data For receiving from the master station Stores offset and size information of Slave station offset and RX RY RWw RWr for each remote station local size information station intelligent device station and standby master station Read write Link special relay SB Stores the data link status enabled write may be disabled depending Link special register Appendix 1 Stores the data link status on the SW device 4 Appendix 1 3 Use prohibited 1 The specified data is stored and used by Read write Appendix 1 Random access buffer xa transient transmission enabled 6 Use prohibited 1 Stores the automatic update data when Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read write Appendix 1 buffer AJ65BT R2 communication using the enabled 7 automatic update buffer Use prohibited 1 Available Not available 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors 2 Used when the
359. ons of operating system cannot be used If an attempt is made to use any of the following functions this product may not operate normally Activating the application with Windows compatible mode Simplified user switch over Remote desktop Large font size Advanced setting of screen property DPI setting other than 10096 set the size of text and illustration other than smaller 100 Power save mode Standby Hibernate Sleep Fast startup The language switching function set by Regional and Language Options Windows XP Mode Windows Touch or Touch Modern UI Client Hyper V Server Core Installation Upgrade the operating system When exiting the operating system always shut down the computer The behavior of the board and the personal computer when the personal computer enters the power save mode differs according to the operating system For details of error codes and messages when the power save mode set by a user or a program is entered refer to Appendix 16 Upgrading the operating system is not supported Install SW1DNC CCBD2 B by following the procedure shown below 1 Uninstall SW1DNC CCBD2 B 2 Upgrade the operating system 3 Install SW1DNC CCBD2 B with the software version supporting the upgraded operating system 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC 3 Instructions for user program a Supported version of SW1DNC CCBD2 B Supported version 32 bit version user program All versions Ve
360. or to the corresponding station Transient request There are too many transient requests overload error to the corresponding station A transient transmission was B604 Line test in progress performed while a line test was in Wait a while and then resend progress B605 Cannot access the Access to the communication buffer Waita whiieand then resend communication buffer failed B607 Target station CPU error ss is An emorin the targetstations Check the target CPU There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station when the Wait a while and then resend requesting station is the AJ65BT G4 transient transmission A8GT J61BT13 or CC Link Ver 2 overloaded status board Transient request overload error 15 4 15 4 15 ERROR CODE Error code hexadecimal Error description Transient request error Response timeout Module mode setting error B780 B801 Access code error B803 Number of data points error Cause of error details The target station was not an intelligent device station when the requesting station is the ABSGT J61BT13 or CC Link Ver 2 board A response was not received from the requested station when the requesting station is the ABSGT J61BT13 or CC Link Ver 2 board A transient transmission was executed even though the target station was set in the I O mode An access code that does not exist was used The number of data points is out of range Invalid attr
361. ore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The installed INF file does not contain digital signature information Do you still want to install this driver software More Info Security Alert Driver Installation The driver software you are instaling for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenlicode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could nat be verified Do you still want to install this driver software No More Info Click the button This screen is displayed at the first installation Click the Continue Anyway button The operation test has been conducted by Mitsubishi Problems do not occur after the installation The following screen may appear behind another screen Then press the Alt Tab keys to bring it to the front For Windows Server 2003 R2 one of the screens shown on the left is displayed at the first installation Click the button Security Alert Driver Installation The driver software you are installing for EZSocketGOT has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windo
362. ot able to be executed Operating System The I F board was not found Uninstall and reinstall the CC Link Ver 2 board E There is no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board 259 The board more than the maximum number of sheets boards ekeseninadhe heim 1034 which was able to be installed was detected 9 262 Failed to link the device name Check that the CC Link Ver 1 board is not installed 1064 Reinstall Operating System 268 10C An error occurred during the receive process Check the programs of the personal computer and programmable controller that requested the processing to this E Dh An error occurred during transmission processing personal computer Install SW1DNC CCBD2 B then restart the PC to confirm that this error does not occur Increase the system memory and disk capacities When the error has occurred at updating Windows 9 8 1 or upgrading the operating system with the software package installed reinstall the software package Check the programs of the personal computer and programmable controller that requested the processing to this personal computer No corrective action for this error Owing to the event viewer that is generated when data are transmitted to other stations Failed to map the I O port The I O port is also used by another resource Remove other 11 option boards 283 The Dual Port Memory Area of the I F board conflicts with Remove othe
363. ote 1 0 station occupies 1 station St No 1 St No 2 St 3 St No 4 St No 5 St 6 St 7 St No 8 St No 9 st No 10 1 Remote station 2 Remote device station 3 Standby master station 4 Intelligent 5 Local station device Data link faulty station station If this station was specified as a reserve station it would not have been treated as a faulty station 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 6 Transmission Rate and Mode Settings The transmission rate and mode settings are specified with the CC Link Ver 2 Utility For details on the transmission rate mode settings refer to Section 8 2 5 The transmission rates that can be set vary depending on the overall distance For more details refer to Section 3 2 Use the same transmission rate for the master station remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station If any of the settings for at least one station is different data link cannot be established normally 5 7 Test Check the CC Link Ver 2 board and the cables Select a test item using the mode setting on the Test screen in the CC Link Ver 2 Utility The CC Link Ver 2 board test has the following four types Test type Board confirmation This test is used to check the hardware operation before configuring Hardware test the system or to check whether or not the CC Link Ve
364. out the initial data processing request flag RX18 9 With the initial data processing request flag RX18 gt OFF turns OFF the initial data processing completion flag RY 18 11 Turns ON the initial data setting request flag RY19 14 Reads out the initial data setting completion flag RX19 15 With the initial data setting completion flag RX19 r ON turns OFF the initial data setting request flag RY19 18 Reads out the initial data setting completion flag RX19 and the remote READY RX1B 19 With the initial data setting completion flag RX19 OFF and the remote READY RX1B ON perform the following Writing digital values to the CH1 digital value setting area RWwO Turning ON the analog output enable flag RYOO of the channel 11 6 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Turns ON the initial data processing request flag RX18 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV after turning on the AJOBVBTCU 68DAV 4 Writes data to the analog output enable disable setting area RWw8 on the AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAV 6 Turns ON the initial data processing completion flag RY18 on the AJeSVBTCU 68DAV 7 The initial data processing request flag RX18 is turned OFF on the AJOSVBTCU 68DAV 10 Turns OFF the initial data processing completion flag RY18 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 12 Turns ON the initial data setting request flag RY19 on the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV 13 The initial data setting completion flag RX19
365. ower off etc occurs in a local station Input for Err Sta of the CC Link Ver 2 utility for master station setting Input for Err Sta of the CC Link Ver 2 utility for master station setting Input for Err Sta of the CC Link Ver 2 utility for master station setting Input for Err Sta of the CC Link Ver 2 utility for master station setting Clear Master station Remote register RWw Remote Remote input tput RX outpu RY All points are set to off for only the receive area from the stopped local station Continue Continue Latch Remote I O station I O station Remote register Input Output RWr B Clears the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Continue Continue Retains the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Clears the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Continue Continue Retains the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error All points off Continue Retains the receive area from the remote device station having a communication error Clears the receive area from the local station having a communication error Continue Continue Retains the receive area from the local station having a communication error 1 This is because YnO refresh direction is turned off Ret
366. patible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 1X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 X 1 2 2 1 1 10 22 ms Maximum value LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 4 LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 SL Local station s sequence program scan time n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that n 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station Example When the link scan time is 3 ms and the expanded cyclic setting is double and the local station s sequence scan time is 10 ms LS X 2X 2Xn 1 1 SL ms 3 2 2 2 1 1 10 31 ms 3 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RX RY but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWr RWw 4 When writing RY to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 37 App 37 APPENDIX MELSEC 4 Master station CC Link Ver 2 board lt intelligent device station The transmission delay time between the master station CC Link Ver 2 board and the intelligent device station varies depending on the type of intelligent device station used Refer to the User s Manual for the intelligent device module to be used When reading RX and RWr from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access
367. pied station Displays the number of occupied stations Information of Displays the status of each station other stations 10 Status Displays the transient error status 11 Transient error deletes Displays the value set the expanded cyclic setting Display 12 Expanded cyclic setting quadruple 13 Remote station 2 vs points Displays the number of the remote station s points 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 4 Operating the Online operation screen The parameters are read from written to and verified with the CC Link Ver 2 board Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 120 test Test Read parameter Read parameter and target settings from CC Link board driver to CC Link utility 1 Write parameter Write parameter and target settings from CC Link utility to CC Link board driver Reset operation after writing parameter 7 White i 2 Reset CC Link boards that parameter was changed Reset all CC Link boards regardless of parameter changes Verify parameter Compare parameter and target settings between CC Link utility and CC Link board driver Verify 5 3 Note Parameter includes Parameter settings and T arget settings 1 button Reads parameters from the CC Link Ver 2 board Writes parameters to the CC Link Ver 2 board 2 button After writing the parameters
368. point is rounded up n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RX but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWr 2 When reading RX from the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access processing time of the md function App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC b Master station CC Link Ver 2 board RY Remote device station RY The following formula indicates the time taken from the moment RY of the master station CC Link Ver 2 board turns on off until the remote device station output turns on off 53 Formula Normal value a1 LR X m L8 X 1X 2Xn 1 1 Remote I O station response time ms 4 Maximum value a1 LR X m 15 X 2X 2Xn 1 1 Remote I O station response time ms 4 a1 Request processing time of the personal computer LR Link refresh time LS Link scan time refer to Appendix 3 1 m LS LR However the decimal point is rounded up n Expanded cyclic setting n time setup Note that 1 is used for a Ver 1 compatible slave station 3 The above one is shown by the example of the remote device station RY but it is also applicable for the remote device station RWw 4 When writing RY to the CC Link Ver 2 board with the md function it is necessary to add the own station access pr
369. puter are displayed with the utility Check on the Board information screen Refer to Section 8 2 2 Check on the Event Viewer screen Refer to Section 16 3 2 Check on the Device Manager screen Refer to Section 16 3 3 2 Check the LED display of the board Check the LED status Refer to Section 5 2 3 Check the error occurring at the utility Check on the Board information screen Refer to Section 8 2 2 Check the status of stations on the Other station monitor screen Refer to Section 8 2 3 Check with test Refer to Section 8 2 8 4 Check the access target device 16 Check if the board operates as set to the parameter or program by checking whether the link devices perform communication or transient send receive performs normally with the device monitor utility Refer to Section 8 3 5 Check the user program Check the arguments and returned values of the communication function Refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 When error cannot be solved If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 16 7 16 1 16 1 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 1 Verification of Problem Occurrence When problem occurs on the CC Link Ver 2 board check the following error details to find the appropriate section to go to 1 Problem for software package installation Error detail Cause determination method Corrective action The software is not normally installed Refer to Section 16 2 1 U
370. r 2008 R2 Open the Service screen from Control Panel gt Administrative Tools right click the Windows Management Instrumentation and then select the Start from the menu After starting the Windows Management Instrumentation execute the setup 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 2 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 R2 Screen Instruction ReadOnly File Detected option you selected requires that files be installed to your system or be uninstalled from your system or both read only fle D SwWINDOW S System32 MdF unc32 dll was found while performing the needed file operations on your system To perform the file operation click the Yes button otherwise click No Don t display this message again Software Installation A testing to verify its compatibility with this version of Windows Tell me why this testing is important The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Trial Security Alert Driver Installatio The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Theref
371. r 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 1 Open the Control Panel 2 Select System and Security 3 Select Change User Account Control settings 4 Set the slide bar Never notify me when and click the button App 77 APPENDIX MELSEC 2 Allowing the warning message without showing it The following shows a procedure for allowing a warning message without showing it Internet Vin 1 Open the Control Panel Internet Explorer E mail I Windows Mail Welcome Center Backup Status and Configuration Windows Media Player Documents Pictures Search E Small Business Resources Recent Items amp Windows Fax and Scan T Computer Windows Meeting Space a Windows Photo Gallery a Windows Live Messenger Download Control Panel Y Paint Default Programs gt All Programs Help and Support E 2 Select System and Security or Classic View GOE gt Control Pane Control Panel Home System and Maintenance User Accounts Get started with Windows Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer Appearance and e Security Wig personalization k Check for updates Check this computer s security status Change desktop background Allow a program through Windows Casalta e Firewall Adjust screen resolution Network and Internet Clock Language and M Connect to the Internet LY Region 0 View network status and tasks Change keyboards or
372. r 2 board is operating properly when the data link is not performed correctly Network confirmation For slave stations connected to the master station this test is used to check whether or not all modules of station No 1 to 64 All stations or a specific module Selected Station is connected correctly with Line test Hardware ule ion i y wi the CC Link cable s and the data link is enabled This test is effective when the data link is not available due to an error for example This test is used to check the connection with all modules of station Line test Software No 1 to 64 All stations or a specific module Selected station with parameters set and the data link being performed Network test This is used to test the start or stop of the data link after connecting CC Link cables or after establishing the data link 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC MEMO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perform data link in the CC Link system 6 1 Parameter Setting Items The parameter setting items and their descriptions are shown in Table 6 1 Each parameter is set using the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Refer to Appendix 8 Parameter Setting Sheet to record the set parameters For the CC Link Ver 2 utility refer to Section 8 2 1 Parameter setting items list Parameters to be set are listed on the next page Tabl
373. r 2 board using a torque within the following ranges Screw type Tightening torque range Terminal block screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89N m 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 4 3 Wiring procedure Connect a CC Link dedicated cable to the terminal block of the CC Link Ver 2 board QJ61BT11 om Master board L H Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 ZLI A pe Terminal resister Remote module 2 Terminal resister CC Link dedicated cable Simplified diagram Master board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Local module Remote module DA Terminal Terminal resistor DB resistor DG T T SLD CC Link w CC Link dedicated cable dedicated cable Connect the terminating resistors between the DA and DB terminals Connect the shielded cable of CC Link dedicated cable to the SLD terminal and ground the D class grounding the third class grounding No restrictions apply to the connection order of a master local module The cables need not be connected in the order of station number The star topology cannot be used Note however that the T branch connection can be used For the T branch connection refer to Section 5 4 4 Each mo
374. r Err Sta Hold Retry count 3 Times Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules Standby master station No No 0 Other settings Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 8 Driver WDT Monitoring Time No setting x 8ms 9 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station 10 Link refresh cycle setting ms Station information settings All connect count Modules 12 4 12 4 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 12 1 4 Creating a program MELSEC Create the program for reading the remote input RX writing the remote output RY reading the remote registers RWr and writing remote registers RWw from to the local station The following illustrates the relation between the I O operations and the user program when sending receiving data between the master station and local station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Personal computer 2 mdReceive aca mdSend 9 mdReceive mdSend Master station No 0 i Remote inputs RX RXOF to RX00 Remote outputs RY RYOF to RYOO Remote registers RWr RWrO Remote registers RWw RWwO RWw2 Local station No 1 Remote registers RWw RWw0 Remote registers RWr RWrO RWr2 Per
375. r details on the location where the sample program is stored refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual On the sample program setting a digital value of 300 enables analog voltages to be output from remote device stations Analogue output of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAV CH1 Digital output value Digital value 300 Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV The analog value corresponding to the digital value of 300 is output Remote device station station No 1 Occupies 3 stations Analog output 11 9 11 9 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 2 When Using the Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode The following describes communications in the remote net Ver 2 mode or in the remote net additional mode 11 2 1 Configuring the system In this system 2 remote device stations shall be connected Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station No 1 station No 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 11 10 11 10 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC 11 2 2 Setting
376. r option boards 11B the other Hardware s one 284 is IRQ of the I F board conflicts with the other Hardware s 11C Remove other option boards H 1E Failed to allocate the Memory Area Increase the system memory E Link Parameter is nothing or has abnormal data Reset the parameter Remove other option boards s Driver WDT error occurred Take corrective action for driver WDT error occurrence 1201 Refer to Section 16 4 2 0228 The board number of the I F board conflicts Do not use duplicate board numbers 291 123n Failed to map the Dual Port Memory Remove other option boards 125s Failed to connect the Interrupt Remove other option boards 294 The I O port of the I F board conflicts with the other Remove other option boards 1 1264 hardware s one An error occurred when Registry Database wrote out 280 The request which was not able to be processed was 1184 received from remote station 281 The retry transmission was generated by the transmission 1194 processing N N N ce 16 14 16 14 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Error message Corrective action HEX 9 295 The Board WDT error had occurred 3 1274 296 It might be failed CC Link Ver 2 board 128 The PORES OF Ser Nad occured Consult your local Mitsubishi representative ua The Target Abort error had occurred on the PCI bus Restart the personal computer Check the board installation status If
377. rC4 to RWrC7 gt RY640 to RY65F gt RWwC8 to RWwCB gt RWrC8 to RWrCB gt RY660 to RY67F RWwCC to RWwCF gt RWrCC to RWrCF gt RY680 to RY69F gt RWwDO to RWwD3 gt RWrDO to RWrD3 gt RY6AO to RY6BF gt RWwDA to RWwD7 gt RWrD4 to RWrD7 gt RY6CO to RY6DF gt RWwD8 to RWwDB gt RWrD8 to RWrDB gt RY6E0 to RY6FF gt RWwDC to RWwDF gt RWrDC to RWrDF gt RY700 to RY71F RWwEO to RWwE3 gt RWrE0 to RWrE3 gt RY720 to RY73F gt RWwE4 to RWwE7 gt RWrE4 to RWrE7 gt RY740 to RY75F gt RWwES to RWwEB RWrE8 to RWrEB gt RY760 to RY77F gt RWwEC to RWwEF gt RWrEC to RWrEF gt RY780 to RY79F gt RWwFO to RWwF3 gt RWrF0 to RWrF3 gt RY7AO to RY7BF gt RWwF4 to RWwF7 gt RWrF4 to RWrF7 gt RY7CO to RY7DF gt RWWwF8 to RWwFB gt RWrF8 to RWrFB gt RY7EO to RY7FF RWwFC to RWwFF RWIFC to RWrFF App 66 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 9 Combinations with Existing Software This section describes the combinations of boards with existing software There is no restriction when using CC Link Ver 2 board with other MELSEC interface boards or MELSOFT products on the same personal computer For the restrictions of the applicable operating environment and applicable access target refer to the manual of each product App 67 App 67 APPENDIX Appendix 10 Checking Serial Number and Function Version App 68 CC Link Ver 2 board a Checking serial number and function version MELSEC This s
378. ram from an unknown publisher to make changes to this computer Program CCBD2UTL exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer Show details Yes No Change when these notifications appear App 74 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 15 2 Methods for preventing the warning message The user account control UAC function prevents a crash e g prevention of start up of a program which executes unintended operation Before setting this function grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message 1 Disabling the user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function a Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 GX Internet 1 Open the Control Panel Internet Explorer E mail Windows Mail m Documents Welcome Center Backup Status and Configuration Windows Media Player Pictures Music Search Small Business Resources Recent Items 8 Windows Fax and Scan s Computer Windows Meeting Space Network g Windows Photo Gallery Connect To amp Windows Live Messenger Download Control Panel Y Paint Default Programs gt All Programs Help and Support a Go 2 Select User Accounts Control Panel Home Classic View Clock Lan Chang
379. rammable ON Clears compulsorily controller CPU STOP Indicates the communication status between SB0080 Other station data remotelocalinteligent device standby master stations 5 8 b0 link status OFEA stations normal Ten ON Faulty station exists information is stored SW0080 to Indicates the occurrence of a watchdog timer error in other SB0081 Other station stations 8 b1 watchdog timer error SW0084 to SW0087 status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Indicates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations SB0082 Other station fuse SW0088 to SW008B 5E8x b2 blown status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data linking Geri atus woe toSWooaF OFF No change ON Change detected SB0090 Indicates the line status of the host BE9 b0 Host line status OFF Normal ON Abnormal line disconnection Indicates whether there is a transient transmission error SB0094 Transient SW0094 to SW0097 9 b4 transmission status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station SB0095 9 b5 transient OFF Normal je transmission status ON Abnormal SB00B4 Standby master Stores test result of Line test 1 Line test 2 BEBu b4 station test result Normal 5 ON Abnormal App 21 App 21
380. rams However only the CC Link Ver 2 board in which the driver WDT error has occurred is recognized as an error station on the network When using driver WDT function set the monitoring timer considering the margin of the personal computer load 2 For the troubleshooting refer to section 16 4 2 4 FUNCTION nass MELSEC 4 3 6 Station based block data assurance function The block data assurance per station setting refers to a prevention of separating cyclic data to new data and old data Cyclic data may be separated between new and old data depending on the timing of the link refresh This function prevents read write data per slave station from being separated between new and old data Only by setting parameters in the CC Link Ver 2 utility it can be prevent separation of the data When using block data assurance per station setting SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 17T or later and CC Link Ver 2 board ROM version 2B or later are required 1 The target device of the block data assurance per station setting The target device of the block data assurance per station setting is link device RX RY RWr RWw When the block data assurance per station is enabled the link refresh is executed between the CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer RX buffer RY buffer RWr buffer RWw buffer and the area assigned to each station in the link device The area of the link device assigned to each station is the respective slave station and data will be a
381. ransient transmission is executed in several runs by dividing the number of request data into sizes inside the md functions that can be received by the opposite station In addition after the communication line is opened the first md function performs extra transient transmission in order to obtain detailed information of the programmable controller App 46 App 46 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 4 Communication with the Redundant CPU This section explains communication with the Redundant CPU when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used 1 Incorporation into redundant system In a Redundant CPU system be sure to set the CC Link Ver 2 board to a local station Master station Standby master station Control syste Standby system g e TERNI asl je Master local interface board 0 J eor tees eorreneenss 069006905 Station No 2 Terminal resistor Station No 1 Station No 0 L Terminal resistor CC Link 2 Access to the Redundant CPU a Redun
382. re branch cable Maximum number of connected stations on the branch line The total number of connected stations depends on 6 stations per braich the CC Link specifications Connected cable The CC Link dedicated high performance cable cannot be used example FANC SBH Mixed use of the CC Link dedicated cables made by different manufacturers is not allowed Mixed use of the Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables made by different manufacturers is not allowed CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 10 corresponding CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor connection method Only when the I F board A 1S J61BT11 or A 1S J61QBT11 is used as the master station When the QJ61BT11 is used as the master station connect the 110 Q resistor that is supplied with the module For the connection method refer to Section 5 4 3 100 5 1 2W X 4 Connect between DA and DG DB and DG both ends Connection CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Use a commercially available terminal resistor of Q81BD J61BT11 110 5 1 2 W resistance 110 and 130 Q resistors that are supplied with the CC Link Ver 2 board master local modules cannot be used Master module A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 Terminal resistor T branch terminal block connector Terminal block Off the shelf terminal block Connector Connector NECA4202 for the FA sensor IEC947 5 2 c
383. remo roson x o x e o _ Ver2Remote device stain o o x x o jVezmeigmdmkesam o o x lolo x1 Set smaller station numbers to the remote net ver 1 mode stations and larger station numbers to the remote net ver 2 mode stations System configuration with remote net ver 1 mode stations only is available while system configuration with remote net ver 2 mode stations only is not allowed 2 The following table shows the remote station points setting options available for the expanded cyclic setting and the occupied station count Mode setting Table 6 3 Remote station points setting options Occupied station count Expanded Station type 1 2 Occupies 3 Occupies 4 cyclic No setting 4 station stations stations stations 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Single Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ver 1 remote device fixation station station station station station Ver 1 intelligent device 32 points 32 points 64 points 96 points 128 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved station station station station station 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points 0 points Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Double station station station station station Ver 2 remote device 32 points 32 points 96 points 160 points 224 points Ver 2 intelligent dev
384. rget setting list Displays the setting details of the selected target channel No as a list 7 Beton Selecting the row to be changed in the Target Setting List and clicking this button changes the registered data Double clicking the row makes the same result 8 button e FR in t Target Setting List and clicking this button deletes the data of the registered ogical station No 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 7 Operating the Memory I O test screen The Memory I O test screen diagnoses the dual port memory and I O port used by the CC Link Ver 2 board 1 Before starting a diagnostic operation be sure to disconnect the external cable 2 To switch windows during a diagnostic operation click the button to stop the diagnosis and then switch screens Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings 1 1 Channel No ChannelNo 81 2 p Diagnoses Me v Address Bevit Reset board 5 Memory FEASODDD FEAFFFFFH 140 port DBOD DBFFH 0 Status Start 3 1 Channel No Select the channel to be diagnosed 2j Diagnoses Displays the addresses of the 2 port memory and I O port being diagnosed the number of diagnoses and the status 3 button Starts the 2 port memory and I O port diagnosis on the selected channel 4 button Stops the currently executing 2 port memory and I O port diagnosis
385. rguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x1 own station RX Device No 0x0 5 Writes 0x5555 to the remote register RWwO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station with the read out remote input register RXO ON Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x24 own station RWw Device No 0x0 8 Reads out the remote register RWr0 of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x25 own station RWr Device No 0x0 12 6 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC 12 1 5 Executing the data link Turn ON the local stations and the master station in this order and then start the data link 1 Checking the data link status The following describes how to check the operation status of the master station and local stations under normal data link condition a Checking the master station and local stations Check the status of the master station and local stations 1 Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows 1 15 RUN ERR The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally No error has occurred gt 0 lt Data are being transmitted 5 Data are being received 2 Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information of the CC Link Ver
386. riptions Existence If exist type the number of boards and so on Situation checked with disconnecting other option boards Failure content a b Failure description details Example The LINK LED does not turn on even though the computer is turned on Occurrence frequency c Occurrence condition If the failure occurs only in the specific case inform the occurrence condition noticed c Troubleshooting result Inform the following descriptions The result of troubleshooting performed The situation when checking with other boards or computers Example Event ID 295 The Board WDT error had occurred error is displayed on the event viewer when the personal computer is started It also occurs when mounting the problem board with another computer Other boards mounted with the computer works properly 16 31 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC MEMO pens 16 32 APPENDIX APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 1 Buffer memory details App 1 The following describes the details of the items shown in the buffer memory list in Section 3 4 1 Remote input RX and remote output RY When the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected the number of points indicated below is used a Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored
387. rmally recognized If it is uninstalled or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen 16 16 16 16 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver 16 4 1 Board WDT error When the board WDT error occurred check the following items Is the board installed properly Check the board installation status Does the board operate on other personal computer After formatting the HD install the operating system again Repair or replace the personal computer If any of the above corrective actions do not help refer to Section 16 7 16 4 2 Driver WDT error When the driver WDT error occurred check the following items Has the error occurred due to the system overload Reset the board Refer to Section 8 2 7 Operating the temporarily Memory I O test screen Restart the personal computer Is the same error occurred repeatedly Remove the factor of system overload Is the system overloaded constantly Disable the driver WDT function or increase the driver WDT monitoring time Refer to Section 8 2 5 2 Other settings screen 1 A driver WDT error may occur when the system is overloaded temporarily due to the following factors Windows start processing at the personal computer startup Operation of a device driver such as a graphic board Operation of other software applications If any of the above corrective actions do not help refer to Sectio
388. rror status 6 Board type Product information IRQ No ROM version 12 Present Error 13 Link scan time ms 14 Link refresh time ms 15 LED information 16 button Displays the status of the error currently detected An error was detected in the station No station type setting the Setting error SN R transmission rate setting or the mode setting legal An error arising from some other cause was detected Displays the model name of the CC Link Ver 2 board Displays the product information serial No function version Displays the IRQ No Displays the ROM version Displays the 2 port memory Displays the I O ports An error code of the error currently identified on the CC Link Ver 2 board is indicated in hexadecimal notation When no error is currently detected No Error is displayed Displays the maximum minimum and current link scan times Displays the maximum current and minimum link refresh time of the CC Link Ver 2 board Block data assurance per Station indicates 0 when disabled Displays the following LED states Flashing A WDT error has RUN Green Operating normally occurred or the board is being reset No communication error There is a faulty ERR All stations are faulty has occurred or the station or station No board is being reset is duplicated Due to cable disconnection or noise VS Responses received TIME affecting the transmission fromal stations path
389. rs Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED displays on the corresponding Is the corresponding local station performing data local station link Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of the remote output RY buffer memory of the master station Is data read from the correct address of the remote input RX buffer memory of the local Check the user program station Check the user program Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters
390. rsion 1 11M or later 1 Programs can be created and executed on the 64 bit version operating system 7 2 Programs can be created on the 32 bit version operating system however the following dialog box appears and cannot be executed When using Windows XP 32 bit version C MELSEC MTEST exe 64 bit version user program C MELSEC MTEST exe is not a valid Win32 application When using Windows 7 32 bit version C MELSEC MTEST exe a The version of this file is not compatible with the version of Windows you re running Check your computer s system information to see whether you need an x86 32 bit or x64 64 bit version of the program and then contact the software publisher b User programs created in the Japanese environment work only in the Japanese environment c User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the specifications of CC Link Ver 2 board 3 1 General Specifications The following table shows the general specifications of CC Link Ver 2 board 010 55 2610 75 C EE 5 to 95 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity Under Intermittent vibration acceleration 5 to 8 4 Hz E cm 3 5 mm 10 times each in X Y Z Compliant with 2 Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 and 8 4 to 150 Hz directions IEC 61131 2 Under Continuous vibration Frequency Const
391. ruction at standby master Switching is complete OFF Not executed ON Switching complete Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Stop instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment completion status OFF Not complete ON Stop complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBOOOC signal can be executed or not OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgement status temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgement completion status temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station established Specified station number is invalid Indicates the acknowledgement status temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged x1 Can be used for the master station only x2 Can be used for the standby master station only App 18 MELSEC APPENDIX MELSEC Pipes Number Name Description Online mp Master Local Offline SB004B 5E4n b11 SB004C 5E4n b12 SB004D 5E4n b13 SB004E 5E4n b14 SB004F 5E4n b15 SB0050 5 60 SB005A 5 5 b10 SBO05B 5 5 b11 SB005C 5 5 b12 SB005D 5 5 b13 SB005E 5 5 b14 SB005F 5 5 b15 SB0060 5E6x 60 SB0061 5E6x b1 580062
392. s This program installed correctly If this screen is displayed during the installation or at the installation completion click This program installed correctly If this screen is displayed when the installation is aborted click the button and close the screen Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings An incorrect module may be installed Af Windows Security e Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software gt Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device See details 16 6 Click Install this driver software anyway 16 6 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Name Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Always trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How c software is safe to install MELSEC Screen Instruction Confirm the publisher is MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION and click the Install button This screen may be displayed a couple of times 16 Bit Application Support Disable 16 bit application supportto prevent 16 bit applications from running When installing Environment of MELSOFT this screen may be displayed Click the Enabled button F EnvMEL EnvMELENG SETUP EXE is a 16 bit application You
393. s Stations to be set as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station This station does not become data link faulty Station number 4 occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Master Local station Local station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station 1 station Remote station 4 stations Station number 7 Master Local station Local station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station 1 station Remote station 4 stations If any of the remote stations local stations intelligent device stations or standby master station that has been specified as an error invalid station is also specified as a reserved station the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting function Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 5 for setting details 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 4 3 Checking operations for each station data link stop restart The circuit test Hardware circuit test Software and a Network test can be performed in the CC Link Ver 2 utility For more details refer to Section 8 2 8
394. s 1 start complete flag RX01 and Axis 2 start complete flag RX02 14 With the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 OFF turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 With the Axis 2 start complete flag RX02 OFF turns OFF the Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 Parameters set in the sample program MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Board Turns ON the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 andthe Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Writes the start No to the Axis 1 positioning start No setting area RWwO and Axis 2 positioning start No setting area RWw8 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Turns ON the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 starts zero point return operation The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 starts positioning operations for axes 1 and 2 and turns ON the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 Axis 2 start complete flag RX02 and Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 When positioning of Axis 1 or 2 is completed the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the Axis 1 BUSY flag RX04 or Axis 2 BUSY flag RX05 respectively 11 Turns OFF the Axis 1 positioning start flag RY 10 and Axis 2 positioning start flag RY 11 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 12 The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns OFF the Axis 1 start complete flag RX01 and Axis 2 start complete flag 15 Turns OFF the Axis 1 servo ON flag RY20 and Axis 2 servo ON flag RY40 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 For z
395. s f a system configuration example to explain the CC Link Ver 2 board and intelligent device station setting parameter setting programming and operation check For details on the intelligent device stations refer to the RS 232C Interface Module type AJ65BT R2 User s Manual 13 1 Configuring a System In this example a system consisting of a master station and one intelligent device station AJ65BT R2 as shown below is used Master station Personal computer Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Terminal resistor Occupies 1 station Intelligent device station station No 1 AJ65BT R2 2000 EI RS 232C module resistor External device 13 1 13 1 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 2 Setting the Master Station The following shows the master station setting 13 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section Channel No setting switch Switch No Setting 1 OFF 2 OFF 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 2 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings s
396. s local stations Remote module Generic term for AJ65BTBO OO AJ65BTCO OO AJeSBT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI A852GOT etc Intelligent module Generic term for modules such as the AJ65BT R2 that can perform transient transmission Cyclic transmission Function that periodically updates the contents of the remote I O and remote register Transient transmission Function by which data communications are available between 1 1stations at any given timing by specifying a target station Remote net mode Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC Link remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station The remote net mode has three different modes remote net ver 1 mode remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode Remote net ver 1 mode Mode in which compatibility with the CC Link Ver 1 board is achieved Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used to replace the CC Link Ver 1 board as a maintenance product Remote net ver 2 mode Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic points and configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Select this mode when adding a ver 2 compatible station to the existing system to increase the number of cyclic points Board WDT Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the operation
397. setting values for transmission reception to the buffer memory on the AJ65BT R2 Arguments to be set Word byte unit designation 0 Transmission area head address designation 200H Transmission area size designation 200H Reception area head address designation 400H Reception area size designation 200H Transmission timeout time designation 0 2 Turns ON the initialization request signal RY4 3 Turns ON the initialization request signal RY4 of the AJ65BT R2 4 If the initialization of the AJ65BT R2 is normal 5 Reads out the initialization normal complete signal the initialization normal complete signal RX4 RX4 turns ON If not the initialization error complete signal RX5 turns ON 6 With the initialization normal complete signal RX4 7 Turns OFF the initialization request signal ON the initialization request signal RY4 is turned RY4 8 The AJ65BT R2 turns OFF the initialization normal complete signal RX4 and the initialization error complete signal RX5 13 6 13 6 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT R2 MELSEC 13 4 2 Data transmission The following illustrates the relation between the intelligent device station s I O operations and the user program on the PC and their data transmission The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 Personal computer Intelligent device station station No 1 User pro
398. sonal computer E mdSend 5 2 mdSend 12 5 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Master station User Program 2 Reads out the remote input RXO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x1 own station RX Device No 0x0 3 Turnr ON the remote output RYO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station with the read out remote input RX0 ON Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x2 own station RY Device No 0x0 6 Reads out the remote register RWr0 of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x25 own station RWr Device No 0x0 7 Writes OxAAAA to the remote register RWwO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the master station if the read out remote register RWr0 is 0x5555 Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x24 own station RWw Device No 0x0 12 6 CC Link 2 CC Link Ver 2 MELSEC Local station User Program 1 Turn ON the remote output RYO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station Arguments to be set Station No OxFF own station Device type 0x2 own station RY Device No 0x0 gt 4 Reads out the remote input RXO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the local station A
399. specifications Item Specification Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Can select from 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps Overall distance Varies according to the transmission rate Refer to Section 3 2 2 3 2 3 maximum transmission distance Maximum number of connected stations 64 Refer to Section 3 2 1 for the conditions for the number of connected stations master station In remote net ver 1 mode 1 or 4 station s Can be changed on lt lt Parameter settings gt gt in the Occupied station count CC Link Ver 2 utility when mounted to local station In remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode 1 to 4 station s Can be changed on lt lt Parameter settings gt gt in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Remote I O RX RY 2048 points Remote register RWw 256 points master station remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station Remote register RWr 256 points remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Remote I O RX RY 32 points local station is 30 points Remote station local station intelligent Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station device station standby master station Number of link points per link Remote register RWr 4 points remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station
400. ssured CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer link device Station Station Data number 1 number 1 assurance Station Station Data number 2 number 2 assurance Link refresh Station Station Data number 3 number 3 assurance Data assurance 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Access method for link devices The access method varies from the user program to the link device depending on the setting of block data assurance per station a In the case of block data assurance per station is disabled Accessing reading writing the data from the user program is directly carried out with respect to the link device of CC Link Ver 2 board To prevent separation of the data it is necessary to implement the data Separation prevention function in the user program This explains the case where personal computer transmits the data RYO to programmable controller X0 cyclically 1 The link device RYO of the CC Link Ver 2 board on the sending side personal computer becomes ON when the user program turns ON the RYO 2 By a link scan the link device data RYO is stored in a link device RXO of CC Link system master local module on the receiving side 3 By a link refresh the data RXO is stored in a device of the CPU module Sending side personal computer Receiving side programmable controller Personal computer CC Link Ver 2 board i H CC Link CPU module i master and local i 1 module RY
401. stored in the link special registers 2 Perform retry processing as necessary according to the system specifications App 49 App 49 APPENDIX Appendix 5 Comparisons with CC Link Ver 1 Board and CC Link Module MELSEC Differences between the CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link Ver 1 board and functional comparisons between the CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link module are shown here Appendix 5 1 Differences from the CC Link Ver 1 board Max No of I O points No of link points par station The following describes the main differences between the CC Link Ver 2 board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 and the CC Link Ver 1 board ABOBDE J61BT11 A8BO0BDE J61BT 13 For details other than those shown below refer to Chapter 3 1 Performance Specifications Remote I O RX RY CC Link Ver 2 board 8192points Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link Ver 1 board A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 2048points Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Expanded cyclic setting 2048points 256points 2048points 256points 1 time setup 2 time setup 4 time setup 8 time setup Remote I O RX RY 32points 32points 64points 128points 32points Remote register RWw 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Remote register RWr 4points 8points 16points 32points 4points Number of link points par number of occupied station count
402. switches set correctly Isnt the station No duplicated Corresponding module failure Station No switch y Is the transmission rate set correctly YES Set the correct transmission rate Yv Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Is the communication cable wired correctly 1 YES Y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 failure Set the correct station No y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Complete x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance between stations 16 29 16 29 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 6 Measures for Slow Personal Computer Operation 16 30 This section explains the probable causes and corrective measures when the operation of a personal computer becomes slow 1 Probable causes The load due to the link refresh function may be the cause When the block data assurance per station setting is enabled the CC Link Ver 2 board driver executes the link refresh between CC Link Ver 2 board driver buffer and CC Link Ver 2 board link device based on the cycle set in the parameter setting Other settings screen of the CC Link Ver 2 utility At this time if the following causes are overlapped the processing time of the link refresh among the total processing capacity of t
403. t 10 5 gt Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Input for Err Sta Hold Clear Check 1 11 i 12 gt Station information settings All connect count 64 m Clear 13 Occupied Sta Station type Expanded cyclic Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station singe 1 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station singe Occupies 1 station 3 3 Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station singe Occupies 1 station No Sta No v 4 4 Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station singe Occupies 1 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station singe 1 station Ver 1 Remote 1 0 station single Occupies 1 station Set the transmission rate ________ 4 Transmission rate Set the transmission rate 5 Mode Set the operation mode Make the expanded cyclic setting of the CC Link Ver 2 board This setting is allowed Expanded cyclic when Sta Type is Local station and the mode is set to other than Remote net Ver 1 mode 7 Occupied Sta Set the occupied stations count for the CC Link Ver 2 board For local station only 8 Input for Err Sta Set how to handle input data in the event of a data link error 9 Other settings button Displays the Other settings screen Default button Sets default values to the parameters Refer to table 6 1 in Section 6 1 Check button Checks the currently set parameters for any errors Set the total
404. t device stations 3 Set double and occupied 2 stations to the Ver 2 intelligent device station 12 12 12 12 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 12 2 4 Creating a program Personal computer MELSEC Create a program for reading the remote input RX writing the remote output RY reading the remote registers RWr and writing the remote registers RWw for local stations of station 5 The programming procedure for station No 5 is the same as in the remote net Ver 1 mode Refer to Section 12 1 4 1 For the local station of station No 5 device Nos of the remote input RX and remote output RY and addresses of the remote registers RWr RWw are changed Master station No 0 Remote inputs RX RXOF to RX00_ RX1F to RX10 RX6F to RX60 RX7D to RX70 RX8F to RX80_ RX9F to RX90 RXCF to RXCO RXDD to RXDO RXEF to RXEO Local station No 1 Personal computer Remote outputs RY RYOF to RYOO RYAF to RY10 RY6F to RY6O _ RY7D to RY70 _RY8F to RY80 _ RY9F to RY90 RYGF to RYCO RYDD to RYDO RYEFtoRYEO _ i i Remote outputs RY RYOF to to RY10 i gt 1 i i i i i RY6F to RY60 I RY7D to RY70 to _ 9 to RY90 Remote inputs RX _RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX1
405. t input reception data The following shows the target buffer memory areas Remote I O station Remote device station Local station station number 1 station number 2 station number 3 Local station Master station station number 4 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY Station number 1 Input Station number 1 gt Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 2 gt Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote ontput RY Station number 2 Station number 1 Output zm Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 ef nter sus s 1 Senon meta Station number 3 gt Station number Station number 4 Remote register Station number 1 Remote register RWw Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 2 L 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw E Station number 1 Remote register Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Sta
406. t other station then enter the value of the logical station number set with the CC Link Ver 2 utility for the station number 2 Do not designate a remote I O station or an intelligent device station connected to the CC Link as the monitor destination If designated an error will occur 3 When own station is selected in the network setting network No 0 and station No 255 are displayed as the network status 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 5 Setting the device to be monitored This section describes how to set up the device to be monitored 1 Menu selection Select Setting Device setting on the menu bar 2 Dialog box For batch monitoring For 16 point entry monitoring xi Desc Seting 1 gt Device 1 Device Type LW direct link register Device Type ER extension file register Network No Block No pooo TER 2 HEX CDEC C OCT 00000000 4 2 9 DeviceNo d 3 NE Register Device List 4 LINE F Bit device Word device Double Word device LW1 00000000 5 6 Set a type of a device whose value is to be changed Enter a block number for ER Enter a network number for LX LY LB LW LSB and LSW Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG To monitor the own station device of the CC Link Ver 2 board set as shown below Own station device to be moni
407. t the bottom left of the back cover Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MANUALS HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 1 Section 2 1 Section 2 3 Section 3 2 1 Section 3 4 Section Section 4 3 4 Section 4 4 5 Chapter 5 Section 5 1 to 5 6 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 2 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section Chapter 7 Section 7 1 to 7 3 Section 8 1 to 8 3 Section 9 1 Section 9 2 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 5 1 Section 11 1 2 Section 11 2 2 Section 12 1 2 Section 12 1 3 Section 12 2 2 Section 12 2 3 Section 13 2 1 Section 13 2 2 Section 14 2 1 Section 14 2 2 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Section 16 1 to 16 6 Section 2 1 changed 3 2 1 Section 2 2 1 changed 2 3 Section 2 2 2 changed 2 2 Chapter 7 changed Chapter 5 Section 5 2 changed 5 3 Section 7 7 changed 5 4 4 Section 7 8 1 changed 5 5 Section 7 8 2 changed 5 6 Section 7 4 changed Chapter 7 Section 7 4 1 changed 7 1 16 2 3 Section 7 4 2 changed 7 3 Section 8 1 7 changed Appendix 10 Section 15 3 5 changed Chapter 15 Chapter 15 changed 16 Section 15 1 1 changed 16 1 Section 15 1 4 changed 16 3 2 Section 15 1 2 changed 16 4 3 Section 15 3 15 3 1 15 3 2 changed 16 5 Section 15 6 changed 16 6 Appendix 4 4 1 changed 3 4 Section 2 2 4 changed Appendix 11 Appendix 4 2 changed 1 Section15 3 3 changed Appendix 2 1 Section 15 3 4 changed Appendix 2 2 Chapter 5 changed Appen
408. t the master station differs from the mode set at the standby master station When the master station is in the remote net ver 1 mode the local station setting is the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode When the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode the local station is in the remote net additional mode If an error has occurred correct the mode parameter of the master station local station standby master station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions The following explains the transient transmission functions 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission functions The following functions can be used for transient transmission Target station Reads data from the buffer memory of the designated mdReceive station or the programmable controller CPU device of the Master station designated station local station intelligent device station Writes data to the buffer memory of the designated mdSend station or the programmable controller CPU device of the designated station Reads data from the randomly specified CPU device of mdRandR the specified station Writes data to the randomly designated CPU device of mdRandW DS 7 the designated station Local station Sets the CPU device bit device of the designated mdDevSet device Resets the CPU device bit device of the designated mdDevRst devi 9 Transient transmission is performed only when these
409. ta link status of each station SW0080 0 Normal 6800 1 Data link error occurrence SW0081 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bl bO 6814 Other station data 16 15 14 13 t0 4 3 2 Swooa2 ink status m mw a 2 sauja efa eea SW0083 swoos3 64 6839 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the watchdog timer error status on each station SW0084 0 No watchdog timer error 6841 1 Watchdog timer error occurrence 510085 Other station b15 b14 b13 b12 to 6854 watchdog timer swo084 SWO0086 error occurrence SWO0085 1 686 Slane swo0s6 SW0087 ee 6871 Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station SW0088 0 Normal 6881 1 Abnormal SW0089 b15 b14 b13 b12 to 6894 Other station fuse SW0088 SWO08A blown status swo089 68 SWO008A SW008B SWO08B 68Bu Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data SWOO8C link 68 0 No change 1 Change occurred 680 Other station b15 b14 switch change SWO08C 16 15 SWO008E status 1 68 SWO08D 32 31 SWOO8F SWOO8E 48 47 68 SWO008F 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on X5 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC P oiu Number Name Description Online ru Master Local Off
410. ta tiit tar oe UN UILLAM TI A 19 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL tert e eee ut e etree engl A 20 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ssssssssssssssseseeneneene nennen nnnm nnne enr nensi nnne nnne A 21 PACKING LEIST 4 ante ea i eh e c rie i oe to Hee ED HR FIXE ML A dale A 22 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 10 1 1 Features of the CC Link Ver 2 Board ccccccecesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeceaeeseaeeeeaeeesneeseaeessaeseaeessaeeeeaneetans 1 2 1 2 Features of the CC Link System eese censere etna ette 1 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1t02 8 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link Ver 2 Board sse 2 1 2 2 Notes on the System Configuration nennen nennen nre nre 2 2 2 9 Operating Environment ccce ee devia a a ee du ve ded doa 2 4 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 12 3 1 General sets nen 3 1 93 2 Pertormarice SpecifiCatloris en a eb ende en demere 3 2 3 2 1 Maximum number of connected modules 2 cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeneeesaeeeeieeeeneees 3 4 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance for 1 00 3 6 3 2 3 Maximum overall cable distance for 1 10 3 8 3 3 CC Link Dedicated Cable Specifications
411. tandby master station as an intelligent device station Change the parameter after all transient requests are completed or before any are requested Set a longer monitor time setting value If an error persists check the requesting station and cables Set the target station to a local station or intelligent device station Always turn RY off and then issue a request after the response is completed 15 3 15 ERROR CODE MELSEC Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error description Cause of error details Corrective action Master Local station station Transient Am The numbers for request data and communication number Check the line O O response data do not match mismatch error The same channel cannot be used at the same time Change The selected channel is already in use the channel number or try not to use the same channel at the same time Execute the mdSend instruction after a while Check to see if Receiving channel in The channel of the target station is more than one request is made use already in use to the channel of the target station from own station and or multiple stations Increase the arrival monitor time if this error occurred in the mdReceive instruction and when The arrival monitor time has exceeded another station was executing when the resend count is 0 or the the SEND instruction mdSend mdReceive instruction was executed instruction in case of the CC Link when the mdRecei
412. tart menu or Quick Access Menu of Windows 4 Append A and execute Disk1 Setup exe of the CD ROM 5 Install the utility again by following the installation procedure refer to Section 7 2 6 Perform the uninstallation 7 Ifthe utility cannot be uninstalled normally check if the personal computer has any problem Operating Environment Refer to Section 2 3 Checking personal computer and operating system Refer to Section 16 3 1 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 16 7 16 4 16 4 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 1 Operation for the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled 1 Enable the creation of 8 3 filename 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 3 Display the Run screen from the Start menu or Quick Access Menu of Windows 9 4 Append G and execute Disk1 Setup exe on the CD ROM 5 Perform the uninstallation The option to append G to Setup exe is supported only by SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 15R or later 16 5 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 16 2 3 When the instruction displayed on the screen is not effective at installation The following table shows the instruction when the screen is displayed 1 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windowse 8 1 Screen Instruction This screen appears when user account control is enabled Click Allow or the Yes button User
413. tation Is the corresponding local station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers Do the settings match Is the QJ61BT11 of function version A or the A80BD J61BT11 set to occupy 2 or 3 stations Is the data link stop SB0002 turned on Check the user program Check the LED displays on the corresponding local station Check the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Check the user program Check the user program Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the maximum communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Set the number of occupied stations to 1 or 4 Is the data link restart SB0000 turned on Check the user program Check the data lnk restart result 9010041 Is the corresponding station disconnected Do the parameters for the number of modules and station information
414. tations Number of connected modules SW0072 6721 Stores the reserved station setting status SW0074 0 Not reserved station 6741 1 Reserved station SW0075 b15 b14 b13 b12 to 6751 Reserved station sw0074 16 15 SW0076 specified status 1 swoo7s 32 31 676v SW0076 SWO0077 eO 6774 Stores the error invalid station setting status SW0078 0 Other than error invalid station 6784 1 Error invalid station SWO0079 b15 b14 b13 b12 to 679m Error invalid sw0078 16 station specified SW007A status sw0079 32 67 SWO07A SW007B swo07B 67 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 4 This register checks and stores the status only at link startup App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC uni Number Description Online xe um Master Local Offline Indicates the temporary error invalid status SWO007C 0 Normal status 67 1 Temporary error invalid status SWO007D b15 b14 b13 012 to b3 bO 67 Temporary error swoo7c 16 15 14 13 to 4 1 SWOO7E invalid status swoo7p 32 31 30 29 to 20 17 67 SWOO7E 48 47 46 45 to 36 33 SWO007F swoo7F 64 63 62 61 to 52 49 67 Numbers 1 to 64 the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the da
415. temporary error invalid stations are specified Specifies a temporary error invalid station Sw0004 0 Not specified as a temporary error invalid station 6044 1 Specified as a temporary error invalid station SWO0005 b15 b14 b12 to b3 b2 605m Temporary error SW0004 invalid station SW0006 specification 1 910005 606 510006 50 0007 SWO0007 6074 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Sets the station for which line tests are executed SW0008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed for all stations 608u setting 01 to 64 Specified station only Stores the communication status between CC Link Ver 2 board and personal computer pics Module status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with SWO041 Data link restart SB0000 641u result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Refresh Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby SW0043 instruction at master switching 6434 standby master 0 Normal Switching result Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 x x x x x x x App 22 App 22 1 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on APPENDIX MELSEC Availability Number Name Description wee um ome Master Local Offline SW0045 6454 Data link stop
416. ter Management 11 2 2006 9 54 PM S 0060 11 2 2006 9 53 E Ej Data Sources th f Il ell Event Viewer 11 2 2006 9 54 PM Owing screen appears Music Information Services IIS Manager 9 4 2007 11 45 AM More F iSCSI Initiator 11 2 2006 9 54 PM CI th C ti Y b tt Rum Local cur Poly 120s a56 PM ICK the S on nue or Y eS button CE ag Memory Diagnostics Tool 11 2 2006953 PM Print Management 11 2 2006 9 55 PM 3E Computer amp 9 User Account Control WE Gu MES Reliability and Performance Monitor 11 2 2006 9 53 PM MIU d eem ih Services 11 2 2006 9 53 PM Windows needs your permission to continue 2o you want to allow the following program to make Puis o Mortem Configuration 20093300 changes to this computer 9 AutoPlay Task Scheduler TENOR AM If you started this action continue x 189 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 11 2 2006 9 53 PM Vb Backup and Restore Microsoft Management Console us Program name Microsoft Management Console Default Programs Microsoft Windows Verified publisher Microsoft Windows Ease of Access Cente 1A Fonts V Details Continue V Show details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Change when these notifications appear 13 items coro roo 5 Select Local Policies Action View Help B Security Settings Name Description Account Po
417. ter RWr data of the intelligent device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The program uses the mdReceive function to read the remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory Personal computer Master station 1 Intelligent device station CC Link Ver 2 board Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWr _ fuac data such i Remote register RWr as present feed value Fi Rwo RWrO RWr1 RWr1 D E RWr2 RWr2 RWr3 RWr3 RWr4 RWr4 RWr5 RWr5 RWr i RWr6 RWr8 RWr8 RWr9 RWr9 RWrA RWrA RWB j RWB RWrC RWrC RWrD RWrD RWrE RWrE j RWrF RWr10 to RWrFF Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module E Single axis present feed value I Single axis feed speed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 2 Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station by transient transmission The transient transmission is a transmission method that sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by designating an opposite station at an arbitrary timing When writing data to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station using the mdSend function 1 The program uses the mdSend function to wr
418. ter station station No 0 Personal computer Intelligent device station station No 1 User program CC Link Ver 2 board i Remote inputs RX 3 9 Ca 1 RX79 initial data setting complete flag RX7B remote station ready flag 4 10 mdReceive Ryo 1 J RY10 axis 1 positioning start flag i44 RY11 EE EMEN RY11 axis 2 positioning start flag RY20 RY40 RY79 Remote registers RWw 6 EE RWwO RWWwO axis 1 positioning start No 6 RWw8 P OT E EES S S TTE TI EIE E EAI NET EE A E EET ETETEA EEE E E 1 When the remote net Ver 2 mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 1 When the remote net additional mode is selected refer to the figure in Section 4 4 7 2 14 7 14 7 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC User Program CC Link Ver 2 Board 1 Turns ON the initial data setting request flag Turns ON the initial data setting request flag RY79 RY79 on the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Reads out the initial data setting complete flag The AJ65BT D75P2 S3 turns ON the initial data RX79 setting complete flag RX79 With the initial data setting complete flag RX79 Writes the start No to the Axis 1 positioning start ON writes start No to the Axis 1 positioning start No
419. ter which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard Refer to Section 2 3 Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Securely mount the board to the PCI slot of the mounting device If the board is not mounted correctly this may lead to malfunctioning failure or cause the board to fall When mounting the board take care not to become injured by the components that are installed or surrounding materials When installing the board take care not to contact with other boards When mounting the board take care not to become injured by the components that are installed or surrounding materials When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring always attach the computer s main cover Failure to do so may cause an electric shock 5 3 4 Setting Channel Numbers Channel number is set per board and used to identify the board 81 is set for the board channel number as a factory default and the range of 81 to 84 can be set Channel numbers being set are used to specify the target boards in setting parameters and performing the MELSEC data link library function When using two or more boards in a single personal computer set channel numbers not to overlap 1 Setting method Set the channel number with the channel No setting switch Channel No setting SMS Sii il Channel Number 82 EE 9 2 oF 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STA
420. tes the retry count setting information when there is an error response 1 to 7 times Indicates the setting information for the number of automatic return stations during one link scan 1 to 10 stations Stores the parameter information area to be used Ou CPU built in parameters 3 Dedicated instruction parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction and data link startup Du Default parameters automatically starts CC Link Stores the parameter setting status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 K3 Can be used for the master station only App 24 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC P Oui Number Name Description Online ru Master Local Offline Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of each station SWO0069 4 0 Normal 6694 Loading status Other than 0 Stores the error code refer to Chapter 15 Details are stored in SW0098 to 9B and SWO009C to 9F Stores the switch setting status Mn Switch setting 0 Normal status Swooce Stores the current value of the link scan time in 1 ms units 66 time pes Min link scan time Stores the minimum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units TI SW0070 Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter 6701 521015 1 to 64 stations SW0071 Stores the maximum station number that is performing data link ean 6714 station Rober 1 to 64 s
421. the board operates normally on other 304 The Data Parity error had occurred on the PCI bus personal computer the personal computer 1301 may have any problems In this case repair or replace the personal computer It might be failed CC Link Ver 2 board Consult your local Mitsubishi representative Change the Power Option not to enter the 305 The board is not operated normally because the sleep mode hibernation sleep mode hibernation mode or disable the 1314 mode and fast startup is not supported by the board fast startup function and restart the personal computer Remove other option boards Take corrective action for driver WDT error occurrence Refer to Section 16 4 2 Restart the personal computer Check if data is not written to the numbers not listed in the list of link special relays SBs and the list of link special registers SWs The Board error was detected by the hardware self diagnosis Refer to Appendix 2 Check the board installation status f the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair or replace the personal computer It might be failed CC Link Ver 2 board Consult your local Mitsubishi representative value 01h There was no response from hardware Replace the CC Link Ver 2 board 67h 2 Initialization of the 68h Duplicate IRQ or memory assignment Remove other option boards CC Link board has fail
422. the communication cable wiring YES Corresponding module failure 2 3 x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance between stations 16 26 16 26 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the L RUN LED lit Is the SD LED lit NO MELSEC 3 Is the SD LED lit flashing YES Corresponding module failure Are the station No switches set correctly Isnt the station No duplicated Corresponding module failure Station No switch y Is the transmission rate set correctly YES Set the correct transmission rate Yv Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Is the communication cable wired correctly 1 YES y Wire the communication cable ren Corresponding module failure Transmission speed switch Set the correct station No Complete Y Reset the Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 x1 Check for short circuits reversed connections disconnections terminal resistors FG connections overall distance and distance between stations 16 27 16 27 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 2 When the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as a local board The ERR LED of the master station is flashing Do the parameter settings and installed system configuration match correctly NO
423. the communication status of the master station with other stations SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of the Checkeihauser prodiret remote input RX buffer memory program Is the correct master station s parameter information area CPU internal parameters default Check the parameter information SW0067 parameters being used Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal stations of the CC Link system Are the correct terminal resistors connected Has an error occurred in the master station e Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote I O station number Check the maximum communication station recognized by the master station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station designation status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the installation status SW0069 Check the station number duplicate status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the installation parameter matching status SWO009C to SWOO9F Cannot receive inputs from a remote I O station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any duplicate station numbers 16 19 16 19 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Description of
424. the local station The following shows the local station setting 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section For the setting refer to Section 12 2 2 1 2 Parameter settings The following shows the local station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use 2 Channel No 81 Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 Other settings s 1 gt Channel No Channel No 81 p Operational settings Retiy count 35 Set 2 958 No Type 153 Local station Ei ae y mese 5 a Automatic reconnection station count 124 Cancel 3 9M Transmission rate 156kbps 21 Occupied Sta Miccopies testati Default 6 i Default Standby master station N 72 4 y Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode z Input for Er Sta 4 2 6 Check 7 dia En Station information settings Delay information setting 0 zu 50 micro sec All connect cou 8 Driver WDT mentoring time Hamois 2 7 Use driver WDT function No Sta No Expanded cyclic ccupied Sta points 9 Block data assurance per station I Assure block data
425. tings 11 Delay information setting 80 micro sec 15 2 Z FOE 12 gt p Driver WDT monitoring time Use driver WDT function zd No Sta No Station type Occupied Sta 16 11 Remote 120 station 1 station 1 T 2 2 Remote 1 0 station v single Occupies 1 station 1 3 P p Block data assurance per station T Assure block daia This function use link refresh function a 14 gt m 3 1 Parameter settings The following shows the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 10 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 PChannel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type lt Master statio Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Err Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No No 0 Other settings 11 Delay inform
426. tion a Checking by the LED indication on the CC Link Ver 2 board Make sure that the LED status is as follows ON O OFF q The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally gt O No error has occurred gt 0 Data are being transmitted Data being received ED C n rog BL an qr 183883 10 6 10 6 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Checking by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Check that the Board detail information of the CC Link Ver 2 Utility is displayed as shown below Board detail information Channel No p Sta No Master station Ver 2 mode Save SB SW Transmission rate f Mbps Data link status In data link 4 In data link Normal data link is being performed Error status ormal Board type a80BD J61 BT11N Product information fi 40720000000000 B Normal The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally IRQ No menm ROM version bp Memory FISOODD0FIS7FFFFH 140 port Present Error No Error Link scan time ms 2 Min 2 Current 2 Link refresh time ms 3 Min 1 Current 1 LED information ON green The CC Link Ver 2 board is operating normally solls ES smst LOCALT OFF No error has occurred ER
427. tion number 2 RWr Station number 3 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 gt Station number 3 Station number 4 Target areas for clear latch Station number 4 SS Areas retained regardless of the setting The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output RY in the local stations will either clear or retain the data from faulty stations according to the setting The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote registers RWw and RWr in the local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of the setting When a data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station the input data remote input RX and remote output RY from that station is retained regardless of the setting 2 Setting method The setting is performed at Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility For more details on the setting refer to Section 8 2 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 4 3 4 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty standby master function This function enables the data link to continue by switching a faulty master station to a standby master station i e a backup station for the master station Note that even if the master station has been restored automatic switching from the standby master station to the master station is not performed
428. tion systems as well as the remote register RWw and remote register RWr word information for writing and reading used in local station systems Master station PLC CPU Personal computer Local station station number 1 Local station station number 2 CC Link Ver 2 board Network parameters Network parameters 1 Automatic refresh parameters Automatic refresh parameters Network parameters Program Buffer memory Buffer memory Buffer memory Remote input RX i Remote output Remote output RY 1 4 i 3 5 wn station mdReceive Read Receive area from station number 1 Receive ama from Automatic refresh local station No 1 send area local station No 1 RWw RWr RWr 9 10 10 11 Send area to Receive area from Receive area from mdSend wie gt local station No 1 master station Unkscan gt master station Automatic refresh D EILI 9 Send area to 10 Receive area from 10 Receive area from 10 mdSend Wie gt local station No 2 master station Link scan master station Automatic refresh B 14 RWr RWw RWw ES 13 1 13 18 F Receive area from Own station Receive area from mdReceive Read lt Tink scan station number 1 Tink scan gt Automatic refresh D local station No 1 send area local station No 1 14 Eee 1 1 13 It 13 bh
429. tored Device type to be designated Device Type RX X RY Y SB SW RWw RWr Random access buffer Buffer memory 2 Device No Set a head number of a device to be monitored HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 4 Register Device List button 6 button 1 3 5 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC The only devices that can be monitored by the 16 point entry monitoring are those that random access is performable If any device that does not allow random access is designated a device type error 3 will occur For whether or not each device allows random access refer to MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 3 6 Changing word device double word device values Change the specified word device double word device value 1 Menu selection Select Device Write Data changing Continuous change in data on the menu bar 2 Dialog box 1 gt Device Type Device Type spcGrspecial direct buffer register x Start VO No 1 B DEC 2 1 Device Type Device Type ER extension file register 2 gt DeviceNo Block 1 C HEX DEC OCT o 5 2 gt DeviceNo C HEX DEC C OCT 4 3 Setting Data C HEX amp DEC Dum 4 3 Setting Data 4 gt Points C HEX DEC 10
430. trary timing using the mdReceive and mdSend functions respectively Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Local station PLC CPU Transient transmission gt Buffer memory Transient Write transmission mdSend H Transient i Read transmission mdReceive Transient rite S mdSend transmission 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 4 Intelligent device station communication The communication between the master station and the intelligent device station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission a Cyclic transmission Handshaking signals with the intelligent device station positioning start positioning end etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using the remote registers RWw and RWr Personal computer Master station CC Link Ver 2 board Intelligent device station Program Read Remote input RX Link scan Remote input RX mdReceive A Link scan Remote output RY Remote output RY mdSend Remote register RWw Remote mdSend gt register RWw Link scan Remote Link scan Remote mdReceive je register register RWr RWr b Transient transmission Read
431. ts Remote register RWw 2048 points master station remote device station local station intelligent device Maximum No of link points per system station standby master station Remote register RWr 2048 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Expanded cyclic setting Quadruple Octuple 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points No of link points Remote I O RX 30 points for 30 points for 62 points for 126 points for per station local station local station local station local station Remote register RWw 16 points 32 points Remote register RWr 16 points 32 points Remote I O j A RX RY 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Occupies Remote register 1 station RWw TONS T Remote register RWr HOS Ee Remote I O RX RY 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points Occupies Remote register 2 stations RWw 16 points 32 points 64 points Number of link Remote register 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points points per RWr m occupied station Remote I O count RX RY 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Occupies Remote register 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points 3 stations RWw P P Remote register RW 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points Remote I O RX RY 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points Seeupies Hseimote
432. ty by clicking the icon registered in the Start of Windows 1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs Utility name 2 Utiity to setting board and displaying CC Link Ver 2 Utility MS Section 8 2 MELSEC Utility to monitoring devices and changing Device Monitor Utility Section 8 3 the device value MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later 3 Device Monitor Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later When a utility is run while user account control UAC is available the following warning screen appears Select Allow adus button to run the utility User Account Control Ex User Account Control mm un An unidentified program wants access to your computer P Do you want to allow the following program from an unknown publisher to make changes to this computer Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it bero Program name CCBD2UTL exe E CCBD2UTL exe Publisher Unknown m Unidentified Publisher File origin Hard drive on this computer gt Cance Y Show details I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow Itrust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before v Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to
433. u to 161H 162u to 163H 164u to 165u 166 to 167 168 to 169 16 16 16 160 16 16 170u to 171 172u to 173H 174 to 175H 176u to 177H 178u to 179 N ation Buffer memory address EOn to 1 2 to 4 to 5 to E7H to 9 to to EDH to FOH to F1H F2u to 4 to F5u F6u to F7H F8u to F9u 2 App 4 MELSEC The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 17 to 17BH 17 to 17DH 17Ex to 17FH 180 to 181H 182 to 183H 184 to 185u 186 to 187H 188 to 189H 18 to 18BH 18 to 18DH 18 to 18FH 190 to 191H 192 to 193H Local station Station Buffer memory address 194u to 195H 196u to 197H 198 to 199H 19Au to 19BH 19 to 19DH 19 to 19FH 1A0H to 1A1H 1 2 to 1A3H 1A4u to 1A5H 1A6u to 1A7H 1A8u to 1A9H 1 to 1 1 to 1ADH number Station Buffer memory address 1 to 1AFH 1BOu to 1B1H 1B2u to 1B3H 1 4 to 1B5u 1B6u to 1B7H 1 8 to 1B9H 1 to 1BBH 1 to 1 1 to 1BFH 1 0 to 1C1H 1C2u to 1C3H 1 4 to 1 5 1C6H to 1C7H number Station Buffer memory address 1C8H to 1C9H 1 to 1CBH 1CCu to 1
434. umber 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 additional mode Occupies 1 station 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station r r a ses aS Remote input RX Station number 1 1 compatible remote output RY Station number 1 to Ver 2 compatible Station number 2 remote output RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 7 to to 3 When the CC Link Ver 1 board or the CC Link Ver 2 board is set as the standby master station set the CC Link Ver 1 board or the CC Link Ver 2 board respectively as the master station Refer to Section 2 2 1 for combinations of the master station and the standby master station 4 The remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode cannot be used with the QJ61BT11 x5 The additional mode is not supported 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC b Whether send receive is enabled or not The following table indicates whether send receive of cyclic data is enabled or not RJ61BT11 LJ61BT11 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 QJ61BT11N Master station Additional mode Ver 1 mode Ver 2 mode Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 1
435. unctions of the board e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing or removing the board If all power is not turned off not doing so may cause damage to the product e Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard Section 2 3 Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction e Securely mount the board to the PCI slot of the mounting device If the board is not mounted correctly this may lead to malfunctioning failure or cause the board to fall e When mounting the board take care not to become injured by the components that are installed or surrounding materials e When installing the board take care not to contact with other boards e While handling the board be sure to keep it free of static electricity Static electric charges may damage the board or result in malfunction e Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Do not drop the board and the terminal block or subject it to any excessive shock It may damage the board and the terminal block or result in malfunction IWIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Be sure to shut off all phases of t
436. unication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 2 Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Control in EE Progress Cyclic co Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 1 When the master station is down and the data link control is switched to the standby master station the station number of the standby master station will be O 9 Mode selection according to the system The CC Link system has 3 types of modes applicable to various systems Select one of the modes on Parameter settings in the CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Appendix 12 for the mode selection Each of the modes is described below Connectable station The compatibility mode with the CC Link Ver 1 board Select this mode when the cyclic points increasing is not required or when the CC Link Ver 2 board is used as Remote station substitute for the CC Link Ver 1 board Remote device station Remote net Ver 1 mode Select this mode when configuring a new system with the Intelligent device station Remote net Ver 2 mode der cyclic points increasing Local station Select this mode when adding a Ver 2 compatible slave Standby master station Remote net additional mode station to the existing system to incre
437. user needs may be configured Master station ea aie Rie in 3 Device manufactured by a partner manufacturer ODONIS RUNE Remote I O station Programmable controller CPU Master station The station that controls the data link system Remote I O station A remote station that handles bit unit data only Remote device station A remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data Local station A station having a programmable controller CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Intelligent device station A station that can perform transient transmission When applying the program examples and sample programs explained in this manual to the actual system make sure that there is no any problem regarding control on the target system 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC 1 1 Features of the CC Link Ver 2 Board The features of the CC Link Ver 2 board are as follows 1 Personal computers can be incorporated into the CC Link system Installing a CC Link Ver 2 board into a personal computer allows the PC to be used as a master station standby master station or local station compatible with CC Link Ver 2 By using the CC Link Ver 2 board as a master station Ver 2 compatible remote I O stations remote device stations intelligent device stations and local stations can be controlled from the PC Programs in the CC Link Ver 1 board can also be used in the C
438. ve instruction Ver 2 board execution request flag was not turned Increase the arrival monitor time on when own station was executing an instruction If the error persists check the network and target station Number of retries The number of retries exceeded the monitor tme B513 If the error persists check the exceeded set number network and target station A channel number is out of the setting Set the channel of own station B515 Channel number error range and target station to 1 or 2 The number of resends is out of the Set a value in the range from B519 Resend count error setting range to 15 times B51A Amvel monitor dime emer The arrival monitor time is out of the Set a value in the range from setting range to 32767 seconds O B520 Target station number Other than 0 is set for the target Set the target station number to error station number 0 B524 Target station CPU error The target station s CPU is faulty Check the target station s CPU O Access code setting Nonexistent access code attribute was Set the correct access B601 set code attribute Wait a while and then send the requests transient transmission overload status Wait a while and then send the requests transient transmission overload status Sending channel in use own station Arrival wait timeout Transient request There are too many transient requests B602 overload err
439. ws cannot tell i the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could not be verifi Do you still want to install this driver software More Info For Windows Server 2003 R2 the screen shown on the left is displayed Click the button and continue the installation Security Alert Driver Installation 1 The driver software you are installing for PCI MELSEC CC LINK Ver 2 Controller has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tellif the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem A certificate signing or issuer has expired Do you still want to install this driver software 16 8 For Windows Server 2003 R2 the screen shown on the left is displayed Click the button and continue the installation 16 8 16 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Screen Instruction For operating system of Windows XP Service Pack2 or later the confirmation screen for connection to Windows Update may be displayed Select No not this time and click the button Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is ROW S i displayed after the board installation bob ni tee Refer to Section 16 2 4 and install the driver
440. ws the parameter setting values The parameter setting check list and the station information setting check list in Appendix can be used for the setting Table 11 1 Parameter Setting Check List Setting item Setting range Item 1 Channel No Channel No 81 gt Channel No 82 Channel No 83 Channel No 84 2 Sta No Type lt Master statio Local station Standby master station 3 Transmission rate C156kbp3 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 modep Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line 5 Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Operational Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations settings 6 Occupied Sta Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 7 Input for Sta Hold 8 Retry count 3 Times 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Modules 10 Standby master station No No 0 Other settings 11 Delay information setting 0 x 50 micro sec 12 Driver WDT Monitoring Time C No setting x 8 ms 13 Block data assurance per Disable Enable station 14 Link refresh cycle C No setting ms Station information settings 15 All connect count 1 Modules Table 11 2 Station Information Setting Check List Bia Ne Stali n woe Expanded Occupied Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word une cyclic Sta station points station select Occupies i oq
441. x1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs Utility name CC Link Ver 2Utility _ Utility to setting board and displaying status MELSEC 4 3 Utility to monitoring devices and changing the device Device Monitor Utility value x2 MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later 3 Device Monitor Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later b MELSEC Data Link Library MELSEC data link library is used for the following software packages in common When the utilities are installed on the same personal computer the newer MELSEC data link library of the software package is enabled When the installation is completed normally the manual of MELSEC data link library is registered in the MELSEC folder as the same folder as the utility In order to view the manuals Adobe Reader is required Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site When using 64 bit version operating system the icon may not be displayed even when Adobe Reader is installed 7 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE MELSEC SWODNC MNETH B SW1DNC CCBD2 8 1 11M or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual i SW1DNC MNETG B 1 00A MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s SW1DNC CCIEF B l Reference 1 02C or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 Dep
442. x10 x1 Awserpreezss o 1 STATION NO O 1 1 MITSUBISHI MELSEC eser orsezss e01 904 9291 PW 2 28 2 o 10 01 RNO 64 654 654 C LRUN c sD C 1 MODE RESET c AGO LER C c RS422 AX nnnnmnmnmnmmnn 14 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION AJ65BT D75P2 S3 MELSEC 14 4 Creating a Program Create the program for the following setting and controls of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Initial setting Refer to Section 14 4 1 Zero point return control Refer to Section 14 4 2 Positioning control Refer to Section 14 4 3 JOG operation control Refer to Section 14 4 4 Set parameters and perform positioning settings in advance with the AD75 software package If a user program is used to perform reading and writing from to the buffer memory the communication time delay may occur and the user program becomes complicated 14 4 1 Initial setting The following shows the relation between the user program on the PC and intelligent device station s I O operations and initial setting of the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Master station station No 0 Personal computer
443. xplains the master station setting 10 2 1 Switch setting channel No setting The channel No for the CC Link Ver 2 board is set to 81 as an example in this section Im qi 1E RUN ERR OO OO SD RD Channel No setting switch 1 ren 2 e E D Lie sa qr 1 T 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC 10 2 2 Parameter settings The following shows the master station s parameter settings by the CC Link Ver 2 Utility Parameter settings screen Other settings screen Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board settina Check all the Channel No that you use V 81 ChannelNoS2 ChannelNo 83 Channel No 84 Other settings Ch No a 1 No Channel No 81 v 8 Retry count 374 Set Operational settings 3 Si 2 5ta No Type 0 H Master station E pe mE Other settings 5 9 Automatic reconnection station count 1 E Cancel 3 Transmission rate 156kbps X Occupied Sta Default 6 10 9 Standby master station No 09 4 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 Input for Er Sta 4 2 9 6 Check 7 Station information set
444. y One of the following error has occurred OFF Board WDT error Hardware failure Board resetting The driver is not started ERR Communication error Confirm the error with LED status displayed on Board detail information screen of CC Link Ver 2 utility Refer to Section 8 2 2 One of the following error has occurred Flashing A data link faulty station was detected The station number is already in use Sending data Not sending data a Receiving data Not receiving data b When the RUN LED is flashing An error which is peculiar to boards has occurred Refer to the troubleshooting and take corrective action Refer to Section 16 4 3 Flashin One of the following error has occurred ashin Embed ERU DEL 9 ERR LED SD LED and RD LED ON Operating system startup error has occurred lt system startup error has occurred EE Driver WDT error has occurred RD PCI bus error has occurred 5 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC 5 3 Installation This section explains the handling precautions and installation environment of the CC Link Ver 2 board 5 3 1 Precautions on handling the CC Link Ver 2 board The following explains the handling precautions of the CC Link Ver 2 board NCAUTION Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the board Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to d
445. yclic transmission data with a user program f The master station duplex function is not available The control is switched from the standby master station to the master station only once Therefore if the standby master station goes down after the control has been switched to the standby master station due to master station failure the CC Link system will stop the data link The control will not be switched even if the master station functions properly g When the master station goes down and the data link control right is switched to the standby master station the standby master station number is identified an error number Corresponding bits in SB0080 SWO0080 to SW0083 turn ON The station number of the standby master station is changed to 0 from the station number set by the parameter because there is no standby master station The data linking is successfully performed Specifying a standby master station as an error invalid station prevents this kind of error detection h When the standby master station is controlling the data link parameters cannot be updated 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC i If the terminal block of the master station is removed and then replaced in its original position without turning the power off while the master station is controlling the data link both the master and standby master stations will attempt to operate as master stations and an error will occur The ERR LED will be flicker j Wh
446. your computer For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Appendix 15 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 1 2 Quitting a utility The following explains how to exit each utility 1 Exiting CC Link Ver 2 Utility To exit the utility click the button at the bottom of the utility screen CC Link Ver 2 utility ni Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test 5101 Channel No 81 LED information Sta No 1 Local station Ver 1 mode Link scan time 0 ms RUN ERR Data link status Waiting for receiving parameters Error status Normal Details lot2 Channel No 82 r LED information Sta No Link scan time ms RUN ERR i Data link status rx Error status SSS Details j r Slot3 Channel No 83 r LED information Sta No Link scan time ms RUN ED ERR NE Data link status Error status Details Slot4 Channel No 84 LED information Sta Lini RUN Device Monitor New 2 Exiting the Device Monitor Utility To quite the Device Monitor Utility click Menu Exit on the menu bar When a dialog box is displayed click the button to quite the Device Monitor Utility e Device Monitor Utility Setting Device Write DataF 16 point register monitor 8 OPERATING THE UTILITY SOFTWARE MELSEC 8 2 CC Link Ver 2 Uti
447. ze X Close Alt F4 Version information CC Link Ver 2 utility version information Software package 00 SW1DNC CCBD2 B Version 1 004 CC Link V er 2 utility 2005 04 01 COPYRIGHT C 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED App 69 App 69 APPENDIX MELSEC Appendix 11 CC Link Version 1 SLD Cun c 88 pe App 70 There are two types of CC Link version i e Ver 1 and Ver 2 1 Definition of Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 A product with a cable length of 20cm or longer between stations which has been achieved by improving the restriction on the conventional cable distance between the stations is defined as Ver 1 10 Whereas the conventional product is defined as Ver 1 00 For the maximum total cable length for the Ver 1 10 products refer to Section 3 2 3 The conditions requiring the cable length to be 20cm or longer between stations are as follows 1 All the stations comprising a CC Link system must be of Ver 1 10 2 All the data link cables must be Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables POINT If stations of Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 are mixed in a system the maximum total cable length and the cable length between stations will be as specified by Ver 1 00 For the maximum total cable length and the cable length between stations for the Ver 1 00 products refer to Section 3 2 2 2 Definition of Ver 2 The CC Link Ver 2 board is define

Type Q80BD-J61BT11N/Q81BD-J61BT11 CC-Link System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents